HP P3005d, P3005dn, LaserJet P3005 Printer series User guide

HP P3005d, P3005dn, LaserJet P3005 Printer series User guide
HP LaserJet P3005 Printer
Software Technical Reference
HP LaserJet P3005 series Printer
Software Technical Reference
Copyright and license
Trademark credits
©2006 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop®, Acrobat®,
PostScript®, and the Acrobat logo® are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Reproduction, adaptation or translation
without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Edition 2, 1/2007
Corel® is a trademark or registered
trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel
Corporation Limited.
EnergyStar® and the Energy Star logo® are
US registered marks of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency.
FireWire® FireWire is a trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
Java™ is a US trademark of Sun
Microsystems, Inc.
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT®
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Pentium® is a trademark or registered
trademark of Intel Corporation or its
subsidiaries in the United States and other
countries.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
Table of contents
1 Purpose and scope
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 1
Device features .................................................................................................................................... 3
Printing-system software ...................................................................................................................... 6
System requirements ........................................................................................................... 6
Windows .............................................................................................................. 6
Linux .................................................................................................................... 6
UNIX® ................................................................................................................ 6
Operating-system support .................................................................................................. 6
Print drivers ......................................................................................................... 7
Print driver support in other operating systems ................................................... 7
Availability ........................................................................................................................... 8
Printing-system software on the Web ................................................................. 9
In-box printing-system software CDs .................................................................. 9
Windows partition ............................................................................. 10
CD versions ...................................................................................... 10
HP LaserJet documentation ............................................................................................................... 15
HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide ........................................................................................ 16
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet P3005 Series Printing-System Install Notes ............................ 17
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide ............................................................................ 17
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide .................................................................................... 18
2 Software description
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 19
MS Windows printing-system software .............................................................................................. 20
Printing system and installer .............................................................................................. 20
HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD for MS Windows
systems ............................................................................................................. 20
Installer features ................................................................................................ 22
HP LaserJet print drivers ................................................................................................... 23
HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers .................................................... 24
Select the best print driver ................................................................................ 24
Complete LaserJet printing system .................................................. 25
HP PCL 6 Unidriver .......................................................................... 25
HP PCL 5 Unidriver .......................................................................... 25
PS Emulation Unidriver .................................................................... 25
HP universal print driver (UPD) ........................................................ 25
Print-driver version numbers for MS Windows operating systems .................... 26
MS Windows driver configuration ....................................................................................................... 28
ENWW
iii
Driver autoconfiguration ..................................................................................................... 28
Bidirectional communication .............................................................................................. 28
Enterprise AutoConfiguration ............................................................................................. 29
Update Now ....................................................................................................................... 30
HP Driver Preconfiguration ................................................................................................ 31
Lockable features ............................................................................................. 33
Continuous export ............................................................................................ 33
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool ........................................................................................... 35
HP Easy Printer Care ......................................................................................................................... 36
HP Embedded Web Server ............................................................................................................... 37
Access to the HP EWS ...................................................................................................... 37
The HP EWS frame ........................................................................................................... 38
Information tab ................................................................................................................... 38
Links to off-product solutions ............................................................................................. 39
Device Status screen ........................................................................................................ 39
Configuration Page ........................................................................................................... 40
Settings tab ........................................................................................................................ 41
Configure device ................................................................................................................ 41
Alerts .................................................................................................................................. 42
Security .............................................................................................................................. 44
Networking tab .................................................................................................................. 44
Configuration ..................................................................................................... 45
Security section ................................................................................................. 46
Diagnostics section ........................................................................................... 46
HP Web Jetadmin .............................................................................................................................. 47
3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 49
Font support ....................................................................................................................................... 50
Basic fonts ........................................................................................................................ 50
Default fonts ....................................................................................................................... 50
Print-driver installation instructions ..................................................................................................... 56
General MS Windows installation instructions .................................................................. 56
Install from the printing-system CD ................................................................... 56
Install from a network or from downloaded files ............................................... 57
Detailed MS Windows install instructions .......................................................................... 57
Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons .............................................................. 57
Modify a pre-existing installation ....................................................................... 58
Direct-connect installation through a USB or parallel port ................................ 59
Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence ............................... 59
Install print drivers by using Add Printer ............................................................ 85
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows ..................................................... 86
Run the Installer Customization Wizard ........................................... 87
Dialog boxes ..................................................................................... 87
Distribution ...................................................................................... 104
Point and Print installation for Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ........................................................ 105
Set a default printer ......................................................................................................... 106
4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
iv
ENWW
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 107
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me ........................................................... 109
Device control panel ........................................................................................................ 109
Software-program print-dialog box .................................................................................. 109
Print-driver user interface ................................................................................................ 109
Help system ...................................................................................................................................... 111
What's this? Help ............................................................................................................. 111
Context-sensitive Help ..................................................................................................... 111
Incompatible Options messages ..................................................................................... 111
Bubble Help ..................................................................................................................... 112
Finishing tab features ....................................................................................................................... 114
Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 115
Default Print Settings ...................................................................................... 115
User Guide Print Settings ............................................................................... 118
Document Options ........................................................................................................... 118
Correct Order for Rear Bin .............................................................................. 118
Print on Both Sides ......................................................................................... 119
Automatically print on both sides ................................................... 120
Manually printing on both sides ...................................................... 120
Flip Pages Up .................................................................................................. 122
Booklet Printing ............................................................................................... 123
Book and Booklet Printing .............................................................. 123
Print a booklet ................................................................................. 124
Pages per Sheet ............................................................................................. 124
Print Page Borders .......................................................................................... 124
Page Order ...................................................................................................... 125
Document preview image ................................................................................................ 125
Print Quality ..................................................................................................................... 126
Best Quality ..................................................................................................... 126
Faster Printing ................................................................................................. 126
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver ................................ 126
Current Setting ............................................................................... 127
Font Settings .................................................................................. 127
Output Settings ............................................................................... 127
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver ................................ 128
Current Setting ............................................................................... 129
Graphic Settings ............................................................................. 129
Font Settings ................................................................................. 129
Output Settings ............................................................................... 129
Effects tab features .......................................................................................................................... 131
Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 132
Fit To Page ...................................................................................................................... 132
Print Document On ......................................................................................... 132
Scale to Fit ...................................................................................................... 132
% of Normal Size ............................................................................................ 133
Document preview image ................................................................................................ 133
Watermarks ..................................................................................................................... 134
Current Watermarks ........................................................................................ 134
First Page Only ............................................................................................... 134
Edit… .............................................................................................................. 134
ENWW
v
Current Watermarks ....................................................................... 135
Watermark Message ...................................................................... 136
Message Angle ............................................................................... 136
Document preview image ............................................................... 136
Font Attributes ................................................................................ 136
Default watermark settings ............................................................. 137
Paper tab features ............................................................................................................................ 139
Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 140
Paper Options .................................................................................................................. 140
Size is .............................................................................................................. 140
Custom ............................................................................................................ 141
Name .............................................................................................. 142
Save, Delete, or Rename ............................................................... 143
Custom size (width and height controls) ......................................... 144
Custom width and height control limits ........................................... 144
Dynamic measurement units ......................................................... 145
Close .............................................................................................. 145
Source is ......................................................................................................... 145
Type is ............................................................................................................ 146
Use Different Paper/Covers ............................................................................ 147
Front Cover ..................................................................................... 147
First Page ....................................................................................... 148
Other Pages ................................................................................... 149
Last Page ....................................................................................... 149
Back Cover ..................................................................................... 150
Document preview image ................................................................................................ 151
Device image ................................................................................................................... 151
Job Storage tab features .................................................................................................................. 152
Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 155
Status dialog box ............................................................................................................. 155
Job Storage Mode ........................................................................................................... 155
Off ................................................................................................................... 155
Proof and Hold ................................................................................................ 155
Private Job ...................................................................................................... 156
Quick Copy ...................................................................................................................... 156
Stored Job ....................................................................................................................... 156
PIN ................................................................................................................................... 157
Job Notification Options ................................................................................................... 157
User Name ....................................................................................................................... 157
Job Name ........................................................................................................................ 157
Using job-storage features when printing ........................................................................ 158
Releasing a job-storage print job .................................................................... 158
Deleting a job-storage print job ....................................................................... 159
Basics tab features .......................................................................................................................... 160
Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 161
Copies .............................................................................................................................. 161
Orientation ...................................................................................................................... 161
Document preview image ................................................................................................ 162
About… ............................................................................................................................ 162
Configure tab features ..................................................................................................................... 164
vi
ENWW
Printer Model ................................................................................................................... 165
Paper Handling Options ................................................................................................... 166
Duplexing unit ................................................................................................. 167
Allow Manual Duplexing .................................................................................. 167
Mopier Enabled .............................................................................................. 167
Mopier mode and collation ............................................................. 167
Optional Paper Sources ................................................................................. 168
Other Options .................................................................................................................. 168
Storage ............................................................................................................ 169
Fonts ............................................................................................................... 169
Alternative Letterhead Mode ........................................................................... 171
Ignore Application Collation ............................................................................ 171
Printer Memory ................................................................................................ 171
Include Types in Application Source List ....................................................... 171
Automatic configuration ................................................................................................... 172
Printer image ................................................................................................................... 172
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features ........................................................... 173
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me ........................................... 173
PS 3 emulation support for the HP LaserJet P3005 ........................................................ 174
Help system ..................................................................................................................... 174
What's this Help .............................................................................................. 174
Context-sensitive Help .................................................................................... 174
Paper tab features ........................................................................................................... 174
Paper size ....................................................................................................... 176
Layout ............................................................................................................. 176
Orientation ....................................................................................................... 177
Paper source ................................................................................................... 177
Copies ............................................................................................................. 177
Unprintable Area… .......................................................................................... 178
More Options… ............................................................................................... 178
About … .......................................................................................................... 179
Restore Defaults ............................................................................................. 179
Graphics tab features ...................................................................................................... 179
Resolution ...................................................................................................... 180
Halftoning ........................................................................................................ 181
Special ............................................................................................................ 181
Scaling ............................................................................................................ 181
Restore Defaults ............................................................................................. 181
Fonts tab features ............................................................................................................ 181
Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table ....... 182
Font Substitution Table ................................................................... 182
Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts ............................. 183
Always use TrueType fonts ............................................................................. 183
Send Fonts As… ............................................................................ 183
Restore Defaults ............................................................................. 185
Device Options tab features ............................................................................................ 185
Available printer memory ................................................................................ 187
Printer features ................................................................................................ 187
FastRes 1200 ................................................................................. 188
User ................................................................................................ 188
ENWW
vii
PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) ............................................................ 188
PIN digit 2 (for Private Job) ............................................................ 188
PIN digit 3 (for Private Job) ............................................................ 188
PIN digit 4 (for Private Job) ............................................................ 188
HPPJLEncoding ............................................................................. 188
EconoMode .................................................................................... 188
Job storage ..................................................................................... 188
Collate ............................................................................................ 190
Fit to Page ...................................................................................... 190
Print Quality .................................................................................... 190
Watermark ...................................................................................... 191
Watermark (Pages per Sheet) ........................................................ 191
Watermark Font .............................................................................. 191
Watermark Size .............................................................................. 192
Watermark Angle ............................................................................ 192
Watermark Style ............................................................................. 192
Watermark Intensity ........................................................................ 192
Print Watermark .............................................................................. 192
Installable options ........................................................................................... 192
Tray 3 ............................................................................................. 193
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing) ................................................... 193
Printer Hard Disk ............................................................................ 193
Mopier Mode ................................................................................... 193
Job Storage .................................................................................... 193
VMOption ........................................................................................ 194
Restore Defaults ............................................................................................. 194
PostScript tab features .................................................................................................... 194
PostScript output format .................................................................................. 195
PostScript header ............................................................................................ 196
Print PostScript error information .................................................................... 196
PostScript timeout values ................................................................................ 196
Advanced… ..................................................................................................... 196
PostScript Language Level ............................................................. 197
Bitmap compression ....................................................................... 197
Data format ..................................................................................... 198
Send CTRL+D before job ............................................................... 198
Send CTRL+D after job ................................................................. 198
Restore Defaults ............................................................................................. 198
5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 199
Access to print drivers in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ....................... 201
Device control panel ........................................................................................................ 201
Software-program print-dialog box .................................................................................. 201
Print-driver user interface ................................................................................................ 201
Printing Preferences driver tabs ...................................................................... 201
Properties driver tabs ...................................................................................... 202
Help system ...................................................................................................................................... 203
What's this? Help ............................................................................................................. 203
Context-sensitive Help ..................................................................................................... 203
viii
ENWW
Incompatible Print Settings messages ............................................................................. 203
Advanced tab features ..................................................................................................................... 205
Paper/Output ................................................................................................................... 206
Copy Count .................................................................................................... 207
Collated ........................................................................................................... 207
Graphic ............................................................................................................................ 207
True Type Font ................................................................................................ 207
Document Options ........................................................................................................... 208
Advanced Printing Features ............................................................................ 208
Print Optimizations ......................................................................................... 208
PostScript Options .......................................................................................... 208
Printer Features .............................................................................................. 209
Layout Options ................................................................................................ 210
Paper/Quality tab features ................................................................................................................ 211
Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 212
Default Print Settings ...................................................................................... 213
User Guide Print Settings ................................................................................ 215
Default Print Settings ...................................................................................... 216
Paper Options .................................................................................................................. 216
Size is .............................................................................................................. 217
Custom Paper Size ......................................................................................... 218
Name .............................................................................................. 218
Paper size ....................................................................................... 219
Units ............................................................................................... 219
Custom width and height control limits ........................................... 219
Source is ......................................................................................................... 219
Type is ............................................................................................................. 220
Use Different Paper/Covers ............................................................................................. 221
Front Cover ..................................................................................................... 221
First Page ........................................................................................................ 222
Other Pages .................................................................................................... 223
Last Page ........................................................................................................ 224
Back Cover ...................................................................................................... 225
Document preview image ................................................................................................ 227
Print Quality ..................................................................................................................... 227
Print Quality drop-down menu ......................................................................... 227
EconoMode ..................................................................................................... 228
Effects tab features .......................................................................................................................... 229
Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 230
Resizing Options .............................................................................................................. 231
Actual Size ...................................................................................................... 231
Print Document On ......................................................................................... 231
Scale to Fit ..................................................................................................... 231
% of Normal Size ............................................................................................ 232
Document preview image ................................................................................................ 232
Watermarks ..................................................................................................................... 232
Current watermarks ......................................................................................... 234
Watermark Message ....................................................................................... 234
Message Angle ............................................................................................... 234
Font Attributes ................................................................................................. 234
ENWW
ix
Default watermark settings .............................................................................. 235
Finishing tab features ....................................................................................................................... 237
Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 238
Document options ............................................................................................................ 239
Correct Order for Rear Bin .............................................................................. 239
Print on Both Sides ......................................................................................... 239
Automatically print on both sides ................................................... 240
Manually print on both sides ........................................................... 240
Flip Pages Up .................................................................................................. 242
Booklet layout .................................................................................................. 243
Book and Booklet Printing .............................................................. 243
Print a booklet ................................................................................. 243
Pages per Sheet ............................................................................................. 244
Print Page Borders .......................................................................................... 244
Page Order ...................................................................................................... 244
Document preview image ................................................................................................ 245
Orientation ....................................................................................................................... 245
Job Storage tab features .................................................................................................................. 246
Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 249
Status group box .............................................................................................................. 249
Job Storage Mode ........................................................................................................... 249
Off ................................................................................................................... 249
Proof and Hold ............................................................................................... 249
Private Job ...................................................................................................... 250
Quick Copy ...................................................................................................................... 250
Stored Job ....................................................................................................................... 250
Require PIN ..................................................................................................................... 251
Job Notification Options ................................................................................................... 251
User Name ....................................................................................................................... 251
Job Name ........................................................................................................................ 252
Using job-storage features when printing ........................................................................ 252
Releasing a job-storage print job .................................................................... 253
Deleting a job-storage print job ....................................................................... 253
Services tab features ........................................................................................................................ 255
Internet Services .............................................................................................................. 256
Device services ................................................................................................................ 256
Device Settings tab features ............................................................................................................ 257
Form to Tray Assignment ................................................................................................ 258
Font Substitution Table .................................................................................................... 259
External Fonts .................................................................................................................. 260
Installing external fonts ................................................................................... 260
Removing external fonts ................................................................................. 261
PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings .......................................................................... 261
Available PostScript Memory .......................................................................... 262
Output Protocol ............................................................................................... 262
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job .......................................................................... 262
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job ............................................................................ 262
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray ............................................................. 263
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray ..................................................... 263
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts ............................................. 263
x
ENWW
Job Timeout .................................................................................................... 263
Wait Timeout ................................................................................................... 263
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline ................................................... 263
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline ................................................. 263
Installable Options ........................................................................................................... 264
Automatic Configuration .................................................................................. 264
Tray 3 .............................................................................................................. 264
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) .................................................................. 264
Allow Manual Duplexing .................................................................................. 265
Printer Memory ................................................................................................ 265
Printer Hard Disk ............................................................................................. 265
Job storage ..................................................................................................... 265
Mopier Mode ................................................................................................... 265
Mopier mode and collation .............................................................................. 266
Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only) ................................... 266
JPEG Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only) ......................................... 267
About tab features ............................................................................................................................ 268
6 Macintosh
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 271
Macintosh printing-system software ................................................................................................. 272
Hardware requirements ................................................................................................... 272
Operating-system support ............................................................................................... 272
Availability ........................................................................................................................ 272
Printing-system software on the Web ............................................................. 273
Printing-system software ................................................................ 273
Software component availability ..................................................... 273
In-box printing-system software CDs .............................................................. 273
Macintosh partition ......................................................................... 273
CD versions .................................................................................... 274
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions ...................................................................................... 276
Macintosh component descriptions ................................................................................. 276
HP LaserJet PPDs .......................................................................................... 276
PDEs ............................................................................................................... 276
HP Embedded Web Server ............................................................................. 277
Install notes (Readme file) .............................................................................. 277
Online help ...................................................................................................... 277
Install the Macintosh printing system ............................................................................... 277
General installation for Macintosh operating systems ..................................... 277
Detailed Mac OS X installation ........................................................................ 278
Main Install dialog sequence .......................................................... 278
Printer setup .................................................................................................... 285
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4 and later) ............................ 285
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3 ............................................ 290
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.2.8 ......................................... 293
Troubleshooting the printer setup ................................................... 297
Uninstall the Macintosh printing system .......................................................................... 297
Macintosh HP Printer Utility .............................................................................................................. 298
Access to the HP Printer Utility ........................................................................................ 298
Supplies Status ................................................................................................................ 301
ENWW
xi
Device Information ........................................................................................................... 305
File Upload ....................................................................................................................... 305
Update Firmware ............................................................................................................. 306
Upload Fonts ................................................................................................................... 307
HP Support ...................................................................................................................... 308
Duplex mode .................................................................................................................... 310
Economode ...................................................................................................................... 311
Resolution ........................................................................................................................ 312
Trays Configuration ......................................................................................................... 313
Lock Resources ............................................................................................................... 314
Stored Jobs ...................................................................................................................... 314
Releasing a job-storage print job .................................................................... 315
Deleting a job-storage print job ....................................................................... 316
E-mail Alerts .................................................................................................................... 316
Network Settings .............................................................................................................. 317
Bonjour Settings .............................................................................................................. 318
Additional Settings ........................................................................................................... 319
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) .................................................................................................. 320
Access to the HP EWS .................................................................................................... 320
Information tab ................................................................................................................. 322
Device Status .................................................................................................. 322
Configuration page .......................................................................................... 323
Supplies Status page ...................................................................................... 324
Event Log ........................................................................................................ 325
Usage Page .................................................................................................... 326
Device Information .......................................................................................... 327
Control Panel Snapshot .................................................................................. 327
Print ................................................................................................................. 328
Printing a file or updating firmware from the Print screen ............... 329
Settings tab ...................................................................................................................... 329
Configure Device ............................................................................................. 329
Using the menus on the Configure Device screen ......................... 330
E-mail Server .................................................................................................. 330
Configuring outgoing e-mail ............................................................ 331
Configuring the return e-mail address ............................................ 331
Alerts ............................................................................................................... 331
AutoSend ........................................................................................................ 332
Turn on the AutoSend feature ........................................................ 333
Security ........................................................................................................... 333
Edit Other Links ............................................................................................... 334
Adding a link ................................................................................... 335
Removing a link .............................................................................. 335
Device Information .......................................................................................... 335
Language ........................................................................................................ 335
Date & Time .................................................................................................... 336
Date/Time Format ........................................................................... 337
Clock Drift Correction ..................................................................... 337
Wake Time ...................................................................................................... 338
Networking tab ................................................................................................................ 338
Configuration ................................................................................................... 339
xii
ENWW
Security section ............................................................................................... 340
Diagnostics section ......................................................................................... 340
7 Engineering Details
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 341
File to E-mail utility ........................................................................................................................... 342
Media attributes ................................................................................................................................ 344
Media sources and destinations ...................................................................................... 344
Media-source commands ................................................................................................ 344
Driver-supported media sizes .......................................................................................... 345
Driver-supported media types .......................................................................................... 347
Custom paper sizes ......................................................................................................... 348
Media-type commands .................................................................................................... 349
Remote firmware updates ............................................................................................................... 350
Print a configuration page ............................................................................................... 350
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site .................................................... 351
Downloading the new firmware to the device .................................................................. 351
Printer messages during the firmware update ................................................................ 351
Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser ............................................. 353
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection ......................... 354
Remote firmware update through a local MS Windows port ........................................... 355
Windows 98 SE or Windows Me ..................................................................... 355
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 ................................. 356
Remote firmware update through a USB port .................................................................. 357
Remote firmware update through an MS Windows network ........................................... 357
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems ................................................................... 358
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command ................................................... 358
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin ..................................................... 359
Printing print-ready documents ....................................................................................................... 361
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser ................................................. 361
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection ............................. 362
Print-ready printing by using a local MS Windows port ................................................... 363
Windows 98 SE or Windows Me ..................................................................... 363
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 ................................. 364
Print-ready file printing in an MS Windows network ........................................................ 364
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems ......................................................................... 364
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command ....................................................... 364
Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 367
ENWW
xiii
xiv
ENWW
List of tables
Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview .............................................................................................. 1
Table 1-2 HP LaserJet P3005 printer features ................................................................................................... 3
Table 1-3 Printing-system software support ....................................................................................................... 7
Table 1-4 Software component availability for HP LaserJet P3005 printer ........................................................ 8
Table 1-5 CD 1 – Americas .............................................................................................................................. 11
Table 1-6 CD 2 – Asia Pacific .......................................................................................................................... 12
Table 1-7 CD 3 – Europe, Middle East, Africa ................................................................................................. 13
Table 1-8 Document availability ....................................................................................................................... 15
Table 2-1 Print drivers included with the HP LaserJet P3005 printer ............................................................... 24
Table 2-2 Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication
in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 ................................................................................. 28
Table 2-3 EAC availability in MS Windows and Microsoft Share ..................................................................... 29
Table 2-4 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments ........................................................................... 30
Table 2-5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration .......................................................... 33
Table 3-1 Default fonts ..................................................................................................................................... 50
Table 3-2 Additional PS emulation fonts .......................................................................................................... 52
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer ........................................ 116
Table 4-2 Page orientation ............................................................................................................................. 122
Table 4-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks .................................................................. 138
Table 4-4 Name drop-down menu text strings ............................................................................................... 143
Table 4-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes ............................................................................................................. 144
Table 4-6 Close dialog-box text strings .......................................................................................................... 145
Table 4-7 Printer-model configuration settings .............................................................................................. 166
Table 4-8 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings ..................................................................................... 168
Table 5-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer ........................................ 213
Table 5-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes ............................................................................................................ 219
Table 5-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks .................................................................. 236
Table 5-4 Page orientation ............................................................................................................................. 242
Table 5-5 Driver mopier mode and collation settings .................................................................................... 266
Table 6-1 Adding a device in Macintosh operating systems .......................................................................... 278
Table 7-1 HP LaserJet P3005 media sources and destinations ................................................................... 344
Table 7-2 Media-source commands .............................................................................................................. 344
Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes ............................................................................................ 345
Table 7-4 Supported input media types ......................................................................................................... 347
Table 7-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes ............................................................................................................ 348
Table 7-6 Media-type commands ................................................................................................................... 349
Table 7-7 Troubleshooting a firmware update .............................................................................................. 351
Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure .................................................................................... 352
Table 7-9 Update messages .......................................................................................................................... 352
ENWW
xv
xvi
ENWW
List of figures
Figure 1-1
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-7
Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-6
Figure 3-7
Figure 3-8
Figure 3-9
Figure 3-10
Figure 3-11
Figure 3-12
Figure 3-13
Figure 3-14
Figure 3-15
Figure 3-16
Figure 3-17
Figure 3-18
Figure 3-19
Figure 3-20
Figure 3-21
Figure 3-22
Figure 3-23
Figure 3-24
Figure 3-25
Figure 3-26
Figure 3-27
Figure 3-28
Figure 3-29
Figure 3-30
Figure 3-31
ENWW
Installation software CD printer-documentation screen .................................................................. 15
Installation software CD browser ................................................................................................... 21
HP EWS Information tab – Device Status screen ........................................................................... 39
HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen .................................................................. 40
HP EWS Settings tab – Configure Device screen .......................................................................... 42
HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen ............................................................................................. 43
HP EWS Settings tab – Security screen ......................................................................................... 44
HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings screen ...................................................................... 45
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box ......................................................... 58
Cancel dialog box ........................................................................................................................... 58
Language Selection dialog box ....................................................................................................... 60
Welcome to the HP LaserJet 5200 Setup Wizard dialog box ........................................................ 61
Software License Agreement dialog box ....................................................................................... 62
Printer Connection dialog box ........................................................................................................ 63
Firewall Detected dialog box ........................................................................................................... 64
Searching dialog box ...................................................................................................................... 65
Printer Not Found dialog box .......................................................................................................... 66
Printers Found dialog box ............................................................................................................. 67
Printer Found dialog box ............................................................................................................... 68
Confirm Network Settings dialog box ............................................................................................ 69
Confirm Changing Setting dialog box ........................................................................................... 70
Check Printer Connection dialog box ........................................................................................... 71
Specify Printer dialog box ............................................................................................................. 72
Printer Settings dialog box ............................................................................................................ 73
Set Port Name dialog box ............................................................................................................. 74
Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box ............................................................................................. 75
Model dialog box ........................................................................................................................... 76
Installation Type dialog box ......................................................................................................... 76
Drivers dialog box ........................................................................................................................ 77
Driver Details dialog box ............................................................................................................... 78
Ready to Install dialog box ........................................................................................................... 79
Printer PropertiesGeneraltab ........................................................................................................ 80
Printer Properties Sharing tab ....................................................................................................... 81
Installing dialog box ...................................................................................................................... 82
Finish dialog box ........................................................................................................................... 83
HP LaserJet P3005 Next Steps dialog box ................................................................................... 84
Test Page dialog box .................................................................................................................... 84
HP Registration screen ................................................................................................................. 85
Language Selection dialog box ..................................................................................................... 87
xvii
Figure 3-32
Figure 3-33
Figure 3-34
Figure 3-35
Figure 3-36
Figure 3-37
Figure 3-38
Figure 3-39
Figure 3-40
Figure 3-41
Figure 3-42
Figure 3-43
Figure 3-44
Figure 3-45
Figure 3-46
Figure 3-47
Figure 3-48
Figure 3-49
Figure 3-50
Figure 3-51
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Figure 4-7
Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9
Figure 4-10
Figure 4-11
Figure 4-12
Figure 4-13
Figure 4-14
Figure 4-15
Figure 4-16
Figure 4-17
Figure 4-18
Figure 4-19
Figure 4-20
Figure 4-21
Figure 4-22
Figure 4-23
Figure 4-24
Figure 4-25
Figure 4-26
Figure 4-27
Figure 4-28
Figure 4-29
Figure 4-30
xviii
Welcome to the HP LaserJet P3005 Installation Customization Wizard screen ........................... 88
Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box .................................................................... 88
Language dialog box .................................................................................................................... 89
Printer Port dialog box .................................................................................................................. 90
Browse for Printer dialog box ........................................................................................................ 90
Printer Connection dialog box ....................................................................................................... 91
Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box ..................................................................................................... 92
Port Creation Options dialog box .................................................................................................. 93
Model dialog box ........................................................................................................................... 94
Drivers dialog box ......................................................................................................................... 94
Driver Details dialog box ............................................................................................................... 95
Driver Configuration dialog box .................................................................................................... 96
Driver Configuration dialog box – 2 .............................................................................................. 97
Additional Software dialog box ..................................................................................................... 98
Additional software Details dialog box .......................................................................................... 99
Custom Installer Location dialog box .......................................................................................... 100
Ready to Create Installer dialog box ........................................................................................... 101
Printer Properties General tab .................................................................................................... 102
Installing dialog box .................................................................................................................... 103
Finish dialog box ......................................................................................................................... 104
A typical constraint message with an OK button .......................................................................... 111
A typical page with a Bubble Help icon ........................................................................................ 112
The default Finishing tab .............................................................................................................. 114
Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box .................................................................................. 122
Page-order preview images ......................................................................................................... 125
Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver ............................................ 126
Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver ........................................... 128
Effects tab ..................................................................................................................................... 131
Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) ......................................... 133
Watermark Details dialog box .................................................................................................... 135
Paper tab .................................................................................................................................... 139
Paper Options group box (default) .............................................................................................. 140
Custom Paper Size dialog box ................................................................................................... 141
Front Cover options .................................................................................................................... 147
First Page options ...................................................................................................................... 148
Other Pages options ................................................................................................................... 149
Last Page options ....................................................................................................................... 150
Back Cover setting ...................................................................................................................... 150
Job Storage tab ........................................................................................................................... 154
Basics tab ................................................................................................................................... 160
About This Driver dialog box ....................................................................................................... 163
Configure tab .............................................................................................................................. 165
More Configuration Options dialog box ..................................................................................... 169
Configure Font Cards dialog box ................................................................................................ 170
Paper tab .................................................................................................................................... 175
Custom-designed size dialog box ............................................................................................... 176
Page dimensions in inches ......................................................................................................... 177
Unprintable Area dialog box ....................................................................................................... 178
More Paper Options dialog box .................................................................................................. 178
About dialog box ......................................................................................................................... 179
ENWW
Figure 4-31
Figure 4-32
Figure 4-33
Figure 4-34
Figure 4-35
Figure 4-36
Figure 4-37
Figure 5-1
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5
Figure 5-6
Figure 5-7
Figure 5-8
Figure 5-9
Figure 5-10
Figure 5-11
Figure 5-12
Figure 5-13
Figure 5-14
Figure 5-15
Figure 5-16
Figure 5-17
Figure 5-18
Figure 5-19
Figure 5-20
Figure 5-21
Figure 5-22
Figure 5-23
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-2
Figure 6-3
Figure 6-4
Figure 6-5
Figure 6-6
Figure 6-7
Figure 6-8
Figure 6-9
Figure 6-10
Figure 6-11
Figure 6-12
Figure 6-13
Figure 6-14
Figure 6-15
Figure 6-16
Figure 6-17
Figure 6-18
Figure 6-19
Figure 6-20
ENWW
Graphics tab ................................................................................................................................ 180
Fonts tab ..................................................................................................................................... 182
Font Substitution Table ............................................................................................................... 183
Send Fonts As… dialog box ....................................................................................................... 184
Device Options tab ..................................................................................................................... 186
PostScript tab .............................................................................................................................. 195
Advanced PostScript Options dialog box .................................................................................... 197
An Incompatible Print Settings message ...................................................................................... 204
The default appearance of the Advanced tab ............................................................................... 206
Paper/Quality tab .......................................................................................................................... 212
Paper Options group box .............................................................................................................. 217
Custom Paper Size dialog box ..................................................................................................... 218
Front Cover options ...................................................................................................................... 222
First Page options ......................................................................................................................... 223
Other Pages options ..................................................................................................................... 224
Last Page options ......................................................................................................................... 225
Back Cover options ..................................................................................................................... 226
Effects tab ................................................................................................................................... 230
Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) ...................................... 231
Watermark Details dialog box ..................................................................................................... 233
Finishing tab ................................................................................................................................ 238
Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box ................................................................................ 242
Page-order preview images ........................................................................................................ 245
Job Storage tab ........................................................................................................................... 248
Services tab ................................................................................................................................ 255
HP PCL 6 Unidriver Device Settings tab .................................................................................... 257
PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab ............................................................................... 258
Font Substitution Table ............................................................................................................... 259
HP Font Installer dialog box ....................................................................................................... 260
About tab ..................................................................................................................................... 268
HP LaserJet P3005 printer CD-ROM icon .................................................................................... 279
HP LaserJet Software screen ....................................................................................................... 279
Authenticate dialog ....................................................................................................................... 280
HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer Introduction screen .............................................................. 280
HP LaserJet Installer Read Me dialog .......................................................................................... 281
License dialog ............................................................................................................................... 281
Agree dialog .................................................................................................................................. 282
Easy Install dialog ......................................................................................................................... 282
HP LaserJet Installer dialog (custom install) ................................................................................. 283
Installing dialog ........................................................................................................................... 284
Finish Up dialog .......................................................................................................................... 285
Printer List screen ....................................................................................................................... 286
Print & Fax dialog ........................................................................................................................ 286
Default Browser tab .................................................................................................................... 287
Printer Browser – IP Printer tab .................................................................................................. 288
Installable Options screen .......................................................................................................... 289
Printer List screen ....................................................................................................................... 290
Printer List screen ....................................................................................................................... 291
Print & Fax screen ...................................................................................................................... 291
Add printer screen ....................................................................................................................... 292
xix
Figure 6-21
Figure 6-22
Figure 6-23
Figure 6-24
Figure 6-25
Figure 6-26
Figure 6-27
Figure 6-28
Figure 6-29
Figure 6-30
Figure 6-31
Figure 6-32
Figure 6-33
Figure 6-34
Figure 6-35
Figure 6-36
Figure 6-37
Figure 6-38
Figure 6-39
Figure 6-40
Figure 6-41
Figure 6-42
Figure 6-43
Figure 6-44
Figure 6-45
Figure 6-46
Figure 6-47
Figure 6-48
Figure 6-49
Figure 6-50
Figure 6-51
Figure 6-52
Figure 6-53
Figure 6-54
Figure 6-55
Figure 6-56
Figure 6-57
Figure 6-58
Figure 6-59
Figure 6-60
Figure 6-61
Figure 6-62
Figure 6-63
Figure 6-64
Figure 6-65
Figure 6-66
Figure 6-67
Figure 6-68
Figure 6-69
Figure 6-70
xx
Printer List screen ....................................................................................................................... 294
Add printer screen ....................................................................................................................... 295
Printer Info — Installable Options dialog (sample) ..................................................................... 296
Select Printer screen – printer not selected ................................................................................ 299
Connection Type screen ............................................................................................................. 300
Select Printer screen – printer selected ...................................................................................... 300
Printer Status screen .................................................................................................................. 301
Current Supplies Levels screen .................................................................................................. 301
Supplies Information screen ....................................................................................................... 302
Transfer printer information to HP SureSUpply? screen ............................................................ 302
Paper Status screen ................................................................................................................... 304
Device Information screen .......................................................................................................... 305
File Upload screen ...................................................................................................................... 306
Update Firmware screen ............................................................................................................. 307
Upload Fonts screen ................................................................................................................... 307
Upload Fonts dialog .................................................................................................................... 308
Add System Fonts screen ........................................................................................................... 308
HP Online Support screen .......................................................................................................... 309
HP Instant Support link ............................................................................................................... 309
HP Registration Web page ......................................................................................................... 310
Duplex Mode screen ................................................................................................................... 311
Economode & Toner Density screen .......................................................................................... 311
Default Resolution screen ........................................................................................................... 312
Trays Configuration screen ......................................................................................................... 313
Lock Resources screen .............................................................................................................. 314
Enable Job Storing screen .......................................................................................................... 315
E-mail Alerts screen .................................................................................................................... 317
Network Settings screen ............................................................................................................. 317
Networking screen ...................................................................................................................... 318
Bonjour Settings screen .............................................................................................................. 319
Additional Settings screen .......................................................................................................... 320
Device Status screen .................................................................................................................. 321
HP EWS – Device Status page ................................................................................................... 323
HP EWS – Configuration Page screen ....................................................................................... 324
HP EWS – Supplies Status page ................................................................................................ 325
HP EWS – Event Log screen ...................................................................................................... 325
Usage Page screen (1 of 2) ........................................................................................................ 326
HP EWS – Device Information screen ........................................................................................ 327
HP EWS – Control Panel Snapshot screen ................................................................................ 328
HP EWS – Print screen ............................................................................................................... 329
HP EWS – Configure Device screen .......................................................................................... 330
HP EWS – E-mail Server screen ................................................................................................ 331
HP EWS – Alerts screen ............................................................................................................. 332
HP EWS – AutoSend screen ...................................................................................................... 333
HP EWS – Security screen ......................................................................................................... 334
HP EWS – Edit Other Links screen ............................................................................................ 334
HP EWS – Device Information screen ........................................................................................ 335
HP EWS – Language screen ...................................................................................................... 336
HP EWS – Date & Time screen .................................................................................................. 336
HP EWS – Date/Time Format screen ......................................................................................... 337
ENWW
Figure 6-71
Figure 6-72
Figure 6-73
Figure 7-1
ENWW
HP EWS – Date & Time - clock drift correction screen ............................................................... 337
HP EWS – Wake Time screen .................................................................................................... 338
HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings screen .................................................................. 339
File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached ......................................................... 343
xxi
xxii
ENWW
Purpose and scope
1
Purpose and scope
Introduction
This software technical reference (STR) provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the
HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software.
This STR is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick-reference tool for Customer Care Center
(CCC) agents, support engineers, system administrators, management information systems (MIS)
personnel, and HP LaserJet P3005 printer end users, as appropriate.
The following information is included in this STR:
●
Descriptions of drivers and operating systems, with system modifications
●
Procedures for installing and uninstalling software components
●
Descriptions of various HP LaserJet P3005 printer topics, including engineering details
The following table describes the structure of this STR.
Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview
Chapter
Content
Chapter 1, Purpose and scope
This chapter contains basic information about the HP LaserJet P3005 printer and
its software:
●
Overview of the HP LaserJet P3005 printer
●
Printing-system software overview, including the following topics:
●
Chapter 2, Software description
●
System requirements
●
Operating-system support
●
Availability
HP LaserJet software documentation
This chapter provides an overview of the printing-system software installer and
print drivers.
This chapter also contains general information about other software features,
including the following topics:
ENWW
●
Driver configuration for Microsoft® (MS) Windows®
●
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
Introduction
1
Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview (continued)
Chapter
Content
●
HP Embedded Web Server
●
HP Web Jetadmin
Chapter 3, Install MS Windows printingsystem components
This chapter provides instructions for installing the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in
MS Windows operating systems by using various installation methods.
Chapter 4, HP traditional print drivers for
MS Windows
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5,
and PS emulation print drivers for MS Windows 98 Second Edition (Windows 98
SE) and MS Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
This chapter also contains information about using job-storage features when
printing from the device control panel, including the following topics:
Chapter 5, HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS
emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
●
Releasing a job-storage print job
●
Deleting a job-storage print job
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5,
and postscript emulation print unidrivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003.
This chapter also contains information about using job-storage features when
printing from the device control panel, including the following topics:
●
Releasing a job-storage print job
●
Deleting a job-storage print job
Chapter 6, Macintosh
This chapter provides instructions for installing and uninstalling the
HP LaserJet P3005 printer in Macintosh operating systems and for using
Macintosh features.
Chapter 7, Engineering details
This chapter contains information about the following special topics:
●
File to E-mail utility
●
Media attributes
●
Remote firmware update
●
Printing print-ready documents
For information about the location of information within chapters, see the table of contents. An index is
provided in this STR.
Additional detailed information about the HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software is published in
an addendum to this STR. The following information is available only in the addendum:
●
Lists of installed files
●
System-modification information, such as changes to the registry and registry keys
●
Descriptions of known software issues and solutions
Topics:
2
●
Device features
●
Printing-system software
●
HP LaserJet documentation
Chapter 1 Purpose and scope
ENWW
The following table contains descriptions of the HP LaserJet P3005 printer features that are discussed
in this STR. Device configurations might vary among countries/regions.
Table 1-2 HP LaserJet P3005 printer features
Models
Performance
●
Base model: HP LaserJet P3005 printer (part number
Q7812A)
●
HP LaserJet P3005d (part number Q7813A)
●
HP LaserJet P3005n printer (part number Q7814A)
●
HP LaserJet P3005dn printer (part number Q7815A)
●
HP LaserJet P3005x printer (part number Q7816A)
●
The HP LaserJet P3005 prints up to 35 pages per minute
(ppm) for Letter-sized media.
Prints up to 25 ppm for A4–sized media.
Memory
User interface
Supported printer personalities
Job-storage features
ENWW
●
First page out in 10 seconds or less.
●
Sleep mode
●
Wake-time setting available
●
Standard base memory:
●
32 MB for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer;
expandable to 288 MB
●
48 megabytes (MB) of memory for the
HP LaserJet P3005d and printer; expandable to
320 MB
●
64 MB for the HP LaserJet P3005n,
HP LaserJet P3005dn, and the HP LaserJet P3005x
printers; expandable to 320 MB
●
One open EIO slot on all HP LaserJet P3005 printer
models
●
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer uses 100-pin 133 MHz
dual inline memory modules (DIMMs) that support 128 or
256 MB of random-access memory (RAM).
●
Two-line back-lit graphical display on control panel
●
Enhanced Help with animated graphics
●
Embedded Web server to gain access to support and
order supplies (network-connected printers)
●
HP PCL 6
●
HP PCL 5e
●
PostScript® (PS) 3 emulation
●
Portable-document format (PDF)
●
Job-storage features include:
Device features
3
Purpose and scope
Device features
Table 1-2 HP LaserJet P3005 printer features (continued)
Environmental features
Fonts
Paper handling
4
Chapter 1 Purpose and scope
●
Proof and hold
●
Private jobs
●
Personal-identification number (PIN) printing
●
Sleep-mode setting
●
High content of recyclable components and materials
●
Energy Star® compliant
●
Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive
compliant
●
Internal fonts are available for both printer command
language (PCL) and postscript emulation.
●
Printer-matching screen fonts in TrueType® format are
available on the printing-system software CD.
●
HP Web Jetadmin-supported forms and fonts are on the
disk.
●
Prints on media sizes from 211 millimeters (mm) x
297 mm (8.3 inches x 11.7 inches) up to 216 mm x
356 mm (8.5 inches x 14 inches; Legal size)
●
Tray 1 can process heavy-weight media from 60 g/m2 to
199 g/m2 (16 lb to 53 lb), as well as standard 80-lb cover
stock.
●
Tray 2 and the optional trays can process media up to
120 g/m2 (32 lb) in weight.
●
Prints on a wide range of media types, including
transparencies, glossy papers, heavy stock, labels, and
envelopes.
●
Features adjustable gloss level on page by choosing the
appropriate glossy-media type.
●
Standard 100-sheet multipurpose paper tray (tray 1)
supports Letter, Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS),
Executive (JIS), A4, A5, 16K, Statement, Postcard (JIS),
Envelope, and custom media.
●
Standard 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 2) supports Letter,
Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS), Executive (JIS), A4,
A5, and custom media.
●
Optional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3; standard in the
HP LaserJet P3005x printer model) supports Letter,
Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS), Executive (JIS), A4,
A5, and custom media.
●
Standard 250-sheet face-down output bin
●
Optional duplex unit for automatic two-sided (duplex)
printing on the HP LaserJet P3005d,
HP LaserJet P3005dn, and HP LaserJet P3005x printers
●
Automatic duplex unit at up to 30 sides (15 sheets) per
minute for 120-g/m2 (32-lb) paper
ENWW
Accessories
Connectivity
Supplies
ENWW
●
Dual inline memory modules (DIMM)
●
Flash memory slot for additional memory or additional
fonts
●
Additional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3)
●
Hard disk
●
Enhanced input/output (EIO) card slots for optional
connectivity (Network connection through an HP Jetdirect
embedded print server are standard on all models)
●
Universal serial bus (USB) 2.0 connection
●
HP Jetdirect embedded print server for network
connectivity without using an EIO slot
●
The supplies status page contains information about
toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining
for genuine HP cartridges.
●
High-capacity no-shake cartridge with automatic tonerseal removal feature
●
The device checks for authentic HP print cartridges when
a cartridge is installed.
●
Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities through the
HP Embedded Web Server
Device features
5
Purpose and scope
Table 1-2 HP LaserJet P3005 printer features (continued)
Printing-system software
Topics:
●
System requirements
●
Operating-system support
●
Availability
System requirements
The following operating systems support the HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software:
●
Windows
●
Linux
●
UNIX®
Windows
●
Pentium® or compatible processor
●
Windows 98 SE, Windows Millennium Edition (Me) or Windows 2000: 333-MHz processor with 64
MB RAM
●
Windows XP: 333-MHz processor with 128 MB RAM
●
Windows Server 2003: 550-MHz processor with 128 MB RAM (Standard Edition) and 220 MB of
available hard-disk space
●
Minimum 16-color/grayscale display with 640 x 480 pixel resolution (video graphics array [VGA])
●
Onboard parallel port, USB port, or network connection
●
CD-ROM drive or internet connection
Linux
For information about Linux support for the device, see the following HP Linux Web site:
●
www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting
UNIX®
For information about UNIX® support for the device, see the following Web sites:
●
www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software
●
www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts
Operating-system support
MS Windows operating systems provide full-featured support for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer.
Operating systems that are not described in this STR provide varying levels of functionality.
6
Chapter 1 Purpose and scope
ENWW
Information relating to networking functions is specific to devices that have network capabilities.
If the computer is running a 64-bit MS Windows operating system, install the corresponding 64-bit print
driver by using Add Printer.
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer has not been tested with and is not supported in the MS
Windows 3.1x or MS Windows 95 operating systems.
For more information about the HP LaserJet P3005 printer, go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/ljp3005
Topics:
●
Print drivers
●
Print driver support in other operating systems
Print drivers
The following operating systems support the HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software, including the
HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers and unidrivers:
Table 1-3 Printing-system software support
Full software installation
Print driver only
●
Windows XP (32-bit)
●
Windows 98 SE
●
Windows 2000
●
Windows Me
●
Mac OS X (V10.2 and later)
●
Windows Server 2003
●
Windows XP (64-bit)
NOTE Print driver only support requires installing
print drivers by using Add Printer.
Print drivers are supported by the following 64-bit operating systems:
●
Itanium-based systems
●
AMD Athlon 64, AMD Opteron, Intel Xeon, and Pentium 4 with EMT64
Print driver support in other operating systems
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer is also supported in the following operating environments:
●
Mac OS X (V10.2.8 and later)
●
Linux. For more information, go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting
●
ENWW
UNIX. For more information, go to the following Web site:
Printing-system software
7
Purpose and scope
Throughout this STR, Windows XP is used to denote Windows XP Home Edition, Windows XP
Professional, and Windows Server 2003 unless noted otherwise.
www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software
●
UNIX model scripts. Available only on the Web at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts
●
MS Windows Terminal Server
●
Citrix Terminal Server. For more information, go to the following Web site:
h20000.ww2.hp.com/bizsupport/TechSupport/Document.jsp
Alternatively, go to the HP.com Web site and search for “c00213455”.
●
MS Windows Cluster Server 8
●
HP OpenVMS. For more information, go to the following Web site:
h71000.www7.hp.com/openvms/print/
●
Tru64 UNIX printing. For more information, go to the following Web site:
h30097.www3.hp.com/printing/
●
SAP printing. For more information, go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/sap/print
●
HP Install Network Printer Wizard (INPW). Available only on the Web at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/inpw_software
Availability
Download the printing-system software from the Web, or order it on a CD from HP fulfillment centers.
NOTE This STR describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system software CD. This
STR does not describe any drivers that might be released by support personnel.
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet software components by operating system.
NOTE Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 64-bit drivers and components are available
only on the Web. All other drivers and components listed in the following table are available on
the Web and on the printing-system software CD.
Table 1-4 Software component availability for HP LaserJet P3005 printer
Component
Windows 98 SE,
Windows Me, and
Windows Server 2
003
Windows 2000 and
Windows XP (32-bit)
Windows XP (64-bit)
and
Windows Server 2003
HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5 Unidriver
x
x
PS Emulation Unidriver
x
x
Drivers
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver
8
Chapter 1 Purpose and scope
x
ENWW
Component
Windows 98 SE,
Windows 2000 and
Windows Me, and Windows XP (32-bit)
Windows Server 2
003
PS Emulation Driver
x
Purpose and scope
Table 1-4 Software component availability for HP LaserJet P3005 printer (continued)
Windows XP (64-bit)
and
Windows Server 2003
Installer
x
Common MS Windows Installer
Installer Customization Wizard
x
CD Browser
Add Printer Wizard install
x
x
x
x
x
Web Registration
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration
x
x
x
x
x
Other software
Easy Printer Care Software
Topics:
●
Printing-system software on the Web
●
In-box printing-system software CDs
Printing-system software on the Web
All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web.
Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The HP Web site offers an
option for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases.
The HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software is available for download at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/ljp3005_software
NOTE Only 32-bit print drivers are available on the printing-system software CD. If the computer
is running a 64-bit operating system, you must install a 64-bit print driver. The 64-bit print drivers
for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/ljp3005_software
In-box printing-system software CDs
The software CD for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer contains a variety of files for installing the printingsystem software on the computer.
The HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD is divided into two partitions, one for each of the
following operating systems:
ENWW
●
MS Windows
●
Macintosh
Printing-system software
9
Each partition includes documentation files and files that are required to install and uninstall the printingsystem components.
Topics:
●
Windows partition
●
CD versions
Windows partition
The root directory in the MS Windows partition of the software CD contains the AUTORUN.EXE file, the
SETUP.EXE file, and the following directories and support files:
●
Autorun
●
Drivers
●
fonts
●
HP Easy Printer care
●
hw
●
Manuals
●
PortMonitor
●
System32
●
Temp
●
WebReg
The printing-system files for each language reside in the following directories:
●
Drivers
●
Manuals
NOTE File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.
To view the files, insert the HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD, right-click Start, click
Explore, and then select the CD-ROM drive.
CD versions
The HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD is available in three versions, each of which
contains printing-system software in various languages, as follows:
●
10
CD 1 – Americas (part number Q7812-60111):
●
AR = Arabic
●
DE = German (Deutsch)
●
EN = English
●
ES = Spanish (Español)
Chapter 1 Purpose and scope
ENWW
●
●
FR = French (Français)
●
EL = Greek
●
IT = Italian (Italiano)
●
NL = Dutch (Nederland)
●
PT = Brazilian Portuguese (Português)
Purpose and scope
●
CD 2 – Asia Pacific (part number Q7812-60112):
●
ZHCN = Simplified Chinese (Chi_Simp)
●
ZHTW = Traditional Chinese (Chi_Trad)
●
EN = English
●
KO = Korean
●
TH = Thai
CD 3 – Europe, Middle East, Africa (part number Q7812-60113):
●
CS = Czech (Cesky)
●
DA = Danish (Dansk)
●
EN = English
●
FI = Finnish (Suomi)
●
HE = Hebrew
●
HU = Hungarian (Magyar)
●
NO = Norwegian (Norsk)
●
PL = Polish (Polski)
●
RU = Russian (Russ)
●
SV = Swedish (Svenska)
●
TR = Turkish (Turkçe)
Each of the following tables lists one of the software CD versions, along with the printing-system software
components that are supported in each language.
NOTE Drivers for various languages do not necessarily correspond to geographic countries/
regions. English, for instance, is distributed on three CDs.
Table 1-5 CD 1 – Americas
ENWW
Component
AR
DE
EN
ES
FR
EL
IT
NL
PT
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Printing-system software
11
Table 1-5 CD 1 – Americas (continued)
Component
AR
DE
EN
ES
FR
EL
IT
NL
PT
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Common MS Windows
Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Installer Customization
Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Easy Printer Care
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Printer Usage Report
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration
x
Fonts
HP Web Registration
x
x
HP LaserJet P3005 User
Guide (.CHM file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet P3005 User
Guide (.PDF file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Hewlett-Packard
LaserJet P3005 Series
Printing-System Install Notes
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Embedded Web Server
User Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
250-Sheet Install Guide
x
x
Table 1-6 CD 2 – Asia Pacific
12
Component
ZHCN
ZHTW
EN
KO
TH
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
Common MS Windows Installer
x
x
x
x
x
Chapter 1 Purpose and scope
ENWW
Component
ZHCN
ZHTW
EN
KO
TH
Add Printer Wizard Installer
x
x
x
x
x
Installer Customization Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Easy Printer Care
Printer Usage Report
x
x
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Fonts
HP Web Registration
Purpose and scope
Table 1-6 CD 2 – Asia Pacific (continued)
x
HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide (.CHM file)
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide (.PDF file)
x
x
x
x
x
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet P3005 Series
Printing-System Install Notes
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
x
x
x
x
250-Sheet Install Guide
x
x
x
x
x
Table 1-7 CD 3 – Europe, Middle East, Africa
Component
CS
DA
EN
FI
HE
HU
NO
PL
RU
SV
TR
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Common MS Windows
Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Installer Customization
Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Easy Printer Care
x
Printer Usage Report
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Fonts
ENWW
x
x
Printing-system software
13
Table 1-7 CD 3 – Europe, Middle East, Africa (continued)
Component
CS
DA
HP Web Registration
FI
HE
HU
NO
PL
RU
SV
TR
x
HP LaserJet P3005 User
Guide (.CHM file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet P3005 User
Guide (.PDF file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Hewlett-Packard
LaserJet P3005 Series
Printing-System Install
Notes
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Embedded Web Server
User Guide
14
EN
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
x
250-Sheet Install Guide
x
Chapter 1 Purpose and scope
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
ENWW
On the main screen of the printing-system software CD Browser, click Printer Documentation to open
the HP LaserJet P3005 Printer Documentation screen, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 1-1 Installation software CD printer-documentation screen
The following table lists HP LaserJet P3005 printer documents that are available for each operating
system.
Table 1-8 Document availability
ENWW
Document
Windows 98
SE/Me
Windows 2000/XP/
Server 2003
HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide (.CHM file)
x
x
HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide (.PDF file)
x
x
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet P3005 Series Printing-System Install
Notes
x
x
Macintosh
x
HP LaserJet documentation
15
Purpose and scope
HP LaserJet documentation
Table 1-8 Document availability (continued)
Document
Windows 98
SE/Me
Windows 2000/XP/
Server 2003
Macintosh
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
x
x
x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
x
x
x
Access to HP LaserJet documents depends on the type of document and its location:
●
Some documents can be opened from the CD Browser.
●
Some documents appear on the software CD and can be opened by navigating to the folder where
they reside.
●
Some documents are available on the Web through links in the CD Browser or CD folders.
Documents are available in the following file formats:
●
Portable document Format (.PDF). The HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD
includes Adobe® Acrobat® Reader for viewing online documentation.
●
Compiled HTML (.CHM). When you click a documentation link to a .CHM document, a Microsoft
HTML Viewer opens the file on the computer screen.
●
Hypertext markup (.HTM). When you click a documentation link to an .HTM document, a Web
browser opens the file on the computer screen.
The following documents are available:
●
HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide
●
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet P3005 Series Printing-System Install Notes
●
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
●
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide
The HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide describes the basic device features.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1.
In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.
2.
Click User Guide (Interactive).
The guide opens as an MS Windows Help file (.CHM file). This readable, onscreen version of the guide
is provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1.
Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
LJP3005_USE_XXWW.CHM
16
Chapter 1 Purpose and scope
ENWW
The HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide is provided as a printable .PDF file. To print the guide, follow these
steps:
1.
In the CD Browser, click Printer Documentation.
2.
Click User Guide (Printer Friendly). The guide opens.
3.
Print the guide.
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1.
Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
LJP3005_USE_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for
the French version of the guide is LJP3005_USE_FRWW.PDF
When the file is open, click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet P3005 Series Printing-System Install Notes
The Hewlett-Packard LaserJet P3005 Series Printing-System Install Notes (in .HTM format) contains
important information about device features, instructions for installing the printing-system software, and
technical assistance.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1.
In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.
2.
Click Install Notes.
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1.
Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
LJP3005_INSTALLNOTES_XXWW.HTM
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for
the French version of the document is LJP3005_INSTALLNOTES_FRWW.HTM.
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
The HP Embedded Web Server User Guide (in .PDF format) provides information about device status,
settings, and networking for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer.
ENWW
HP LaserJet documentation
17
Purpose and scope
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for
the French version of the guide is LJP3005_USE_FRWW.CHM
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1.
In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.
2.
Click Embedded Web Server Guide.
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1.
Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
LJP300x_EWS_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is
LJP300x_EWS_FRWW.PDF.
When the file is open, click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
The HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide is a network administrator's guide (in .PDF format) that contains
information about connecting the device directly to a network.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1.
In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.
2.
Click HP Jetdirect Guide.
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1.
Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
HPJDIAG_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is
HPJDIAG_FRWW.PDF.
When the file is open, click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
18
Chapter 1 Purpose and scope
ENWW
Software description
Introduction
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer comes with software and installers for MS Windows and Apple
Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems also support the HP LaserJet P3005, and
software is available on the Web. For information about specific system installers, drivers, and
components, see the section that corresponds to that system.
NOTE The HP Toolbox is not available on the HP LaserJet P3005 printer.
Topics:
ENWW
●
MS Windows printing-system software
●
MS Windows driver configuration
●
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
●
HP Easy Printer Care
●
HP Embedded Web Server
●
HP Web Jetadmin
Introduction
19
Software description
2
MS Windows printing-system software
Topics:
●
Printing system and installer
●
HP LaserJet print drivers
Printing system and installer
Topics:
●
HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD for MS Windows systems
●
Installer features
HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD for MS Windows systems
In the MS Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems, insert the HP LaserJet P3005 printingsystem software CD into the CD-ROM drive to open an interactive CD browser. Use the CD browser to
install the print driver and related components, and to gain access to online user documentation, Adobe
Acrobat Reader software, and optional HP software. In the Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, and
Windows Server 2003 operating systems, use the Add Printer installation.
The following figure shows the main screen of the HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD.
If the screen does not appear when you insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive, follow these
steps to open the CD browser:
20
1.
Click Start.
2.
Click Run.
3.
Click Browse…. and navigate to the root directory of the software CD.
4.
Double-click the SETUP.EXE file to start the installer.
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
Software description
Figure 2-1 Installation software CD browser
The main screen of the software CD contains installation options in the upper-left panel, and
documentation and support options in the lower-left panel. Moves the cursor over each option to see a
description of the option.
NOTE Options on devices might differ from the illustration.
Install Printer. The installation wizard guides the HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software
installation. Select a Basic Installation, a Full Installation, or a Custom Installation. If you select Basic
Installation, only the necessary software is installed. If you select Custom Installation, select the
components that you want to install.
Installer Customization Wizard. Use this wizard to customize the HP LaserJet P3005 installer by
presetting the installation options in a response file. The resulting customized installer can then be used
for silent, unattended installation.
HP Easy Printer Care Software. Use this option to install the HP Easy Printer Care from the Web in a
downloadable installation file. This device maintenance tool helps track and maintain the devices by
providing information about status, alert notifications, usage, and supplies for one or more devices.
ENWW
MS Windows printing-system software
21
Register Product. Use this option to register the device online. After Web registration, you can gain
access to support and services, manage your profile, and sign up for free support alerts, driver notices,
and personalized newsletters.
Printer Documentation. Use this option to view the HP LaserJet P3005 user documentation. The
following document options are available when you click this option:
●
User Guide (Interactive)
●
User Guide (Printer Friendly)
●
Install Notes
●
Embedded Web Server Guide
●
HP Jetdirect Guide
NOTE If Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later is not installed, click any of the links to a portable
document format (.PDF) document to open it in a version of Adobe Acrobat Reader that runs
from the HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD. The CD browser version of Acrobat
Reader is in English only, but can be used to open localized versions of .PDF documents. The
Adobe Acrobat Reader software is not installed on the computer and can only run while the
printing-system software CD is in the CD-ROM drive. Adobe Acrobat Reader is also available at
the following Web site: www.adobe.com
Support. Click the following links to obtain optional software programs for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer
and find support information on other HP Web sites:
●
Click HP Web Jetadmin to download HP Web Jetadmin software from the Web for a Web browserbased network-management tool.
●
Click Supplies for information about ordering HP LaserJet P3005 printer supplies.
●
Click Product Information to open the HP Instant Support Web page for support information and
updates for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer.
●
Click hp.com to go to the HP home Web page for information about products and services, support,
drivers, and HP online stores.
Installer features
The common installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for the device.
The common installer is available for the Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems.
The common installer offers the following features:
22
●
The HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD features an interactive software interface.
●
Network connection is integrated so that you can install drivers and connect to a networked device
in a single process.
●
The Selection dialog box sets the operating-system language as the default language
( Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 only). Use the installer to select any of
the languages on the HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD.
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
The HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD also includes the following features:
●
The HP LaserJet Uninstaller Utility
●
The HP Customization Utility for custom installations
●
Basic Installation
●
Full Installation
●
Custom Installation
HP LaserJet print drivers
HP LaserJet P3005 print drivers provide the printing features and communication between the computer
and the device. The printing system includes software for end users and network administrators who
are working in the following operating systems:
●
Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, and Windows Server 2003
●
Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
MS Windows 64-bit drivers for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are available for the
following systems:
●
●
Itanium
●
AMD Athlon 64, AMD Opteron, Intel Xeon, or Pentium 4 with EMT64
Apple Mac OS X V10.2.8 and later
In MS Windows operating systems, the following features are available with the HP LaserJet P3005
printer:
●
Automatic configuration
●
Driver updates after a new configuration
●
Preconfiguration
NOTE For the latest information about the printing-system software components, see the
readme files on the CD. For additional information about installing the printing-system software,
see the Hewlett-Packard LaserJet P3005 Series Printing-System Install Notes on the printingsystem software CD.
All of the drivers provide access to paper-handling and print-quality features.
Topics:
ENWW
●
HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers
●
Select the best print driver
●
Print-driver version numbers for MS Windows operating systems
MS Windows printing-system software
23
Software description
All of the MS Windows system components are installed by using the HP LaserJet P3005 printingsystem installer. The installer automatically detects the language of choice and the operating system.
Select from the following types of installation:
HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers
All of the MS Windows drivers are supported in Microsoft 32-bit operating systems. Separate versions
of the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers are available for Windows XP and
Windows Server 2003 64-bit operating systems. These 64-bit drivers are not included on the printingsystem software CD, but they can be downloaded from the following HP Web site:
www.hp.com/go/ljp3005_software
The following drivers are available on the HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD:
●
The HP PCL 6 Unidriver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
●
HP PCL 5 Unidriver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
●
The HP postscript level 3 emulation Unidriver (the PS Emulation Unidriver) for Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
●
The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me
●
The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me
●
The HP Traditional postscript level 3 emulation driver (the PS Emulation Driver) for Windows 98
SE and Windows Me
NOTE During a Basic Installation or a Full Installation of the printing-system software, the
HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003. The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default for Windows 98
SE and Windows Me.
Table 2-1 Print drivers included with the HP LaserJet P3005 printer
Operating System1
PCL 6
PCL 5
PS emulation
Windows 98 SE and Windows Me
X
X
X
Windows 2000
X
X
X
Windows XP
X
X
X
Windows Server 2003
X
X
X
Macintosh OS
1
X
Not all device features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the online Help in the driver for information
about the features that are available.
Select the best print driver
HP print drivers are designed for different environments and uses. See the print driver Help for available
features.
Topics:
24
●
Complete LaserJet printing system
●
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
●
HP PCL 5 Unidriver
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
●
PS Emulation Unidriver
●
HP universal print driver (UPD)
Complete LaserJet printing system
Use the printing-system software CD to install the full set of drivers and other software for the
HP LaserJet P3005.
Overall, the HP PCL 6 Unidriver provides the best performance, print quality, and printer-feature support
for most users. The driver aligns with MS Windows graphic device interface (GDI) for best performance
in MS Windows environments.
The HP PCL 6 Unidriver is recommended for most business applications, but may not be fully compatible
with third party and custom solutions that are based on PCL 5.
HP PCL 5 Unidriver
The HP PCL 5 Unidriver is compatible with previous versions of PCL and legacy HP LaserJet printers.
Some features found in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver are not found in this driver.
It is the recommended driver choice for:
●
Any third party or home-grown custom solutions that use forms, fonts, and SAP programs.
●
Any environment with mixed operating-systems (such as UNIX, Linux, and mainframe).
PS Emulation Unidriver
The PS Emulation Unidriver is recommended for printing with Adobe or other graphics-rich software
programs. The driver is compatible with postscript level-3 and supports postscript font DIMMs.
Use the PS Emulation Unidriver in primarily postcript-specific software programs such as Adobe and
Corel.
HP universal print driver (UPD)
The HP UPD allows users to install a single driver that will allow printing to most HP LaserJet printers.
The HP UPD provides similar functionality found in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and the HP PCL 5 Unidriver.
The HP universal print driver is recommended choice for:
●
Any environment where multiple HP printer models are in use, and where customers are wishing
to reduce the number of drivers installed.
●
Any environment where mobile printing (users wishing to print to various locations on demand) is
desired.
The HP UPD can be downloaded from the following HP Web site:
www.hp.com/go/universalprintdriver
NOTE The HP UPD does not support all of the features of the HP traditional drivers and the
HP unidrivers.
ENWW
MS Windows printing-system software
25
Software description
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
Print-driver version numbers for MS Windows operating systems
Access to print-driver version numbers varies, depending on the operating system in which the
HP LaserJet P3005 printer is installed.
NOTE For a list of HP LaserJet P3005 print drivers, updated HP printing-system software, and
product-support information, go to:
www.hp.com/go/ljp3005_software
The Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems support the HP PCL 6,
PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers. When using an HP unidriver in a Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003 environment, follow these steps to find driver-version information:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers and Faxes (in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003) or Printers (in
Windows 2000).
4.
Right-click the printer icon.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the About tab.
The Windows 98 SE and Windows Me operating systems support the HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 6 and
PCL 5 traditional print drivers and the PS Emulation Driver.
Follow these steps to gain access to an HP traditional PCL driver:
26
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
6.
Click the HP logo in the lower-left corner of the following HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver tabs:
●
Finishing
●
Effects
●
Paper
●
Job Storage
●
Basics
●
Configure
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
The PS Emulation Driver software provides postscript feature support for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer.
Follow these steps to gain access to the print-driver version number:
ENWW
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
6.
Click About.
Software description
1.
MS Windows printing-system software
27
MS Windows driver configuration
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5 traditional drivers for MS Windows and the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and
PS emulation unidrivers feature bidirectional communication technology which, in environments that
support the drivers, provide automatic discovery and driver configuration for device accessories at the
time of installation.
Some accessories that are automatically discovered and configured include the duplexing unit, optional
paper trays, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
Topics:
●
Driver autoconfiguration
●
Bidirectional communication
●
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
●
Update Now
●
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Driver autoconfiguration
Automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication occurs in the
following circumstances:
●
When a print driver is installed by using Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC)
●
When using the Update Now feature for a driver that is already installed
However, as shown in the following table, driver autoconfiguration and EAC are not available in
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems over a direct connection when
the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is installed by using the Add Printer wizard.
Table 2-2 Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication in
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
Connection type
Add Printer wizard install
Common installer
Network
Yes
Yes
Direct connection
No
Yes
Bidirectional communication
In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the device
during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver accordingly.
Bidirectional communication is the capability of the device to respond to data inquiries from the computer
and report information back, such as what type of print media is available or what accessories are
connected to the device. Bidirectional communication depends on the network operating system and
on the type of connection that exists between the computer and the HP LaserJet P3005 printer. If the
connection does not have this capability (that is, if it has no bidirectional mode), it can only accept
commands from the host and cannot report information back to the host computer.
28
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration
functionality for installation of the print driver over a network, whether you use the installer on the printingsystem software CD or the Add Printer wizard to install the driver. Driver installation that includes EAC
is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the device. Configuration occurs
without user interaction.
If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs bidirectional-communication
software that allows it to communicate with the device and automatically match the print driver with the
actual device configuration. EAC is activated during installation of the driver or whenever the Update
Now feature is used.
If the HP LaserJet P3005 printer configuration changes after installation, the driver can be automatically
updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication by using
the Update Now feature.
The following tables show the availability of EAC for various operating systems and network
environments that support bidirectional communication.
Table 2-3 EAC availability in MS Windows and Microsoft Share
Method
Installer
Connection type
Direct
connect
Parallel
Network
Jetdirect
Microsoft
Share1
98
Me
2000
XP
2000/XP
host with
2000/XP
client
TCP/IP
x
x
x
x
x
IPX/SPX
x
x
x
x
x
TCP/IP (HP) x
x
x
x
x
TCP/IP
(MS)
x
x
x
x
x
IPX/SPX
(HP)
x
x
x
x
x
USB
Standard
ENWW
MS Windows
MS Windows driver configuration
29
Software description
If bidirectional-communication software has been installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the preexisting bidirectional-communication software is used to configure the print driver.
Table 2-3 EAC availability in MS Windows and Microsoft Share (continued)
Method
Connection type
Add Printer
Direct
connect
Parallel
Network
Jetdirect
MS Windows
Microsoft
Share1
98
Me
2000
XP
2000/XP
host with
2000/XP
client
TCP/IP
x
x
x
x
x
IPX/SPX
x
x
x
x
x
TCP/IP (HP) x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
USB
Standard
TCP/IP
(MS)
IPX/SPX
(HP)
1
x
x
This column represents the following Microsoft Share configurations: 1. Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
Server host with Windows 98 SE, or Windows Me client. 2. Windows 98 SE or Windows Me host with any client.
Table 2-4 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments
Method
Connection type
Novell
Netware 5.x
Netware 4.x
Installer
Direct connect
Bindery queue
NDS queue
Bindery queue
x
x
x
Parallel
USB
Network
Jetdirect
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Standard
TCP/IP (HP)
TCP/IP (MS1)
IPX/SPX (HP)
1
Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft Client Service
for NetWare.
Update Now
If the HP LaserJet P3005 printer configuration has been modified since installation, the driver can be
automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional
communication. Use the Update Now feature to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver.
For example, if the device is installed and an optional paper-handling accessory is added later, use the
Update Now feature to query the device and update the settings to match the new device
configuration.
30
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
The Update Now feature automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information
that appears on the Configure tab of the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver,
and on the Device Settings tab of the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver.
NOTE The Update Now feature is not available with the HP Traditional postscript level 3
emulation driver.
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click Device Settings.
7.
If necessary, click Installable Options to expand it and show the options.
8.
In the Automatic Configuration drop-down menu, select Update Now.
9.
Click OK to save the setting.
Software description
To activate the Update Now feature for the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver, follow these
steps:
NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows 2000
or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows 2000 or Windows XP hosts.
To activate the Update Now feature for the HP traditional PCL 6 or PCL 5 driver, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
6.
Click Device Settings.
7.
Click the Configure tab.
8.
In the Automatic Configuration group box, click Update Now.
9.
Click OK to save the setting.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP printing-system
software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver
Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise environments
can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing the drivers in the
network environment.
ENWW
MS Windows driver configuration
31
HP Driver Preconfiguration is most beneficial when configuring print drivers for multiple workstations or
print servers for print queues that share the same configuration. Two types of features can be configured:
●
Device settings
●
Printing-preferences settings
The driver is configured to match the device hardware so that access to all of the device accessories
through the driver is enabled correctly (for example, for duplexing units and additional input trays). Most
driver feature settings can also be configured.
HP Driver Preconfiguration configures the driver to match the accessories that are installed on the
device, or to match the settings that IT administrators make in the configuration (.CFG) file (for example,
optional trays, total amount of memory, or job-storage settings).
The preconfiguration process consists of three basic steps:
●
Driver acquisition
●
Driver preconfiguration
●
Driver installation and deployment
These steps can be accomplished in different ways, depending on the tool that is being used to define
the configuration.
The configuration process for driver preconfiguration is supported through three distinct tools. All three
are designed with the same basic user-interface (UI) controls for interacting with the .CFG file, but are
packaged differently, either to support established device installation workflows or to leave the
deployment and installation of the driver entirely up to the user. The following tools support driver
preconfiguration:
●
HP Driver Configuration Editor. The HP Driver Configuration Editor is a small standalone MS
Windows software program that the administrator can use to open the .CFG file that is associated
with a particular driver and make modifications that are applied when that driver is installed on the
target computer. It is intended for use in environments that have an established process for
deploying drivers. This is the preconfiguration tool of choice to support any Novell or HP Print Server
Appliance (PSA) Point and Print environments. It is used in the way that any ordinary MS Windows
software program is used.
The HP Driver Configuration Editor is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw
●
The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin. HP Web Jetadmin provides a queuecreation program that can be used to create printer queues on any Windows 2000, Windows XP,
or Windows Server 2003 or workstation. The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin adds
a number of screens to the existing queue-creation workflow from which the drivers that are being
installed for the queues can be customized as part of the process. The plug-in is limited to Internet
Explorer browsers. Netscape Navigator is not supported.
The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/sbso/tpm/web_jetadminplugin.html
●
32
Installer Customization Wizard. The Installer Customization Wizard features an install-time mode
of HP Driver Preconfiguration. IT administrators can use the utility to preconfigure the drivers for a
printing-system software driver installation that uses the silent installer.
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
For detailed information about gaining access to and installing these tools, download the HP Driver
Configuration Utility software from the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw
The HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide is included in the download.
●
Lockable features
●
Continuous export
Lockable features
The following driver features can be locked to prevent end-users from changing settings:
●
Print on Both Sides (duplex). The options are True or False.
●
Print in Grayscale. The options are Disable or Enabled.
●
Media Type. The options include all the media types that the HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports.
●
Paper Source. The options are Printer Auto Select, Manual Feed (Tray 1), Tray 1, or Tray 2.
When a feature is locked, the selected default option is the only option that is available to users.
Generally, the feature is unavailable in the driver UI after it has been locked.
Continuous export
The term "continuous export" refers to the ability of the driver to copy the latest driver settings back to
the working copy of the preconfiguration file. Using this feature, the exported values can be transferred
when a compatible version of the driver is used to upgrade the print driver. For instance, if the orientation
is set to Landscape in a driver originally installed in Windows 2000, then the orientation setting
automatically remains Landscape when the operating system is upgraded to Windows XP or
Windows Server 2003. The continuous export feature functions transparently from the user's
perspective and works only between drivers of identical device models.
NOTE Not all of the driver parameters can be exported; however, the exportable components
are always the same as the components that can be preconfigured.
The following table shows drivers and operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration.
Table 2-5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration
ENWW
Driver
Windows 98 SE Windows Me
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver
Yes
Yes
N/A1
N/A
N/A
HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
PS Emulation
Driver
No
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
HP PCL 6
Unidriver
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
MS Windows driver configuration
33
Software description
Topics:
Table 2-5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration (continued)
1
34
Driver
Windows 98 SE Windows Me
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
HP PCL 5
Unidriver
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
PS Emulation
Unidriver
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A: Not applicable; the driver is not supported in this operating system.
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
Use the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool, a Web-based diagnostic software program, to
determine whether the correct and most current print driver for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is in use.
Two methods are available to gain access to the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool:
1.
Open a Web browser.
2.
Go to the following Web site:
Software description
www.hp.com/go/drivercheck
Alternatively:
1.
Open an Internet browser.
2.
Go to the HP Business Support Center (BSC) at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/bsc
3.
Click the self-help resources link on the left navigation bar.
4.
Click automatic driver checker to run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool.
When the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool runs, the devices that are currently installed on the
computer appear in a list. The tool gathers information about the device, drivers, and system setup in
order to diagnose the software driver configuration and check the print driver.
When the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool is open, select the HP device that you want to check.
The tool verifies whether the latest driver is installed, informs if an incorrect driver is in use, and indicates
if an updated driver version is available. Click the latest driver version to download and install it.
The data that the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers is stored anonymously so that HP can
analyze and continuously improve its diagnostic tools. No private data is gathered from the computer.
ENWW
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
35
HP Easy Printer Care
HP Easy Printer Care software is designed for end users and for those who keep devices up and running
in small and large business groups. You can view the status of up to 15 supported HP LaserJet devices,
set up device and supply alerts, generate printer-usage reports, and reorder supplies from HP or a
choice of resellers.
The HP Easy Printer Care Software is available through a link in the printing-system software CD, or
on the Web at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare
36
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
●
HP LaserJet P3005n
●
HP LaserJet P3005dn
●
HP LaserJet P3005x
The base model HP LaserJet P3005 printer can use the HP EWS if an optional EIO Jetdirect card is
installed.
The HP EWS provides a simple, easy-to-use solution for one-to-one device management. Instead of
installing management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin, use HP EWS for remote management in
offices that have a limited number of devices. The only requirement is that the management computer
must have a supported Web browser.
In environments that have a larger number of devices, in which one-to-one management is impractical,
the HP Embedded Web Server and HP Web Jetadmin work together to provide scalable remote device
management. Use HP Web Jetadmin to consolidate management tasks and perform operations on a
selected set of devices. . For such environments, HP provides hooks between the HP EWS and HP Web
Jetadmin to allow configuration of HP EWS features on multiple devices in one operation. For example,
you can set the security password for the HP EWS simultaneously on a cluster of devices.
For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide, go to: www.hp.com/
support/ljp3005.
Topics:
●
Access to the HP EWS
●
The HP EWS frame
●
Information tab
●
Links to off-product solutions
●
Device Status screen
●
Configuration Page
●
Settings tab
●
Configure device
●
Alerts
●
Security
●
Networking tab
Access to the HP EWS
To open the HP EWS and view information about the HP LaserJet P3005 printer, open a supported
Web browser and type the device transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) address or
host name in the address field.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
37
Software description
The HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS) is a standard feature on the following HP LaserJet P3005
printer models when they are connected through a network:
To find the device TCP/IP address, look for IP Address on the Embedded Jetdirect page, in the TCP/
IP section. To find the host name of the device, look for Host Name in the TCP/IP section.
The TCP/IP address also appears on the device configuration page (the Embedded Jetdirect page),
which can be printed from the device control-panel display. Follow these steps to print an Embedded
Jetdirect page:
1.
Press Menu
2.
Press
3.
Press (down) to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION, and then press
configuration pages.
(the down arrow) to highlight INFORMATION, and then press
(select).
(select) to print the
The HP EWS frame
Each screen in the HP EWS has a frame that contains a top banner, three category tabs, a left-aligned
navigation menu bar, and a main-content area. Selecting one of the category tabs causes the
corresponding left-aligned navigation bar to appear. The left-aligned navigation menu includes links to
content that is appropriate for that tab. The main-content area shows information and opens options in
response to navigation-tab selections and menu-bar selections.
Information tab
The following information is available on the HP EWS Information tab. Click the menu items on the left
side of the HP EWS Information tab to view the information.
NOTE If an HP EWS password has been set, the Information tab is the only visible tab until
the user logs in. See Security on page 44 for more information.
Not all of the screens on the tab are included in this STR. For more information, see the HP Embedded
Web Server User Guide.
38
●
Device Status. This screen provides current status information about the device.
●
Configuration Page. This screen shows the values of all of the settings that are available in the
printer.
●
Supplies Status. This screen provides information about the print cartridge and the total pages
that have been printed, and the serial number of the device.
●
Event log. This screen provides information about reported printer errors.
●
Usage page. This screen provides a page count for each size of media that has passed through
the device, as well as the number of duplexed pages that have been printed.
●
Device Information. This screen shows device information, such as the device TCP/IP address
and serial number.
●
Control Panel. This screen shows the device control panel.
●
Print. Use this screen to print documents that are print-ready, such as those generated by a "print
to file" driver option, .PCL documents, .PS documents, .PDF files, and text (.TXT) files.
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
Links to off-product solutions
●
hp instant support. This link connects to a set of dynamic Web resources that help you solve
specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for the device. Specific
status and configuration information about the device is retained and directed to the "Solve a
Problem" Web site. This site offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve
problems as quickly as possible.
●
Order Supplies. This link connects to an HP product supplies screen from which you can order
genuine HP supplies for the device.
●
Product Support. This link connects to an HP product-support screen from which to search for
information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for the
device.
Device Status screen
Status information, such as whether the device is online or the toner is low, is available through a Web
browser on a computer that is linked directly to the device. You can view this information without going
to the device to identify the status. The following figure shows how this information is presented on the
device Web page.
Figure 2-2 HP EWS Information tab – Device Status screen
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
39
Software description
Links on the HP EWS screens provide an easy way to locate information or complete tasks.
Configuration Page
You can gain access to the HP LaserJet P3005 configuration page remotely through the HP EWS. The
HP EWS Configuration Page screen provides configuration information about the device in the same
way as the configuration page that is printed from the device. The following figures show an example
of a configuration page viewed remotely through the HP EWS.
Figure 2-3 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen
NOTE This figure is provided only as an example.
40
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
Settings tab
The following information is available on the HP EWS Settings tab. Click the menu items on the left
side of the HP EWS Settings tab to view the information. The Settings tab is shown in the Configure
device on page 41 section.
●
Configure Device. Use the Configure Device screen to print device information pages and
configure the device remotely.
●
E-mail Server. Use the E-mail Server screen to configure e-mail settings for outgoing e-mail.
●
Alerts. IT administrators can configure the device to send alerts in e-mail messages to anyone.
●
AutoSend. Use the AutoSend screen to send device configuration and supplies-usage
information periodically to your service provider.
●
Security. Use the Security screen to manage security for the device.
●
Edit Other Links. Use the Edit Other Links screen to add or customize up to five links to the Web
sites of your choice.
●
Device Information. Use the Device Information screen to provide a name of your choice for the
device, assign an asset number, and configure the company name, the person to contact about
the device, and the physical location of the device.
●
Language. Use the Language screen to select the language in which the HP EWS screens
appear.
●
Date & Time. Use this page to set the correct date and time for the device.
●
Wake Time. Wake time can be set to turn on the device at a certain time on a daily basis. Only
one wake-time setting can be established per day; however, each day can have a different wake
time. The sleep-mode delay can also be set on this page.
Configure device
You can obtain device configuration information through a Web browser by opening the HP EWS screen
and changing the basic configuration information on the Settings tab. Security and password controls
give management information systems (MIS) managers the level of control that they require within their
network environments. The following figure shows an example of device options that can be configured
remotely.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
41
Software description
Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this STR. For more information, see the HP Embedded
Web Server User Guide.
Figure 2-4 HP EWS Settings tab – Configure Device screen
Alerts
The device can automatically send e-mail alerts about printing problems or job status to specified e-mail
addresses. For example, if toner is low, the device can notify the person who is responsible for ordering
or changing the print cartridge. If a device failure occurs, the device can send an e-mail alert directly to
the person who is responsible for fixing the problem. These e-mail alerts can be configured to be sent
to any device that can accept e-mail, such as digital phones, pagers, and personal digital assistants
(PDAs). In large environments, administrators can route e-mail addresses to list-servers or uniform
resource locators (URLs) for expanded notification.
42
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
Software description
Figure 2-5 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
43
NOTE This figure is provided only as an example.
Security
The HP EWS screens and settings that appear vary according to how the HP EWS is accessed. Three
modes of user access are possible:
●
General user
●
IT administrator
●
Service provider
To control access to the HP EWS screens, set a password on the Security page.
Figure 2-6 HP EWS Settings tab – Security screen
In a password-protected HP EWS, only the Information tab is available to users who do not log in by
using the password. If no password is set (which is the default configuration), all of the tabs are visible.
If a password has been set, you must log on as an IT administrator or a service provider to gain access
to the protected HP EWS tabs (Settings and Networking).
Networking tab
The HP EWS Networking tab is shown in the following figure.
NOTE Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this STR. For more information, see the
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide.
44
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
Software description
Figure 2-7 HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings screen
The menu on the left side of the screen contains other networking options under three categories:
●
Configuration
●
Security section
●
Diagnostics section
Configuration
●
ENWW
Network Settings From the Network Settings screen, enable and configure the following network
protocols:
●
TCP/IP
●
Internetwork packet exchange/Sequenced packet exchange (IPX/SPX)
●
AppleTalk
●
Data link control/logical link control (DLC/LLC)
●
Simple network management protocol (SNMP)
●
Other Settings
●
Privacy Settings
●
Select Language
HP Embedded Web Server
45
Security section
●
Settings
●
Authorization
●
Mgmt. Protocols
Diagnostics section
46
●
Network Statistics
●
Protocol Info
●
Configuration Page
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
HP Web Jetadmin
Use the HP Web Jetadmin and a browser to manage HP Jetdirect-connected devices within an intranet.
HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on a single
network-administration server.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin, and for the latest list of host systems that support
HP Web Jetadmin, go to the following Web site:
Software description
www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
ENWW
HP Web Jetadmin
47
48
Chapter 2 Software description
ENWW
3
Install MS Windows printing-system
components
Introduction
NOTE If the computer is running a 64-bit MS Windows operating system, install the
corresponding 64-bit print driver by using Add Printer. For instructions, see Install print drivers
by using Add Printer on page 85.
Topics:
ENWW
●
Font support
●
Print-driver installation instructions
Introduction
49
MS Windows install
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer comes with software and installers for MS Windows and Apple
Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems support the HP LaserJet P3005, and
software is available on the Web. This STR provides procedures for installing and removing the
HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software for MS Windows operating systems.
Font support
The following sections list the fonts that are included with MS Windows software, and the fonts that are
available on the CD that came with the device.
Topics:
●
Basic fonts
●
Default fonts
Basic fonts
MS Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printing device:
●
Arial
●
Courier New Italic
●
Times New Roman Italic
●
Arial Italic
●
Courier New Bold
●
Times New Roman Bold
●
Arial Bold
●
Courier New Bold Italic
●
Times New Roman Bold Italic
●
Arial Bold Italic
●
Symbol
●
Wingdings
●
Courier New
●
Times New Roman
Default fonts
The following default fonts are installed through a Full Installation of the HP LaserJet P3005 printingsystem software.
Table 3-1 Default fonts
50
Font name
Font style
File name
Albertus Extra Bold
Regular
ALBR85W.TTF
Albertus Medium
Regular
ALBR55W.TTF
Antique Olive
Regular
OLVR55W.TTF
Antique Olive
Bold
OLVR75W.TTF
Antique Olive
Italic
OLVR56W.TTF
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
ENWW
Font name
Font style
File name
CG Omega
Regular
CGOR45W.TTF
CG Omega
Bold
CGOR65W.TTF
CG Omega
Bold Italic
CGOR66W.TTF
CG Omega
Italic
CGOR46W.TTF
CG Times
Regular
CGTR45W.TTF
CG Times
Bold
CGTR65W.TTF
CG Times
Bold Italic
CGTR66W.TTF
CG Times
Italic
CGTR46W.TTF
Clarendon Condensed
Bold
CLAR67W.TTF
Coronet
Regular
CORONET.TTF
CourierPS
Regular
CPSR45W.TTF
CourierPS
Bold
CPSR65W.TTF
CourierPS
Bold Oblique
CPSR66W.TTF
CourierPS
Oblique
CPSR46W.TTF
Garamond
Antiqua
GARR45W.TTF
Garamond
Halbfett
GARR65W.TTF
Garamond
Kursiv
GARR46W.TTF
Garamond
Kursiv Halbfett
GARR66W.TTF
Helvetica®
Regular
HELR45W.TTF
Helvetica
Bold
HELR65W.TTF
Helvetica
Bold Oblique
HELR66W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow
Regular
HELR47W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow
Bold
HELR67W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow
Bold Oblique
HELR68W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow
Oblique
HELR48W.TTF
Helvetica
Oblique
HELR46W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic
Book
AVGR45W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic
Book Oblique
AVGR46W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
Regular
AVGR65W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
Oblique
AVGR66W.TTF
ITC Bookman Light
Regular
BOKR35W.TTF
ITC Bookman Light
Italic
BOKR36W.TTF
ITC Bookman Demi
Regular
BOKR75W.TTF
ITC Bookman Demi
Italic
BOKR76W.TTF
Font support
MS Windows install
Table 3-1 Default fonts (continued)
51
Table 3-1 Default fonts (continued)
Font name
Font style
File name
ITC Zapf Chancery
Medium Italic
CHANC___.TTF
ITC Zapf Dingbats
Regular
DINGS___.TTF
Letter Gothic
Regular
LETR45W.TTF
Letter Gothic
Bold
LETR65W.TTF
Letter Gothic
Italic
LETR46W.TTF
Marigold
Regular
MARIGOLD.TTF
New Century Schoolbook
Bold
NCSR75W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook
Bold Italic
NCSR76W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook
Italic
NCSR56W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook
Roman
NCSR55W.TTF
Palatino
Bold
PALR65W.TTF
Palatino
Bold Italic
PALR66W.TTF
Palatino
Italic
PALR46W.TTF
Palatino
Roman
PALR45W.TTF
SymbolPS
Regular
SYMPS__.TTF
Times*
Bold
TIMR65W.TTF
Times
Bold Italic
TIMR66W.TTF
Times
Italic
TIMR46W.TTF
Times
Roman
TIMR45W.TTF
Univers
Bold
UNVR65W.TTF
Univers
Bold Italic
UNVR66W.TTF
Univers Condensed
Bold
UNVR67W.TTF
Univers Condensed
Bold Italic
UNVR68W.TTF
Univers Condensed
Medium
UNVR57W.TTF
Univers Condensed
Medium Italic
UNVR58W.TTF
Univers
Medium
UNVR55W.TTF
Univers
Medium Italic
UNVR56W.TTF
Ninety-two additional PS emulation fonts are available on the CD.
Table 3-2 Additional PS emulation fonts
52
Font name
Font style
File name
Albertus MT
Regular
PS_12639.TTF
Albertus MT
Italic
PS_12640.TTF
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
ENWW
Font name
Font style
File name
Albertus MT Lt
Regular
PS_14530.TTF
Antique Olive CompactPS
Regular
PS_11120.TTF
Antique Olive Roman
Regular
PS_11119.TTF
Antique Olive Roman
Bold
PS_11118.TTF
Antique Olive Roman
Italic
PS_11846.TTF
Apple Chancery
Italic
PS_24516.TTF
Bodoni Poster
Regular
PS_12704.TTF
Bodoni PosterCompressed
Regular
PS_14508.TTF
BodoniPS
Regular
PS_12581.TTF
BodoniPS
Bold
PS_12585.TTF
BodoniPS
Bold Italic
PS_12586.TTF
BodoniPS
Italic
PS_12582.TTF
Candid
Regular
PS_24517.TTF
Chicago
Regular
PS_24518.TTF
Clarendon Light
Regular
PS_14513.TTF
ClarendonPS
Regular
PS_10269.TTF
ClarendonPS
Bold
PS_12968.TTF
Cooper Black
Regular
PS_10369.TTF
Cooper Black
Italic
PS_10370.TTF
Copperplate32bc
Regular
PS_14514.TTF
Copperplate33bc
Regular
PS_14515.TTF
CoronetPS
Italic
PS_10249.TTF
Eurostile
Regular
PS_10267.TTF
Eurostile Bold
Regular
PS_10268.TTF
Eurostile ExtendedTwo
Bold
PS_14512.TTF
Eurostile ExtendedTwo
Regular
PS_14511.TTF
Geneva
Regular
PS_24509.TTF
GillSans
Regular
PS_13872.TTF
GillSans
Bold
PS_13874.TTF
GillSans
Bold Italic
PS_13875.TTF
GillSans Condensed
Regular
PS_14053.TTF
GillSans Condensed
Bold
PS_14054.TTF
GillSans ExtraBold
Regular
PS_14051.TTF
GillSans
Italic
PS_13873.TTF
Font support
MS Windows install
Table 3-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
53
Table 3-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
54
Font name
Font style
File name
GillSans Light
Italic
PS_13871.TTF
GillSans Light
Regular
PS_13870.TTF
Goudy
Bold
PS_12544.TTF
Goudy
Bold Italic
PS_10695.TTF
Goudy
Regular
PS_12542.TTF
Goudy ExtraBold
Regular
PS_12545.TTF
Goudy
Italic
PS_12543.TTF
Helvetica Condensed
Regular
PS_14526.TTF
Helvetica Condensed
Bold
PS_14528.TTF
Helvetica Condensed
Bold Italic
PS_14529.TTF
Helvetica Condensed
Italic
PS_14527.TTF
Hoefler Text
Regular
PS_24519.TTF
Hoefler Text Black
Regular
PS_24521.TTF
Hoefler Text Black
Italic
PS_24522.TTF
Hoefler Text
Italic
PS_24520.TTF
Hoefler Text Ornaments
Regular
PS_24523.TTF
Joanna MT
Regular
PS_14503.TTF
Joanna MT
Bold
PS_14505.TTF
Joanna MT
Bold Italic
PS_14506.TTF
Joanna MT
Italic
PS_14504.TTF
Letter Gothic
Italic
PS_13778.TTF
Letter GothicPS
Regular
PS_13777.TTF
Letter GothicPS
Bold
PS_13779.TTF
Letter GothicPS
Bold Italic
PS_13780.TTF
Lubalin Graph
Regular
PS_12675.TTF
Lubalin Graph
Bold
PS_12677.TTF
Lubalin Graph
Bold Italic
PS_12625.TTF
Lubalin Graph
Italic
PS_12623.TTF
MarigoldPS
Regular
PS_94073.TTF
Mona Lisa Recut
Regular
PS_14525.TTF
Monaco
Regular
PS_24524.TTF
New York
Regular
PS_24510.TTF
Optima
Regular
PS_12506.TTF
Optima
Bold
PS_12510.TTF
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
ENWW
Font name
Font style
File name
Optima
Bold Italic
PS_12511.TTF
Optima
Italic
PS_12507.TTF
Oxford
Italic
PS_14072.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman
Italic
PS_11546.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman
Regular
PS_11545.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman
Bold
PS_11547.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman
Bold Italic
PS_11548.TTF
Taffy
Regular
PS_14507.TTF
Univers 45 Light
Regular
PS_13501.TTF
Univers 45 Light
Bold
PS_14023.TTF
Univers 45 Light
Bold Italic
PS_14024.TTF
Univers 45 Light
Italic
PS_13502.TTF
Univers 47 CondensedLight
Bold
PS_14030.TTF
Univers 47 CondensedLight
Bold Italic
PS_14040.TTF
Univers 55
Regular
PS_14021.TTF
Univers 55
Italic
PS_14022.TTF
Univers 57 Condensed
Regular
PS_14029.TTF
Univers 57 Condensed
Italic
PS_14039.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS
Bold
PS_13548.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS
Regular
PS_13547.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS
Bold Italic
PS_14481.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS
Italic
PS_14480.TTF
Font support
MS Windows install
Table 3-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
55
Print-driver installation instructions
Topics:
●
General MS Windows installation instructions
●
Detailed MS Windows install instructions
●
Set a default printer
General MS Windows installation instructions
Installation is similar for the Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems. Installation for the
Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems requires using the Add
Printer wizard. For instructions, see Install print drivers by using Add Printer on page 85.
NOTE The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and the PS Emulation
Driver are available on the printing-system software CD.
If the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is connected through a file or print server, the printing-system software
must first be installed on the server before being installed on any client systems. If the HP LaserJet
printing-system software is not first installed on the server, then bidirectional communication and some
driver autoconfiguration methods are not available to the client systems.
For Windows 2000, and Windows XP, administrator rights on the system are necessary to install the
software.
When the HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system installer runs, the HP LaserJet uninstaller is always added
to the system.
Topics:
●
Install from the printing-system CD
●
Install from a network or from downloaded files
Install from the printing-system CD
Follow these instructions to install the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system from the CD that came with
the device.
1.
Quit all software programs.
2.
Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If the CD does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse to
and double-click the SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD.
3.
56
Click Install Printer and follow the onscreen prompts.
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Install from a network or from downloaded files
Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web, or if you are installing the printingsystem files from a network. You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the
printing-system software file.
1.
Browse to the location of the SETUP.EXE file.
2.
Double-click the SETUP.EXE file.
3.
Click Install Printer and continue to follow the instructions until the device is installed. For detailed
installation instructions, see Detailed MS Windows install instructions on page 57.
Detailed MS Windows install instructions
A series of dialog boxes appear during installation of the HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software
in MS Windows environments.
●
Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons
●
Modify a pre-existing installation
●
Direct-connect installation through a USB or parallel port
●
Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence
●
Install print drivers by using Add Printer
●
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows
●
Point and Print installation for Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003
Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons
Click the Help button on any screen where it appears to find suggestions for and explanations about
the installation process.
Click the Back button on any installation dialog box to return to the previous dialog box. The specific
dialog box depends on your previous selections.
Select any options on a given screen and click the Next button to proceed to the next step in the
installation sequence.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
57
MS Windows install
Topics:
To exit the installation sequence without installing the device, follow these steps from any dialog box
where the Cancel button appears.
1.
Click Cancel. A dialog box opens that prompts you with this question: “Are you sure you want to
cancel the installation?”
Figure 3-1 Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box
2.
Click Yes. The Cancel dialog box opens, stating that the setup was interrupted.
Figure 3-2 Cancel dialog box
3.
Click Finish to close the installation screens.
Modify a pre-existing installation
If an HP LaserJet P3005 printer has been previously installed, the appearance of the main install screen
changes on the CD Browser, and the install-printer setting changes to modify installation. A preexisting installation also changes the sequence of installation screens that are presented, depending
on the selections that are made.
58
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Direct-connect installation through a USB or parallel port
The printing-system software should be installed before the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is connected to
the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on. During the installation process, the
software will prompt you to connect the device.
Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence
NOTE The dialog boxes shown in this STR appear in the Windows XP Professional installation
sequence. The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating systems.
The Full Installation includes the following components:
●
HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 6 Driver
●
Screen Fonts
●
Install Notes
●
User Guide
MS Windows install
When you select the Install Printer option from the HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD,
the Language Selection dialog box appears.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
59
Figure 3-3 Language Selection dialog box
Select a location from the Location: drop-down menu.
NOTE The Language Selection dialog box lists only the languages that are available on the
HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD.
The installer automatically detects the language that the computer system uses and presents this
selection as the default.
Select any other language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the drop-down menu.
Click OK to initiate the printing-system setup. The Welcome dialog box appears.
60
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
MS Windows install
Figure 3-4 Welcome to the HP LaserJet 5200 Setup Wizard dialog box
When installing the device on a supported operating system, click Next on the Welcome screen to
continue the installation. The Software License Agreement dialog box appears, as shown in the
following figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
61
Figure 3-5 Software License Agreement dialog box
The I disagree option is selected by default. Read the software-license agreement, select I agree, and
then click Next to proceed with the installation.
The Printer Connection dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
62
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
MS Windows install
Figure 3-6 Printer Connection dialog box
NOTE The HP LaserJet P3005 printer does not support infrared connections.
If you select USB Cable (a "direct connection" using a USB 2.0 cable), and then click Next, the
Model dialog box opens. This is the default option.
If you select Parallel Cable (a "direct connection" using a parallel cable), and then click Next, the
Model dialog box opens.
NOTE The printing-system software should be installed before the HP LaserJet P3005 printer
is connected to the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on. During the
installation process, the software will prompt you to connect the device.
To continue with the default installation sequence, see Figure 3-19 Model dialog box on page 76.
If you are installing the HP LaserJet P3005 printer over the network, select Wired Networking in the
Printer Connection dialog box.
For a network installation, the HP LaserJet P3005 printer must be connected to the network and turned
on before the printing-system software is installed so that the software can detect the device.
NOTE For wireless installation instructions using an HP Jetdirect ew2400 802.11g Wireless
Print Server or an HP Direct 380x802.11B wireless print server, consult the documentation that
comes with the print server.
Click Next to continue.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
63
If the network has a firewall that is blocking the installation, the Firewall Detected dialog box appears,
as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-7 Firewall Detected dialog box
Click Next to continue. The Searching dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
64
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
NOTE If you are installing the device over a network, you must let the search for the first subnet
in the network finish in order to find all available printers. After the first subnet is scanned for
available HP LaserJet P3005 printers, the results appear in the Printers Found dialog box.
However, the installer continues to search the network for additional printers after the first results
appear. The results of searching the first subnet usually takes place within about 20 seconds. It
might take some time for the installer to search the other subnets and for the full list of printers
to appear in the Printers Found dialog box (see Figure 3-10 Printers Found dialog box
on page 67), depending on the configuration of the network.
NOTE The installation process includes the option of using the TCP/IP address for the
HP LaserJet P3005 printer, which might be preferable to waiting for the installer to finish the
search.
When performing a network installation and no printer is found, the Printer Not Found dialog box
appears, as shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
65
MS Windows install
Figure 3-8 Searching dialog box
Figure 3-9 Printer Not Found dialog box
The device might not be connected to the network. Ensure that the deviceis connected and is turned
on. If a firewall is blocking the installation and you want the installer to open a port through the firewall,
click Next.
The Searching dialog box appears (see Figure 3-8 Searching dialog box on page 65).
If a printer is found, the Printers Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching devices that have
been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure.
66
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Select the printer to install and click Next. The Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens (see
Figure 3-12 Confirm Network Settings dialog box on page 69).
If the printer to install is not listed and you want the installer to broaden the search to network subnet
masks beyond the local network, click Search Again…. The Check Printer Connection screen
appears (see Figure 3-14 Check Printer Connection dialog box on page 71). Select a search option
and click Next to perform another search.
If the printer to install is not listed and you know its TCP/IP address, click Next. The Confirm Network
Settings dialog box opens. See Figure 3-12 Confirm Network Settings dialog box on page 69 and
follow the instructions for changing the TCP/IP address.
If a single printer is found, the Printer Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching devices that
have been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
67
MS Windows install
Figure 3-10 Printers Found dialog box
Figure 3-11 Printer Found dialog box
Click No, I want to install a different printer. and then click Next to open the Check Printer
Connection dialog box and make sure the cable is properly connected. You have the option of searching
again for a network printer or specifying a printer by address (see Figure 3-14 Check Printer Connection
dialog box on page 71).
Click Yes, install this printer. and then click Next to open the Confirm Network Settings dialog box
as shown in the following figure.
68
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
In the Confirm Network Settings dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Installation
Type dialog box opens (see Figure 3-20 Installation Type dialog box on page 76).
Click Change Settings… to open the Confirm Change Setting dialog box as shown in the following
figure.
WARNING! When you change the TCP/IP configuration by using the Change Settings button,
the actual settings are changed in the device Jetdirect card. Make changes to these settings only
with the advice of your network administrator.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
69
MS Windows install
Figure 3-12 Confirm Network Settings dialog box
Figure 3-13 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box
Click No to retain the current settings and open the Installation Type dialog box (see Figure 3-20
Installation Type dialog box on page 76).
Click Yes to open the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box (see Figure 3-18 Change TCP/IP Settings
dialog box on page 75).
The Check Printer Connection dialog box, which appears when the No, I want to install a different
printer is selected in the Printer Found dialog box or if the system failed to detect the device over the
network, as shown in the following figure.
70
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Select Search again for all available printers and then click Next to open the Searching dialog box
(see Figure 3-8 Searching dialog box on page 65).
Select Specify Printer by address and then click Next to open the Specify Printer dialog box. The
Specify Printer dialog box is shown in the following figure.
Select Enter settings for a printer not on the network and then click Next to open the Printer
Settings dialog box (see Figure 3-16 Printer Settings dialog box on page 73).
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
71
MS Windows install
Figure 3-14 Check Printer Connection dialog box
Figure 3-15 Specify Printer dialog box
Specify a printer by clicking one of the following options and typing in the required information:
●
Hardware Address (MAC)
●
IP Address
●
IP Hostname
Click Next to open the Searching dialog box . When the search is finished, the Printer Found dialog
box opens (see Figure 3-10 Printers Found dialog box on page 67).
Click Enter settings for a printer not on the network. in the Check Printer Connection dialog box
and then clicked Next to open the Printer Settings dialog box as shown in the following figure.
72
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
To install the device by using the hardware address, click Hardware Address (MAC), type the device
hardware address in the field, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog
box opens, as shown in the following figure.
To install the device using the TCP/IP address, click IP Address, type the device TCP/IP address in
the field, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog box opens, as shown
in the following figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
73
MS Windows install
Figure 3-16 Printer Settings dialog box
Figure 3-17 Set Port Name dialog box
Type a port name in the Port Name: field and click Next to open the Installation Type dialog box
(see Figure 3-20 Installation Type dialog box on page 76).
Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 3-20
Installation Type dialog box on page 76).
NOTE Select Yes in the Confirm Changing Setting dialog box (see Figure 3-13 Confirm
Changing Setting dialog box on page 70) to open the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box as
shown in the following figure.
74
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
If you make a change in the IP Address:, Subnet Mask:, or Gateway: fields (without clicking Next)
and then click Suggest Settings…, the fields refresh with the original information that was found by the
installer and reported in the Printer Found screen.
Type a different TCP/IP Address, Subnet Mask, or Gateway address and then click Next to open the
Confirm Network Settings dialog box (see Figure 3-12 Confirm Network Settings dialog box
on page 69).
If you clear the Use Default Port Name check box and click Next, the Set Port Name dialog box opens
(see Figure 3-17 Set Port Name dialog box on page 74).
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
75
MS Windows install
Figure 3-18 Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box
Figure 3-19 Model dialog box
Select the device model and click Next.
Figure 3-20 Installation Type dialog box
76
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
If the device is directly connected (USB or parallel), Full Installation is the default.
If the device is network connected, Basic Installation is the default.
NOTE The components of a Full Installation might vary from device to device.
Click Basic Installation to install the minimum set of drivers and software. This is the recommended
installation type for servers or computers in network environments. If you click Basic Installation and
then click Next, the Ready to Install dialog box opens (see Figure 3-23 Ready to Install dialog box
on page 79).
MS Windows install
If you select Custom Installation and then click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3-21 Drivers dialog box
An empty check box indicates that the driver will not be installed. A check mark appears when you select
to install that driver.
Information about the space required and the space available on your hard drive appears in the dialog
box.
Select any combination of drivers for the installer. No selection depends on any other selection. It is
possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver. Select the
drivers that you want to install, or select none of them if you are not installing a driver.
Click Next to proceed with the installation.
To view details about the drivers, click Details…. The driver Details dialog box appears.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
77
Figure 3-22 Driver Details dialog box
All of the drivers that are available in the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box.
Click OK to return to the Drivers dialog box.
In the Drivers dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Ready to Install dialog box
appears.
78
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
MS Windows install
Figure 3-23 Ready to Install dialog box
Click Install to start the installation process.
Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box. This dialog box has two tabs:
ENWW
●
General
●
Sharing
Print-driver installation instructions
79
Figure 3-24 Printer PropertiesGeneraltab
On the General tab, you can change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name field.
Use the Location: and Comment: fields to describe the printer. You can also leave these fields blank.
If you want to use the HP LaserJet P3005 printer as your default printer, select the Use the printer as
the default printer for Windows-based programs check box.
Click OK to return to the Ready to Install dialog box, or click the Sharing tab to share the printer over
a network.
80
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
MS Windows install
Figure 3-25 Printer Properties Sharing tab
On the Sharing tab, Not Shared is the default setting. If you click Shared as in the Sharing tab of
the Printer Properties dialog box, the text box becomes available. Type the share name and then
click Next. The Ready to Install dialog box opens.
NOTE To allow sharing across all operating systems, the share name should not exceed 7
characters. The share name is restricted to a maximum of 80 characters for a single pagedescription language (PDL), or 72 characters for multiple PDLs.
In the Ready to Install dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the printingsystem software folders and files. The Installing HP LaserJet P3005 dialog box is shown in the
following figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
81
Figure 3-26 Installing dialog box
This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills.
When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
82
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and complete the installation.
NOTE Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be
presented with some additional steps after you click Finish.
The HP LaserJet P3005 Next Steps dialog box appears.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
83
MS Windows install
Figure 3-27 Finish dialog box
Figure 3-28 HP LaserJet P3005 Next Steps dialog box
To verify that the printer is connected, click Print Driver Test Page.
Figure 3-29 Test Page dialog box
If the test page prints correctly, click OK to continue. If it does not print, click Troubleshoot... to see
what printer connection problems exist.
84
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-30 HP Registration screen
Install print drivers by using Add Printer
Use the following steps to install the print drivers by using the MS Windows Add Printer wizard:
NOTE If the computer is running a 64-bit MS Windows operating system, you must install the
corresponding 64-bit print driver after downloading it from the Web.
1.
Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Go to the Add a printer wizard in MS Windows.
In Windows XP, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes.
The Printers and Faxes window appears. Click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen
appears.
In Windows 98 SE SE, Windows Me, and Windows 2000, click Start on the desktop, click
Settings, click Printers, and then click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.
ENWW
3.
Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the device. The print drivers are loaded as a
part of this process.
4.
Select the Have disk option and navigate to one of the print-driver files on the software CD, as
shown in the following lists, or navigate to the print-driver file that has been downloaded from the
Web.
Print-driver installation instructions
85
MS Windows install
If you have access to the Internet, you can register your device online. In the Congratulations dialog
box, click Register Now to open the HP Registration Web site.
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
●
To install the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, select the following file:
\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL6\hpc3005c.inf
●
To install the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, select the following file:
\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL5\hpc3005b.inf
●
To install the PS Emulation Unidriver, select the following file:
\Drivers\(your operating system)\PS\hpc3005d.inf
Windows 98 SE SE or Windows Me
●
To install the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, select the following file:
Drivers\<language>\pcl6\hp3dusb.inf (for a USB connection)
Drivers\<language>\pcl6\hp3005p6.inf (for a network connection)
●
To install theHP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, select the following file:
Drivers\<language>\pcl5\hp3dusb.inf (for a USB connection)
Drivers\<language>\pcl5\hp3005p5.inf (for a network connection)
●
To install the PS Emulation Driver, select the following file:
Drivers\<language>\ps\usbprint.inf (for a USB connection)
Drivers\<language>\pcl6\hp3005f.inf (for a network connection)
5.
Complete the wizard steps. The print driver will be installed as part of the wizard process.
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows
Administrators can use the Installer Customization Wizard utility to customize a silent, unattended
device installer by pre-setting the installation options in a response file. The installer is customized with
settings for the following options:
●
Language
●
Operating system
●
Print drivers
●
Components
NOTE For detailed information about the Installer Customization Wizard, see the HP Device
Installer Customization Wizard, which is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/ljp3005
Topics:
86
●
Run the Installer Customization Wizard
●
Dialog boxes
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
●
Distribution
Run the Installer Customization Wizard
Start the Installer Customization Wizard from the software CD. It runs separately from the common
Microsoft Installer (MSI), and has its own interface.
Running the Installer Customization Wizard produces one installation package and a response file
(RESPONSE.INI) for a single system installation. The installation package might work for multiple
systems that have the same response information, or the RESPONSE.INI file can be directly edited for
system-configuration differences. The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard, which provides the
exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE.INI file, is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/ljp3005
Start the Installer Customization Wizard
1.
Insert the HP LaserJet P3005 software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
In the CD Browser main screen, click Installer Customization Wizard.
To complete the Installer Customization Wizard, follow the instructions in the dialog boxes.
Dialog boxes
MS Windows install
The Language Selection dialog box appears.
Figure 3-31 Language Selection dialog box
Select a language and click OK. The Welcome dialog box appears.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
87
Figure 3-32 Welcome to the HP LaserJet P3005 Installation Customization Wizard screen
Click Next. The Software License Agreement dialog box appears.
Figure 3-33 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box
88
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Click Back on this or any dialog box where it appears to return to a previous dialog box. The specific
dialog box depends on your previous selections.
To cancel the installation, click Cancel on this or any other dialog box where it appears (see Help, Back,
Next, and Cancel buttons on page 57).
MS Windows install
Read the software-license agreement, select I agree, and then click Next. The Language dialog box
appears.
Figure 3-34 Language dialog box
NOTE The customized installer limits all system installations of the device to the language that
is selected in the Language dialog box. Maintenance mode on systems where installation has
been completed by using the customized installer does not provide options for changing the
language. To change the language on a system that used an Installer Customization Wizard
installation, the customized installation must be uninstalled, and a new device must be installed
in order to restore the option to install other languages.
The language that you select is installed on user computers regardless of the language of the text in
the dialog boxes, as specified in the Language Selection dialog box earlier. The Language dialog box
defaults to the language that was selected in the Language Selection dialog box, but any language
that is available on the software CD can be selected for the customized installer. The language selection
is recorded in the response file.
Select a language from the Language drop-down menu, and then click Next. The Printer Port dialog
box appears.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
89
Figure 3-35 Printer Port dialog box
Select Network Path to make the text field available for a queue name entry. If you select Network
Path and then click Browse..., the Browse for Printer dialog box appears.
Figure 3-36 Browse for Printer dialog box
90
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Navigate to a device and click OK to record the path in the Network Path field in the Printer Port dialog
box. Click Cancel to close the Browse for Printer dialog box.
Type a network path in the query name text field or use the Browse... button to populate the field, and
then click Next. The Model dialog box appears. See Figure 3-40 Model dialog box on page 94.
MS Windows install
Select Local Port and then click Next. The Printer Connection dialog box appears. The Printer
Connection dialog box includes all types of local ports regardless of local support. It also includes all
custom network ports that are available on the local system. To use any custom network port for the
customized installer, the port must be created identically on the system where it will be used.
Figure 3-37 Printer Connection dialog box
Select the type of connection that you are using and then click Next. The Model dialog box appears.
See Figure 3-40 Model dialog box on page 94.
Select New TCP/IP Port and then click Next. The Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box appears. The Specify
TCP/IP Port dialog box includes all custom network ports that are available on the local system. To use
any custom network port for the customized installer, the port must be created identically on the system
where it will be used.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
91
Figure 3-38 Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box
Select IP Address to make the field available for typing the TCP/IP address for the device. Only
numerals are allowed in this field. If this option is selected, you must type at least one digit in the IP
Address field to prevent an error message from appearing to prompt you for a valid IP address.
Select IP Hostname to make the field available for typing the IP hostname for the device. Any characters
are allowed in this field, but an error message appears if spaces are included in the field. If this option
is selected, you must type at least one character in the IP Hostname field to prevent an error message
from appearing to prompt you for a valid IP hostname.
Select Hardware Address to make the field available for typing the hardware address for the device.
Any characters are allowed in this field, but the entry is limited to 12 characters. If this option is selected,
you must type at least one character in the Hardware Address: field to prevent an error message from
appearing to prompt you for a valid hardware address.
For each of the options in the Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box, you can either use the default port name,
as specified in one of the three option fields, or you can specify a different port name.
Select Use Default and then click Next. The Port Creation Options dialog box appears.
To specify a different name, select one of the three port name identifying options, select Specify:, type
the device port name as selected, and then click Next. The Port Creation Options dialog box appears.
92
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Select No, do no create the port (the printer will not be installed) if you do not want to create a port,
and then click Next. The Model dialog box appears.
Select Yes, create the port and click Next. The Model dialog box appears.
If the printer cannot be found, type the printer hardware address in the Hardware Address field and
click Next. The Model dialog box appears.
NOTE To print a configuration page where the printer hardware address is listed, see Print a
configuration page on page 350.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
93
MS Windows install
Figure 3-39 Port Creation Options dialog box
Figure 3-40 Model dialog box
Select the printer model and click Next. The Drivers dialog box appears.
Figure 3-41 Drivers dialog box
94
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Select any combination of drivers for the custom installer. No selection depends on any other selection.
It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver. Select the
drivers that you want to install, or select none of them if you are not installing a driver.
MS Windows install
To view details about the drivers, click Details…. The driver Details dialog box appears.
Figure 3-42 Driver Details dialog box
All of the drivers that are available on the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box.
Click OK to return to the Drivers dialog box.
On the Drivers dialog box, after selecting the drivers for the custom installer, click Next to continue the
installation. The Driver Configuration dialog box appears.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
95
Figure 3-43 Driver Configuration dialog box
Click Yes, allow me to configure the drivers and then click Next. The Driver Configuration dialog
box appears.
Click No, I don't want to configure the drivers and then click Next. The Additional Software dialog
box appears. See Figure 3-45 Additional Software dialog box on page 98.
96
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
In the Driver Configuration dialog box, click the Printing Preferences tab. Scroll through the list and
select the settings for the custom installation file.
In the Driver Configuration dialog box, click the Device Settings tab. Select the settings for the custom
installation file, and then click Next. The Additional Software dialog box appears.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
97
MS Windows install
Figure 3-44 Driver Configuration dialog box – 2
Figure 3-45 Additional Software dialog box
To view details about the additional software, click Details.... The additional software Details dialog box
appears.
98
Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
MS Windows install
Figure 3-46 Additional software Details dialog box
All of the software selected in the Additional Software dialog box is described in the Details dialog
box. Click OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box.
In the Additional Software dialog box, select the additional software for the custom installer, and then
click Next. The Custom Installer Location dialog box appears.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
99
Figure 3-47 Custom Installer Location dialog box
Use the Location: text field to type a location to save the custom installer. The field is large, but is limited
as to the number of characters that it can accommodate.
To change the location to save the custom installer, click Browse…, navigate to the folder that you want,
and then click OK to return to the Custom Installer Location dialog box.
Click Next. The Ready to Create Installer dialog box appears.
100 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
NOTE During installation, several files, including system files, are placed at the root of the
directory that appears in the Location field. Be sure that enough space is available on the
directory before continuing.
Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box and modify the printer properties.
This dialog box has one tab:
●
ENWW
General
Print-driver installation instructions 101
MS Windows install
Figure 3-48 Ready to Create Installer dialog box
Figure 3-49 Printer Properties General tab
On the General tab, change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name: field.
Use the Location: and Comment: fields to describe the printer. You can also leave these fields blank.
If you want to use the HP LaserJet P3005 printer as your default printer, select the Use the printer as
the default printer for MS Windows-based programs check box and select the default driver.
Click OK to return to the Ready to Create Installer dialog box. Click Next to begin the process of
copying and installing the printing-system software folders and files to create the custom installer.
The Installing dialog box appears. This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills.
102 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without creating a customized installer. At a
certain point, the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked.
When the process is complete, the Finish dialog box appears.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 103
MS Windows install
Figure 3-50 Installing dialog box
Figure 3-51 Finish dialog box
Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard.
NOTE Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be
presented with some additional steps after you click Finish.
Distribution
The custom installation package is now ready for distribution. It is the same as the package on the
software CD, except that it is limited to one language, and it contains the selected features and options.
The installation package is run silently so that it requires no user interaction. This installation method is
useful when you want to use the default selections that the custom installer provides or when you want
to run the installation without being prompted.
You can perform the silent installation in two ways:
●
Customized silent installer
●
Command-line silent installer
The response file can be renamed, but it must be in the root directory of the custom installer package.
The name cannot contain spaces. Spaces prevent the SETUP.EXE file from passing to the custom
installer package.
The end-user cannot customize the command-line silent installer. It installs the printing-system
components that are included in the Full Installation.
The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which provides the exact text for replacing entries in the
RESPONSE.INI file, is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/ljp3005
104 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Point and Print installation for Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
The following information helps you install a print driver by using the Microsoft Point and Print function
when you cannot see the device on the network.
Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step is
to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server from
a network client so that the client can use the print driver.
This section outlines the procedures for installing print drivers by using Point and Print. If these
procedures are not successful, contact Microsoft.
Hewlett-Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature, but this is a
function of the MS Windows operating systems, not of HP print drivers. Windows 2000, Windows XP,
and Windows Server 2003 drivers from HP support only Intel X86 processor types.
Point and Print installation of a postscript driver is supported only with a Windows 98 SE or Windows Me
PS Driver V4.0 or later.
In a homogenous operating system environment (one in which all of the clients and servers are running
in the same operating system), the same print driver version that is vended from the server to the clients
in a Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the server.
However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run on
different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a version of the print driver
that is different from the one on the print server.
In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that, starting with Windows 2000
and continuing with all future operating systems, print drivers would run as user-mode processes. Usermode drivers run in a protected part of the operating system, as do all of the normal end-user processes
and software programs. A user-mode print driver that functions incorrectly can terminate (or “crash”)
only the process in which it is running—not the whole operating system. Because access to critical
system resources is restricted, overall operating system stability is increased.
www.techweb.boi.hp.com
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 105
MS Windows install
To install the print driver on a Windows 2000,Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating system,
you must have administrator privileges. To completely install the Windows 2000 print driver on the
Windows 2000 server, you must have administrator privileges on the server. The Windows 2000
Printer .INF file must contain the same device name as the Windows 98 SE or Windows Me printer .INF
file.
Set a default printer
This section applies to the Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
1.
In Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, and Windows 2000, click Start, click Settings, and then click
Printers.
In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click Start, click Control Panel, and then click Printers
and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and other hardware devices (Windows XP
Home).
2.
Right-click the device that you want to set as the default printer.
3.
Click Set As Default. A check mark appears next to the menu option.
106 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
4
HP traditional print drivers for MS
Windows
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the traditional print drivers for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in
Windows 98 SE and Windows Me.
Control print jobs from several places:
●
the device control panel
●
the software program print dialog box
●
the driver user interface
Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one location (for instance, select the media input
tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take precedence over printdriver settings. Print-driver settings, in turn, override device control-panel settings.
This chapter describes the options that are available on each tab of the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
and HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver Properties print-driver interface for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me.
This chapter also describes differences between the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver.
Topics:
ENWW
●
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me
●
Help system
●
Finishing tab features
●
Effects tab features
●
Paper tab features
●
Job Storage tab features
●
Basics tab features
●
Configure tab features
Introduction 107
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Install the print drivers by using the printing-system installer in Windows 98 SE or Windows Me, the
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. You can install the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver by
performing a Custom Installation.
●
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features
108 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 SE and
Windows Me
Depending on which operating system is being installed on the print drivers, access to the print drivers
and different print-driver interfaces is available in several ways:
●
Device control panel
●
Software-program print-dialog box
●
Print-driver user interface
Device control panel
For information about controlling print jobs from the device control panel, see the HP LaserJet P3005
User Guide that came with the device, or download it from following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/ljp3005_software
Software-program print-dialog box
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps:
1.
Click File.
2.
Click Print.
3.
Click Properties.
The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These
driver settings apply only while that software program is open.
Print-driver user interface
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
The settings on the driver tabs control print-job output and become the default settings for all software
programs. The following print-driver tabs are available in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me:
ENWW
●
General
●
Details
●
Color Management
●
Sharing
●
Finishing
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me 109
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
To gain access to the print-driver user interface in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me, follow these steps:
●
Effects
●
Paper
●
Job Storage
●
Basics
●
Configure
Only device-specific HP driver tabs are described in this STR; the other driver tabs are part of the
operating system. The following tabs are described:
●
Finishing
●
Effects
●
Paper
●
Job Storage
NOTE The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage setting is Enabled
on the Configure tab. Click OK on the Configure tab to make the settings take effect.
●
Configure
●
Basics
●
Configure
110 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Help system
The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver include a full-featured Help system
to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
Topics:
●
What's this? Help
●
Context-sensitive Help
●
Incompatible Options messages
●
Bubble Help
What's this? Help
Windows 98 SE and Windows Me support What's this? Help. Gain access to What's this? Help
messages in any of the following ways:
●
Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
●
Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When using this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help
window for that feature appears.
●
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message
appears.
Incompatible Options settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in
response to specific print-driver selections. These messages appear in response to selections that are
illogical or impossible given the device capabilities or the current settings of other controls. For example,
if you click Print on Both Sides and then change the media type to Transparency, a message appears
asking you to resolve this conflict.
NOTE Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might accept
some settings that are illogical or impossible for the device to perform. Sending a job with
incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as expected, check
the device documentation to ensure that the device has the expected capabilities.
Figure 4-1 A typical constraint message with an OK button
ENWW
Help system 111
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Incompatible Options messages
Whenever a constraint message appears with the OK and Cancel buttons, the interpretation of the
buttons is as follows:
●
Click OK to accept the change that was just made. The driver then resets the conflicting control to
a setting that is compatible with the new value.
●
Click Cancel to reject the change that was just made. The control returns to its previous value.
Bubble Help
Bubble Help features a graphical icon that resembles a cartoon speech bubble with a lowercase "i" in
it, representing the international symbol for information. The following figure shows a Bubble Help icon
on a driver tab.
Figure 4-2 A typical page with a Bubble Help icon
The bubble typically appears next to a control that is unavailable, although it can also accompany an
available control if an important note concerning its use is available within the Help. Moving the pointer
over the bubble changes the arrow to a gloved hand, which indicates that the area underneath the
pointer is selectable.
112 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
When the bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the keyboard, a message box appears that
contains a brief explanation about why the control is disabled and what can be done to enable it. If the
control is not disabled, the message is a tip or a precaution that you should be aware of when using that
particular feature.
ENWW
Help system 113
Finishing tab features
To gain access to the Finishing tab in Windows 98 SE or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Finishing tab.
Use the Finishing tab to print on both sides of the page, to control the printed output on the page, and
to print booklets. The following figure shows the Finishing tab.
Figure 4-3 The default Finishing tab
114 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
●
Print Task Quick Sets
●
Document Options
●
Document preview image
●
Print Quality
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Finishing tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Because they
are all the same control, any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the tab
affects the Print Task Quick Sets group boxes on all of the Properties driver tabs that have the Print
Task Quick Sets settings:
●
Finishing
●
Effects
●
Paper
●
Job Storage
●
Basics
Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all of the other print driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator
settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on).
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator
Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot
be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use.
A maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets can be stored on a particular system. If you attempt to save
more, a message box appears that contains the following message: There are too many Print Task
Quick Sets defined. Please delete some before adding new ones.
The following settings are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
●
Default Print Settings
●
User Guide Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that
existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that
are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been
changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.
ENWW
Finishing tab features 115
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you
change any of the default settings on any of the Properties driver tabs and you want to save the
configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type the
name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. The Print Task Quick Sets are
saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it in the drop-down menu and
click Delete.
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See HP Driver
Preconfiguration on page 31 for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer
Driver feature
Feature setting location
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets for
Default values
Preconfigurable1
Print on Both Sides
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Available, not
selected
Yes
Flip Pages Up
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Unavailable, not
selected
Yes
Booklet Printing
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Unavailable, Off
Yes
Pages per Sheet
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
1
Yes
Print Page Borders
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Unavailable
Yes
Page Order
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Unavailable
Yes
Print Quality
Finishing tab, Print Quality group box
Default
Yes
Current Setting
Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(Click Details on Finishing tab.)
This is the “Default”
setting
Raster Compression
(HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver only)
Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(Click Details on Finishing tab.)
Automatic
Rendering Mode
(HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver only)
Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(Click Details on Finishing tab.)
Automatic
Send TrueType as
Bitmaps
Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(Click Details on Finishing tab.)
Available, not
selected
Output Settings
Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(Click Details on Finishing tab.)
Scale Patterns
(WYSIWIG) selected
Print Document On
Effects tab, Fit to Page group box
Off; print on the size
that is specified on
the Paper tab
Yes
Size to print on
Effects tab, Fit to Page group box
Actual size specified
on the Paper tab
Yes2
Scale to Fit
Effects tab, Fit to Page group box
Unavailable, selected
Yes
Watermarks
Effects tab, Watermarks dialog box
(none)
Yes
First Page Only
(watermark)
Effects tab, Watermark dialog box
Unavailable
Yes
Current Watermarks
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none)
Yes2
Watermark Message
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none)
Yes2
Message Angle
(watermark)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Diagonal
Yes2
116 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
Yes
ENWW
ENWW
Driver feature
Feature setting location
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets for
Default values
Preconfigurable1
Watermark message
angle (angle)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Unavailable unless
Angle option is
selected, 52 degrees
Yes
Name (watermark
font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Arial
Yes2
Color (watermark
font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Gray
Yes
Shading (watermark
font )
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Very Light
Yes2
Size (watermark font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
80
No
Style (watermark
font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Regular
Yes
Use Different Paper/
Covers
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Off (All of the pages
use the same media.)
No
Size is:
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Letter
Yes
Source is:
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Automatically Select
Yes
Type is:
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Unspecified
Yes
Unlabeled group box
Job Storage tab
Status message
about the destination
of the job
No
Job Storage Mode
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Off
No
Proof and Hold
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Available, not
selected
No
Private Job
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Available, not
selected
No
Quick Copy
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Available, not
selected
No
Stored Job
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Available, not
selected
No
Require PIN to print
option
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Unavailable, not
selected
No
PIN to Print
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Unavailable, blank
MS Windows User
Name
Job Storage tab, User Name group box
Unavailable, selected
No
Job Name
Job Storage tab, Job Name group box
Unavailable,
Automatic selected
No
Display Job ID when
printing
Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options
group box
Unavailable
No
Copy
Basics tab, Copies group box
1
Yes
Orientation
Basics tab, Orientation group box
Portrait
Yes
Finishing tab features 117
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer (continued)
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer (continued)
Driver feature
Feature setting location
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets for
Default values
Preconfigurable1
Landscape
Basics tab, Orientation group box
Available, not
selected
Yes
Rotate by 180
degrees
Basics tab, Orientation group box
Available, not
selected
Yes
1
Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools. For more information, see HP Driver Preconfiguration
on page 31, or go to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw.
2
Not supported in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me.
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the
HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide.
When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings,
except for the following settings:
●
Print on Both Sides is set to ON
●
Flip Pages Up is set to ON
●
Booklet Printing is set to OFF and is unavailable
●
Pages per Sheet is set to 2
●
Page Order is set to Right then Down
Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
●
Correct Order for Rear Bin
●
Print on Both Sides
●
Flip Pages Up
●
Booklet Printing
●
Pages per Sheet
●
Print Page Borders
●
Page Order
Correct Order for Rear Bin
The HP LaserJet P3005 has a door in the back that can be opened to make the paper go straight out
the back of the printer. Use this bin or slot to minimize curl and avoid jams with heavier paper, such as
cardstock. You may also need to feed the paper from the multipurpose tray for best results. The paper
is delivered printed side up. Use this feature to order your pages correctly for this bin or slot. If you click
this check box and also click Print on Both Sides, the printer prints the first side of each page, pauses
for you to reload the paper, and then prints the second side of each page. Other documents cannot be
printed while the printer is paused. Follow the onscreen instructions.
118 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Print on Both Sides
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is
available when the following conditions exist:
●
●
Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any of the following media types except for the following types:
●
Labels
●
Transparency
●
Envelope
●
Cardstock
●
Tough Paper
Size is: is set to any media size except for the following sizes:
●
Statement
●
Envelope #10
●
Envelope DL
●
Envelope C5
●
Envelope B5
●
Envelope Monarch
●
Double Japan Postscard Rotated
Selecting Print on Both Sides makes the Flip Pages Up and Booklet Printing options available
when Paper Size is set to the following media sizes:
●
Letter
●
Legal
●
A4
Topics:
ENWW
●
Automatically print on both sides
●
Manually printing on both sides
Finishing tab features 119
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
NOTE As a rule, extra memory need not be installed on the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in order
to print on both sides. However, very complex double-sided print jobs might require additional
memory.
Automatically print on both sides
The duplexing unit in the device prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both
Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP LaserJet P3005 printer comes with a duplexing unit
installed in the following models:
●
HP LaserJet P3005dn
●
HP LaserJet P3005x
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases
printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job
from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver.
The smart duplexing feature is available for all media types, except for those that cannot be printed on
both sides and certain others. Media types that are not supported are shown in the following list:
●
Labels
●
Envelopes
●
Transparency
●
Prepunched
●
Preprinted
●
Letterhead
When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer makes
adjustments to its print modes. Selecting a media type, in effect, instructs the printer to use a group of
settings, such as fuser temperature and print speed, to create an image that has the best possible quality
for that media. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different print mode is
used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used.
Manually printing on both sides
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media. Because
the HP LaserJet P3005 and HP LaserJet P3005n printer models do not have a duplexing unit installed,
this is the only setting available for duplex printing. Use the Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the
other HP LaserJet P3005 printer models for media types that the automatic duplexing unit does not
support, such as cardstock and thick media.
Manually printing on the second side of a page is available in the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or the
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. (The PS Emulation Driver does not support this feature.) If a duplexing unit
is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the device automatically prints on both sides
of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing (Letter, A4, Legal, and 8.5 x 13, only), and
forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported.
To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, select
the Allow Manual Duplexing check box on the Configure tab in the Properties print-driver tabs.
If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported for automatic duplexing,
you must click to clear the Duplexing Unit check box on the Configure tab.
120 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Select the media type that corresponds to the media that you are using for the print job. The following
media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side:
●
Plain
●
Preprinted
●
Letterhead
●
Prepunched
●
Bond
●
Recycled
●
Colored
●
Rough
Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but no change occurs to the print mode.
Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.
To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.
2.
Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print.
3.
When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which
the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure.
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
1.
ENWW
Finishing tab features 121
Figure 4-4 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box
When you have completed the steps in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints on the back
side of the sheets in the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support
odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.
Flip Pages Up
Use the Flip Pages Up check box, which is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, to
specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not available.
The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box, depending on the media
orientation that is selected on the Basics tab.
Table 4-2 Page orientation
Orientation (Basics tab)
Flip Pages Up selected
Flip Pages Up not selected
Portrait
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
Landscape
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding
along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the
lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on
the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
122 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
Booklet Printing
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu is visible when Print on Both Sides is selected and a supported
media size is selected in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab.
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu offers choices that are based on the current media size. The
default setting is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the
media size that is set on the Paper tab:
●
[paper size] (Left Binding)
●
[paper size] (Right Binding)
Selecting [paper size] (Left Binding) or [paper size] (Right Binding) changes the document preview
image to show the location of the binding.
Changing the Pages per Sheet setting manually to 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet disables the booklet
setting.
Booklet printing is disabled when unsupported media sizes (such as envelopes) are selected as the
media size, and an incompatibility error message appears when you click OK to close the driver.
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu appears only when the following conditions exist:
●
Print on Both Sides (on the Finishing tab) is selected.
●
% of Normal Size (on the Effects tab) is 100.
●
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is 1.
●
Size is: (on the Paper tab) is set to Letter, Legal, or A4.
Topics:
●
Book and Booklet Printing
●
Print a booklet
Book and Booklet Printing
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports both book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages. It can have a different media type for the front
cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the settings on the Paper tab (available
when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box) to select the following printing options for
the book:
ENWW
●
Front Cover
●
First Page
●
Other Pages
Finishing tab features 123
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
If any of these conditions is not met (except the first), a Bubble Help appears next to Booklet
Printing to tell you why it is disabled.
●
Last Page
●
Back Cover
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet
that is half the size of the media type. Use the Booklet Printing drop-down menu on the Finishing tab
to control booklet settings.
Print a booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.
1.
In the software program, click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
2.
Click the Finishing tab.
3.
Select the Print on Both Sides check box.
4.
In the Booklet Printing drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The
booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding (for example, Letter
[Left binding]).
5.
Click OK in the print driver.
6.
Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of media.
If you print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the sheet in
the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet drop-down menu provides six
settings:
●
1 page per sheet (default)
●
2 pages per sheet
●
4 pages per sheet
●
6 pages per sheet
●
9 pages per sheet
●
16 pages per sheet
Selecting an option other than 1 page per sheet makes booklet printing unavailable.
Print Page Borders
Related controls that are indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders
and Page Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the
borders of each logical page.
124 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains the following selections:
●
Right, then Down
●
Down, then Right
●
Left, then Down
●
Down, then Left
The document preview image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples
in the following figure.
Figure 4-5 Page-order preview images
●
2 pages per sheet
●
4 pages per sheet
●
6 pages per sheet
●
9 pages per sheet
●
16 pages per sheet
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:
●
Finishing
●
Effects
●
Paper
●
Basics
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
Move the mouse cursor over the document preview image, the cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved
hand.
Toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image. The dimensions label
that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size. The horizontal dimension is
always first, so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation changes. Click the dimensions
label to toggle between English and metric units.
ENWW
Finishing tab features 125
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Document preview image
Print Quality
The HP LaserJet P3005 print-driver Print Quality group box provides options that control output settings
and font settings.
The following options are available in the Print Quality group box: The Print Quality Details dialog box
opens. The Print Quality Details dialog box has different options, depending on the driver that you are
using. Changing resolution might change the formatting of the printed document.
●
Best Quality setting
●
Faster Printing setting
●
EconoMode check box
●
Details button
Best Quality
Select this option to print documents at the optimal resolution of the printer. This option provides the
best quality.
Faster Printing
Select this option to print faster than with the Best Quality setting, but with slightly lower quality. This
setting uses 300 dpi for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and 600 dpi for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver.
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-6 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
The following options are available:
●
Current Setting
126 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
●
Font Settings
●
Output Settings
Current Setting
The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver. When you make
a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes to reflect the current print-quality
setting:
●
This is the “Best Quality” setting
●
This is the “Faster Printing” setting
●
This is a “Custom” setting
Font Settings
In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides
an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes,
such as shading, rotation, or slanting.
The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear) by default. If you select this option,
the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines)
of the fonts.
Output Settings
●
ProRes 1200 (170 lpi)
●
ProRes 1200 (141 lpi)
●
FastRes 1200
●
600 dpi
●
Resolution. The options are:
●
●
ProRes 1200 (170 lpi)
●
ProRes 1200 (141 lpi) (default)
●
FastRes 1200. This is the default setting.
●
600 dpi
NOTE When a “ProRes” setting is selected, documents are printed using a resolution of
1200 x 1200 dpi. This is the best print quality, but printing speed is slower than for documents
printed on a “FastRes” setting. The “FastRes” setting emulates 1200-dpi printing, but places
fewer dots on the page and uses less toner, and printing speed is faster than for documents
printed on a “ProRes” setting.
The Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) feature is enabled by default. The options
are On or Off (rather than the “Light,” “Medium,” “Dark,” or “Off” settings in some print drivers).
The On setting corresponds to the “Medium” setting found in other HP printer drivers.
ENWW
Finishing tab features 127
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The Output Settings group box contains the following controls and default settings:
●
Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when
certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What
you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works
only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.
●
The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the
driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as
black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse
typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor
does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
●
Edge-to-Edge Printing. Select this check box to allow near edge-to-edge printing on the media
size specified. For example, to achieve “edge-to-edge” printing for Letter-size media, use a largerthan-letter-size media, select the Edge-to-Edge Printing option, and trim the margin so that the
printed image extends to the edge of the page.
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-7 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
The following options are available:
●
Current Setting
●
Graphic Settings
●
Font Settings
●
Output Settings
128 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Current Setting
The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. When you make
a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from the setting on the Finishing
tab (for instance, This is the “Best Quality” setting [the default setting] or This is the “Faster
Printing” setting) to This is a "Custom" setting.
Graphic Settings
The Graphics Settings group box in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver has settings for the graphics
rendering mode. The following Rendering Mode: options are available:
●
Automatic. This is the default setting.
●
Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the printer as a combination of
HP Graphics Language, V2 (HP-GL/2), and raster images. This setting might produce higherquality output.
●
Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the printer as images
composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.
●
Send Page as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics and text (TrueType fonts) to the
printer as images composed of individual dots. Use Send Page as Raster if you are experiencing
problems with overlapping text and graphics. With this setting, the Send TrueType as Bitmaps
option has no effect.
Font Settings
In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides
an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes,
such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear)
by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which
retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
The Output Settings group box contains the following controls and default settings:
●
ENWW
Resolution. The options are:
●
600 dpi (default)
●
300 dpi
●
The Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) feature is enabled by default. The options
are On or Off (rather than the “Light,” “Medium,” “Dark,” or “Off” settings in some print drivers).
The On setting corresponds to the “Medium” setting found in other HP printer drivers.
●
Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when
certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What
you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works
only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.
●
The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the
driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as
black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse
Finishing tab features 129
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Output Settings
typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor
does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
●
Edge-to-Edge Printing. Select this check box to allow near edge-to-edge printing on the media
size specified. For example, to achieve “edge-to-edge” printing for Letter-size media, use a largerthan-letter-size media, select the Edge-to-Edge Printing option, and trim the margin so that the
printed image extends to the edge of the page.
130 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Effects tab features
To gain access to the Effects tab in Windows 98 SE or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Effects tab.
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure
shows the Effects tab.
Figure 4-8 Effects tab
ENWW
Effects tab features 131
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
●
Print Task Quick Sets
●
Fit To Page
●
Document preview image
●
Watermarks
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or
user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet.
Fit To Page
The Fit To Page group box contains the following controls:
●
Print Document On
●
Scale to Fit
●
% of Normal Size
Print Document On
Use Print Document On to format the document for one media size, and then print the document on
a different media size, with or without scaling the page image to fit the new media size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
●
% of Normal Size is not 100.
●
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can
print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that the selected media source supports and any
custom size that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically
selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected
media size.
Scale to Fit
The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target
media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is
turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on
the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is
clipped. If the document size is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure
shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On
option selected and the target size specified as Letter.
132 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 4-9 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size,
the document preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in
relation to the target page size.
% of Normal Size
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting
in the entry box is 100% of the normal size. The normal size is defined as the media size that is selected
within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does
not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and
sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those
limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another
control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the document preview image, which increases or decreases from
the upper-left corner of the preview.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider-bar indicator. Instead, either use the sliderbar indicator to approximate the value and then use the arrows to refine the value, or type the value into
the entry box.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
●
Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected.
●
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:
ENWW
●
Finishing
●
Effects
Effects tab features 133
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the slider-bar indicator
is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the
arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%.
●
Paper
●
Basics
Watermarks
Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create a custom watermark (text only), or edit an
existing watermark.
The Watermarks group box contains the following controls:
●
Current Watermarks
●
First Page Only
●
Edit…
Current Watermarks
The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
●
(none)
●
Confidential
●
Draft
●
SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically-sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system
plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any
watermark that is selected from this list appears in the document preview image.
First Page Only
When First Page Only is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document.
The First Page Only check box is not available when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Edit…
Click Edit…, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears. The following figure shows the
Watermark Details dialog box.
134 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 4-10 Watermark Details dialog box
The Watermark Details dialog box contains the following controls:
NOTE This section also contains information about default watermark settings.
●
Current Watermarks
●
Watermark Message
●
Message Angle
●
Document preview image
●
Font Attributes
●
Default watermark settings
Current Watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both the predefined
watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that have been created.
ENWW
Effects tab features 135
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The dialog box shows a document preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark
and controlling the message angle and the font attributes.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list
and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until its named.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
NOTE No more that 30 watermarks can exist in the Current Watermarks list at one time. When
the limit of 30 watermarks is reached, the New button is disabled, and a Bubble Help message
appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to make it available.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. Changing the
Watermark Message for that watermark, in effect, creates a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks
list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, several different
watermarks can contain the message DRAFT, each in a different font or size. When this occurs, the
string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2). When a number
is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number
increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on).
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the
page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects
only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available:
●
Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the
lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.
●
Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right
edges of the page.
●
Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the numeric
spin box to select the angle.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Watermark Details dialog box. The
document preview image changes to reflect the modifications that you make in the Watermark
Details dialog box.
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style
of the font.
136 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:
●
Name
The Name drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The
default is language-dependent.
●
Color
The Color drop-down menu contains only one option: Gray.
●
Shading
The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of
shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:
●
Lightest
●
Very Light (default)
●
Light
●
Medium Light
●
Medium
●
Medium Dark
●
Dark
●
Very Dark
●
Darkest
●
Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent.
●
Style
The following settings are available:
●
Regular
●
Bold
●
Italic
●
Bold Italic
The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.
Default watermark settings
The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks.
ENWW
Effects tab features 137
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly
saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select
Darkest to produce a black watermark.
Table 4-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks
Setting
New watermark
Preset watermark
Name
Arial
Varies by language
Color
Gray
Gray
Shading
Very Light
Very Light
Size
80
Varies by language
Style
Regular
Regular
Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box.
Clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select
a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes
can be canceled.
138 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Paper tab features
To gain access to the Paper tab in Windows 98 SE or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Paper tab.
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Use the Paper tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to specify
different media selections for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the
document. The following figure shows the Paper tab.
Figure 4-11 Paper tab
ENWW
Paper tab features 139
The Paper tab contains the following controls:
●
Print Task Quick Sets
●
Paper Options
●
Document preview image
●
Device image
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or
user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet.
Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper tab apply to all of the pages of the
document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections available by
default.
Figure 4-12 Paper Options group box (default)
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers
check box is selected. For convenience, the settings in the Paper Options group box are described in
the following order:
●
Size is on page 140
●
Source is on page 145
●
Type is on page 146
●
Use Different Paper/Covers on page 147
●
Custom on page 141
Size is
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
140 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
NOTE When the mouse moves over the dimensions label, the cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
You can specify size for all of the settings in the Paper Options group box. When the media size is set
in the driver, the entire print-job output uses that media size. That is, if the print job uses Letter-size
media, any option that you select from the available Use Different Paper/Covers options must also
use Letter-size media.
Because print-driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is
generally best to use the print driver to set media size only when printing from software programs that
lack a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when producing a book or a booklet that does not require
different media sizes.
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media
sizes within a single document.
When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the device,
a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or select another tray.
For information about media sizes, see Media attributes on page 344.
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured,
the Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options.
Custom
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper tab. The
following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
NOTE The Custom button is not available when Use Different Paper/Covers is selected
and any setting other than First Page is also selected.
Figure 4-13 Custom Paper Size dialog box
ENWW
Paper tab features 141
When the Custom Paper Size dialog box appears, the drop-down menu in the Name group contains
one of two things, depending on the current paper-size selection on the Paper tab:
●
If the paper-size selection is a previously defined custom size, then the drop-down menu contains
the name of that custom size.
●
If the paper-size selection is a standard media size, then the drop-down menu shows the default
name Untitled (plus a number sign [#] and a numerical value) for a custom media size.
NOTE In Windows 98 SE and Windows Me, two names for the same size media can coexist
(for example, "big" and "BIG" can both be used as names for custom-size media measuring 8.4
inches x 11 inches).
The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media-size names, and not
against the standard media-size names.
The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and
capabilities are discussed in the Save, Delete, or Rename on page 143 section.
Name
The Name drop-down menu shows the name of the custom media size that was selected most recently.
Use the Name drop-down menu to select from the list of currently defined custom media sizes, or to
type a new name for a custom media size.
The name that appears in the Name drop-down menu is one of three things, depending on the following
conditions:
●
If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu and the other controls
in the dialog box have not been changed since, then the Name drop-down menu shows the name
of the last selected custom media size.
●
If the width or height controls have been changed since a custom size was selected or saved, or
if a saved media size has just been deleted, then the Name drop-down menu shows the default
name of "Untitled."
●
If a new name has been typed into the Name drop-down menu for the purpose of saving a new
size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the drop-down menu until a
saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu.
If you type a new name into the Name drop-down menu, but then do not click Save, you can change
the width and height values without losing the name. However, if a saved media-size name is selected
from the drop-down menu, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning, and replaced by
the values of the selected custom media size.
142 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Save, Delete, or Rename
The dynamic command button located under the Name drop-down menu has three possible labels:
Save, Delete, and Rename.
●
Save is the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the most
recent save action or since the selection of an existing custom media size. Clicking the button
causes the name in the Name drop-down menu to be compared against each of the saved names.
If a duplicate is found, a dialog box appears, asking if it is okay to replace the existing item. If you
click Yes, the old item is updated with the new values. If you click No, the driver returns to the
Custom Paper Size dialog box, where you can type a different name. The new name is compared
only against the list of user-defined custom media names, and not against the standard media-size
names. Whenever the command button has the Save title, it is the default button.
●
Delete is the button title whenever the name of an existing (previously saved) custom media size
appears in the Name drop-down menu, such as immediately after selecting an item from the dropdown menu or clicking Save. Clicking Delete causes the saved custom media size to be deleted,
after which the Name drop-down menu changes to Untitled, the height and width controls are
unchanged, and the button title changes to Save.
●
Rename is the button title when you type something into the Name drop-down menu after selecting
an existing custom media size from the drop-down menu. If no duplicate is found, then the name
of the stored custom media size changes to match the contents of the Name drop-down menu.
The following table illustrates the relationships between the Name drop-down menu, the command
button, and the actions that take users from one state to another.
State
Drop-down menu
contents
Button label
Action
Next state
1
Untitled
Save
Click Save.
3
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
2
Change the width or height values.
1
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
3
Click Save.
3
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
2
Change the width or height values.
2
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
3
Click Delete.
1
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
4
Change the width or height values.
1
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
3
2
3
ENWW
<user-typed text>
<name of saved item>
Save
Delete
Paper tab features 143
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Table 4-4 Name drop-down menu text strings
Table 4-4 Name drop-down menu text strings (continued)
State
Drop-down menu
contents
Button label
Action
Next state
4
<user-typed text>
Rename
Click Rename (when the name is unique).
3
Click Rename (when the name is a duplicate).
4
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
4
Change the width or height values.
2
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
3
Custom size (width and height controls)
Change the width and height values either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes, or by using the
up and down arrows. The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the
maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height
control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. See Custom width and height control limits
on page 144.
If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest
whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole
millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated
when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1/10 of an inch, depending on the current measurement
units. Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by the increment
amount (within the allowed range of values). The computer determines the rate at which the values
change.
Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters, depending on the
measurement units the driver is currently using. To change measurement units, click the dynamic
measurement units button (either Use Inches or Use Metric).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum media size for the HP LaserJet P3005 is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the maximum
is 312 x 470 mm (12.28 x 18.5 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for each mediahandling device.
Table 4-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray
Dimensions
Minimum
Maximum
Tray 1 (100-sheet
multipurpose)
Width
76 mm (3.0 inches)
312 mm (12.28 inches)
Height
127 mm (5.0 inches)
470 mm (18.5 inches)
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.7 inches)
Height
210 mm (8.26 inches)
432 mm (17 inches)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.7 inches)
Height
210 mm (8.26 inches)
432 mm (17 inches)
Tray 3 (500-sheet, optional)
144 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Table 4-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes (continued)
Tray
Dimensions
Minimum
Maximum
Duplexing unit
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.7 inches)
Height
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
432 mm (17 inches)
Dynamic measurement units
Use the dynamic measurement units button to toggle the unit of measurement between standard
(inches) and metric (millimeters) units of measurement. The label on this button is dynamic, depending
on the measurement units that are in use. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in
inches, the button is labeled Use Millimeters. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in
millimeters, the button is labeled Use Inches. Click the button to switch measurement-unit types.
Close
When you click the Close button, the Custom Paper Size dialog box closes according to the logic in
the following table. In all cases, any custom media sizes that are successfully saved (and not renamed
or deleted) while the dialog box is open remains in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The
following table lists options that appear when you click the Close button.
Table 4-6 Close dialog-box text strings
If the drop-down menu contains
And the button says
Then this happens when you click
the Close button
Untitled
Save
The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the
same as it was when you clicked the
Custom button.
Save
The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the
same as it was when you clicked the
Custom button.
<name of saved item>
Delete
The dialog box closes, and the current
media size is set to the size that last
appeared in the drop-down menu.
<user-typed text>
Rename
The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the
same as it was when you clicked the
Custom button.
Source is
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional source trays that are installed through
the Configure tab also appear here.
ENWW
Paper tab features 145
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
<user-typed text>
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been
installed on the device:
●
Automatically select
●
Manual Feed in Tray 1
●
Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)
●
Tray 2 (500-sheet tray)
●
Tray 3 (optional 500-sheet tray)
The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP LaserJet P3005 uses
the source tray that supports the selected media size. If you select a source tray other than
Automatically Select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray.
Type is
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports.
When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the device uses the default media type, which is
usually Plain.
The following standard types appear in the list:
●
Unspecified
●
Plain
●
Preprinted
●
Letterhead
●
Transparency
●
Prepunched
●
Labels
●
Bond
●
Recycled
●
Color
●
Cardstock 164-200 g/m2 (45–53 lb)
●
Rough
●
Vellum
●
Envelope
●
Light 60-75 g/m2 (16–20 lb)
●
Tough Paper (Glossy Film)
The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. Before selecting a different
setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray is specified in the Source is: setting.
146 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
If the print-driver setting is changed to a media type that is not currently loaded in the device, a controlpanel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or select another tray.
Use Different Paper/Covers
Print books that are comprised of different media types using the Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected, the following settings can appear in the
group box, along with associated options:
●
Front Cover
●
First Page
●
Other Pages
●
Last Page
●
Back Cover
NOTE When you change the Source Is and Type is settings for any of the covers or pages,
the settings remain configured until you close the software program from which you are printing.
For example, if you select First Page and change the media source or type, and then select
Back Cover to change the media source or type, the check mark remains beside Front Cover
and the selected source and type settings remain in effect. The settings are cleared only when
you close the software program.
Front Cover
Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include
a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one that is used for the remainder of the
document.
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The Front Cover setting and options are shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-14 Front Cover options
ENWW
Paper tab features 147
The following are the Front Cover options:
●
Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
●
Source is: drop-down menu
●
Type is: drop-down menu
When you select Front Cover, also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable
the setting. The Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears
next to the Front Cover option.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are
installed through the Configure tab also appear here.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports.
First Page
Use the First Page option to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page of a
document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select
the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. The First Page setting is selected by default.
Figure 4-15 First Page options
The following are the First Page options:
●
Size is: drop-down menu
●
Source is: drop-down menu
●
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: driver setting for the first page applies to the entire print job. When this is set, the setting
becomes unavailable for all the other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here.
148 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports.
Other Pages
Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media source (or the same source as First
Page) for the other pages of the document.
The Other Pages setting and options are shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-16 Other Pages options
The following are the Other Pages options:
●
Source is: drop-down menu
●
Type is: drop-down menu
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports.
Last Page
Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the last page of a document.
The Last Page setting and options are shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Paper tab features 149
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here.
Figure 4-17 Last Page options
The following are the Last Page options:
●
Source is: drop-down menu
●
Type is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports.
Back Cover
Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document.
The Back Cover setting and options are shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-18 Back Cover setting
150 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
The following are the Back Cover options:
●
Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
●
Source is: drop-down menu
●
Type is: drop-down menu
When you select Back Cover, also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable
the setting. The Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears
next to the Back Cover option.
NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting
is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would
be printed in the middle of a booklet.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are
installed through the Configure tab also appear here.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports.
Document preview image
●
Finishing
●
Effects
●
Paper
●
Basics
Device image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Paper tab represents the current physical configuration
of the device and corresponds to its configuration data. It should look the same as the image that appears
in the same location on the Configure tab in the Printer Properties.
On the Paper tab, the device image contains hot spots where you can select a media source. When
you use the mouse to move the pointer over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to a gloved hand. The current
media source tray, whether selected from the drop-down menu or from a device-image hot spot, is
highlighted on the printer image. The following points are worth noting:
ENWW
●
The Automatically Select setting in the Source is: drop-down menu does not have a
corresponding area to highlight in the device image. Selecting other settings in this menu highlights
the corresponding part in the printer image.
●
Selecting the area that represents a tray in the image always selects the corresponding tray in
the Source is: option. Manual Feed in Tray 1, which is available from the Source is: drop-down
menu, cannot be selected by selecting the image.
●
On the Paper tab, only source trays have device-image hot spots and can be highlighted.
Paper tab features 151
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:
Job Storage tab features
To gain access to the Job Storage tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Job Storage tab.
NOTE The Job Storage tab appears only when at least 80 MB of total memory is installed and
configured or an optional hard disk is installed.
Use the job-storage features to store print jobs in the HP LaserJet P3005 printer memory for printing at
a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if the job-storage feature is enabled. To
support job-storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript
(.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory.
Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage features. A minimum total
memory of 80 MB is required to use the job-storage features.
After additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the device.
If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature can be used to
update the drivers.
To configure the drivers manually after installing additional memory, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Configure tab.
7.
Under Other Options, click More….
8.
If additional memory has been installed, change the setting in the Total Memory: drop-down menu.
If you select at least 80 MB of total installed memory, this also selects the Job Storage
Enabled check box.
9.
Click OK to make the job-storage features available.
To disable the job-storage feature, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
152 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Configure tab.
7.
Click More….
8.
Click to clear the Job Storage Enabled check box in the More Configuration Options box.
NOTE When the job-storage features are disabled (that is, when the Job Storage
Enabled check box is not selected and the settings are saved), the Job Storage tab is not
visible.
If the job-storage feature is enabled (with at least 80 MB of total memory), three Job Storage Mode
settings are available on the Job Storage tab:
●
Off
●
Proof and Hold
●
Private Job
Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is
installed:
●
Quick Copy
●
Stored Job
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The following figure shows the Job Storage tab.
ENWW
Job Storage tab features 153
Figure 4-19 Job Storage tab
Topics:
●
Print Task Quick Sets
●
Status dialog box
●
Job Storage Mode
●
Quick Copy
●
Stored Job
●
PIN
●
Job Notification Options
●
User Name
●
Job Name
154 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
●
Using job-storage features when printing
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or
user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet.
Status dialog box
The unlabeled dialog box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of
a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet P3005 printer to store documents at the device
and then control their printing at the device control panel.
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options:
●
Off
●
Proof and Hold
●
Private Job
These options and the settings that control them are described in the following sections.
Off
When selected, this option turns the job-storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print
job will not be stored in the device.
To use the Proof and Hold option, the job-storage feature must be enabled, and the device must have
a minimum total memory of 80 MB.
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing
you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the
print job at the device control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be
stored in the device at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the device. If more
copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-andhold job to the device with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and
you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold
jobs are deleted if you turn off the device.
NOTE The device configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the device control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the
default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held
document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already
stored on the device memory will overwrite the existing document.
ENWW
Job Storage tab features 155
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Proof and Hold
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, the job-storage feature must be enabled, and the device must have a
minimum total memory of 80 MB.
When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the device, but is not printed until you request the
job at the device control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can be
printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is
immediately deleted from the device. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential
documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. If more copies are needed, you
must reprint the job from the software program. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the device.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). Type
non-numeric characters to remove immediately. The text field does not allow you to type more than four
characters. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses
focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits. The default initialized value
for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.
Quick Copy
To use the Quick Copy option, a hard disk must be installed and Job Storage must be enabled.
When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the
device, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the device control panel. The number
of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the device is set by using the device control panel.
NOTE The device configuration can bet set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the device control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the
default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held
document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the device.
Stored Job
To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed and Job Storage must be enabled.
Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the device hard disk without printing it. The
print job is stored in the device as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the
device hard disk, you can print the job at the device control panel.
The job remains stored in the device until it is deleted. Stored jobs remain on the device hard disk when
the device is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Use a private stored job
to send a print job directly to the device, which can then be printed only after you type a PIN at the device
control panel. (You can set the PIN in the PIN group box.) After the job is printed, the job remains in the
device and can be printed again at the device control panel. The private mode is initiated by selecting
the Require PIN to Print check box. In this mode, a PIN that is typed at the device control panel is
required in order to release the job.
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you
select Stored Job. If you select the Require PIN to Print box, you must type a PIN to make the stored
job private.
156 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job (see above). Private jobs are deleted
from the device after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the device after printing
but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed.
PIN
The PIN group box is usually inactive. The option within the PIN group box, PIN to Print, is activated if
you select either of the following options:
●
Select Private Job. If selected, you must type the PIN number at the device control panel in order
to print the job.
●
Select Stored Job, and then select the Require PIN to Print check box. If the Require PIN to
Print check box is selected, you must type a PIN in order to make the stored job private.
Job Notification Options
Clicking a job-storage mode selection causes the Job Notification Options group box to become
available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID
when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.
The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, along
with the device name, port, and location.
User Name
●
Windows User Name. This option associates your MS Windows user name with the stored print
job. The MS Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the User Name
options.
●
Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom option, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain
no more than 16 characters.
Job Name
Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the device control panel. The following
are the Job Name settings:
●
<Automatic> This option, which is the default selection, automatically generates the job name that
is associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the
print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. The
file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program
name or a time stamp is used for the job name.
●
Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. In those languages for which
<Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string
of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating
system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the device control-panel display.
The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z (uppercase
or lowercase) and 0 through 9 so that the name can appear on the device control-panel display. If you
ENWW
Job Storage tab features 157
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the device control panel. The following are the
User Name settings:
try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is
removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16
characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.
When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the
Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with <Automatic>. The
acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be
of a length and type that can appear on the device control-panel display.
If Job Name Exists. When you store a print job, you can create a print-job name or the device software
can assign one automatically. If a print job with the same name already exists, the new print job will
overwrite the existing print job. To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job
because both have the same name, select Use Job Name + (1-999). After you create the print job name,
or when one is created automatically, the device software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the
end of the print job name to make the name unique. Select Replace Existing File if you always want
the device software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name.
Using job-storage features when printing
To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1.
Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using
job-storage features.
2.
Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3.
Click the Job Storage tab.
4.
Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any
required fields.
5.
Click OK.
Releasing a job-storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the
device control panel.
1.
Press theMenu button to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up arrow) or (the down arrow) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device
(select).
control panel, and then press
3.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to your user name, and then press
4.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to the job name, and then press
5.
Press (up) or
(select).
6.
Press
7.
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press (up) or (down) to select the first digit of the PIN,
(select). The number in the device control-panel display changes to an asterisk.
and then press
Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
(select).
(select).
(down) until PRINT is highlighted on the device control panel, and then press
(select).
158 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 8.
8.
Press
9.
Press
(up) or
(down) to select the number of copies to print.
(select) to print the job.
Deleting a job-storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the device memory. You can do this from the device
control panel.
1.
Press theMenu button to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up arrow) or (the down arrow) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device
(select).
control panel, and then press
3.
Press
4.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to your user name, and then press
5.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to the job name, and then press
6.
Press (up) or
(select).
7.
Press
8.
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press (up) or (down) to select the first digit of the PIN,
(select). The number in the device control-panel display changes to an asterisk.
and then press
Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
(select).
(select).
(select).
(down) until DELETE is highlighted on the device control panel, and then press
(select).
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.
9.
Press
(select) to delete the job.
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The stored print job is deleted and the device returns to the READY state.
ENWW
Job Storage tab features 159
Basics tab features
To gain access to the Basics tab in Windows 98 SE or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Basics tab.
The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation
of the print job. You can also use it to retrieve information about the driver.
Figure 4-20 Basics tab
160 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
The Basics tab contains the following controls:
●
Print Task Quick Sets
●
Copies
●
Orientation
●
Document preview image
●
About…
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or
user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet.
Copies
Use the Copies option to specify the number of copies to print.
The number of copies that you request appears in the Copies group box. You can select the number
by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are
numbers from 1 to 9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when
the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used.
When you click another group box or leave the Basics tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as
non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed
to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.
NOTE For some software programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies
values are treated independently. For these software programs, setting 10 copies in the program
and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is
recommended that you set the number of copies in the software program, wherever possible.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the way that media feeds
into the printer. Specify the orientation of the print job from three available orientations: portrait,
landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.
NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page
orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.
ENWW
Basics tab features 161
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts
between the software program that you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software
program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the
software program) will appear in the other (such as the driver).
The Orientation group box contains three options:
●
Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.
●
Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.
●
Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is
rotated 180°. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.
Toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If selecting
the Rotate by 180 degrees check box does not change the document preview image.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:
●
Finishing
●
Effects
●
Paper
●
Basics
About…
When you click About on the Basics tab, or you click the HP logo on any of the driver Properties tabs,
the About This Driver dialog box appears. To close it, perform any of the following actions:
●
Click OK.
●
Press Esc.
●
Press Alt + F4.
●
Press Enter.
The following figure shows the About This Driver dialog box. The information that it contains varies
according to driver, date, and version.
162 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 4-21 About This Driver dialog box
●
Printer name
●
Driver name
●
Print driver version number
●
Copyright information
●
Driver Extensions (if any)
●
Configuration Status
The printer name, the driver name, the print driver version number, and the copyright information appear
at the top of the About This Driver dialog box.
The Driver Extensions group box lists the driver extensions, if any.
The Configuration Status group box indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether
administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the
configuration is default or user-defined.
ENWW
Basics tab features 163
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The About This Driver dialog box provides the following information:
Configure tab features
To gain access to the Configure tab in Windows 98 SE or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Configure tab.
Use the Configure tab to tell the driver about the device hardware configuration. If bidirectional
communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by clicking Update Now. If your
environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now button is unavailable, so
you must manually configure the options on this tab.
The Configure tab is available when the driver is opened from the Printers folder by clicking
Properties. When you open the driver from within a program, the Configure tab is not visible (with a
few exceptions, such as when using Excel 5.0 or Corel® Chart 4.0). When opened from the Printers
folder, the Configure tab looks like the following figure.
164 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Figure 4-22 Configure tab
The Configure tab contains the following controls:
●
Printer Model
●
Paper Handling Options
●
Other Options
●
Automatic configuration
●
Printer image
Printer Model
In the Printer Model group box, the driver title depends on the printer model that is being used. Selection
of any model in the drop-down menu makes the appropriate changes to other configuration options on
the tab.
ENWW
Configure tab features 165
The Printer Model setting automatically changes to User Configured whenever you change any of the
device configuration settings on the tab.
The list of models and the changes they produce are described in the following table. The models are
as follows:
●
P3005: HP LaserJet P3005
●
P3005n: HP LaserJet P3005n
●
P3005tn: HP LaserJet P3005dn
●
P3005dtn: HP LaserJet P3005x
Table 4-7 Printer-model configuration settings
Driver location
Setting
P3005
P3005n
P3005tn
P3005dtn
Configuration tab
Duplexing Unit
Available, not
selected
Available, not
selected
Available, not
selected
Selected
Allow Manual Duplexing
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Mopier Enabled
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Selected
Optional Paper Sources
(None)
(None)
(None)
HP 500-Sheet
Input Tray
Printer Hard Disk
Available, not
selected (and not
supported by the
HP LaserJet P3005
printer)
Available, not
selected (and
not supported
by the
HP LaserJet P3
005 printer)
Available, not
selected (and
not supported
by the
HP LaserJet P
3005 printer)
Available, not
selected (and
not supported
by the
HP LaserJet P
3005 printer)
Job Storage Enabled
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Selected
Font Card(s)
Available, not
selected
Available, not
selected
Available, not
selected
Available, not
selected
Alternative Letterhead
Mode
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Available, not
selected
Ignore Application
Collation
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Available, not
selected
Total Memory
48 MB
64 MB
64 MB
128 MB
Driver work space (DWS)
6.0 MB
14.0 MB
14.0 MB
46.0 MB
Include Types in
Applications Source List
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
More Configuration
Options dialog box
If it is installed and working, the bidirectional mechanism will detect the correct model and update the
configuration accordingly, either during installation or when you select Update Now on the Configure
tab. However, the printer-model name that appears in the Printer Model text box is set to
Autoconfigured.
Paper Handling Options
The Paper Handling Options group box contains the following controls:
166 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
●
Duplexing unit
●
Allow Manual Duplexing
●
Mopier Enabled
●
Optional Paper Sources
Duplexing unit
The HP LaserJet P3005dn and HP LaserJet P3005x printer models are equipped with automatic 2-sided
printing (duplexing), which you can use to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic 2-sided
printing is not supported for the following media types:
●
Transparency
●
Labels
●
Cardstock
●
Tough Paper
●
Envelope
NOTE These printer models support smart duplexing. The device uses the smart duplexing
feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the
duplexing unit only if there is printable information on the second side of the page.
Allow Manual Duplexing
Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except
transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, reinsert the media stack into the input tray
to print the second side. The device pauses while the user makes this adjustment.
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated
copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces
network traffic by transmitting the job to the device once, and then temporarily storing it in memory. The
remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode
can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step
of using a photocopier.
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the device has a
minimum total memory of 80 MB, and the Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure tab is on.
Mopier mode and collation
Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. The print driver performs
mopying, sending multiple original print jobs to the device. Either the print driver or the document
software program controls collation. Click to clear the Mopier Enabled selection on the Configure tab
to disable the feature.
Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Ignore Application Collation check
box in the More Configuration Options dialog box that appears when you click More… on the
Configure tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Mopier Enabled setting
on the Configure tab is selected, to allow the software program to control collation.
ENWW
Configure tab features 167
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Mopier Enabled
To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job with the mopier enabled, clear the Ignore Application
Collation check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected.
The following table shows the relation between Mopier Enabled settings and collation settings in the
software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings. The last column, "Expected
result," shows how a three-page print job would appear.
Table 4-8 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings
Mopier Enabled
Application collation
Ignore Application
Collation
Expected result
Not selected
Not selected
Not available
3 copies uncollated
Not selected
Selected
Not available
3 copies collated
Selected
Not selected
Not selected
3 copies uncollated
Selected
Not selected
Selected
3 copies uncollated
Selected
Selected
Not selected
3 copies collated by printer
Selected
Selected
Selected
3 copies collated by printer
Optional Paper Sources
The Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu lists optional media source trays for the
HP LaserJet P3005 printer. The list of available source trays varies depending on the printer, its input
accessories, and the printer configuration settings on the Configure tab.
For the HP LaserJet P3005 printer, the following settings are available in the Optional Paper
Sources drop-down menu:
●
(None). This is the default setting for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer.
●
HP 500-Sheet Input Tray
Other Options
The Other Options group box contains a single More… command button. Click More… to open the
More Configuration Options dialog box.
168 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 4-23 More Configuration Options dialog box
●
Storage
●
Fonts
●
Alternative Letterhead Mode
●
Ignore Application Collation
●
Printer Memory
●
Include Types in Application Source List
Storage
The Storage group box contains the Printer Hard Disk and Job Storage Enabled check boxes.
NOTE A printer hard disk is optional for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer. Do not select the Printer
Hard Disk setting unless a hard disk is installed.
If your HP LaserJet P3005 printer does not have a minimum of 80 MB of memory or a hard disk installed,
job-storage options are not available. When the job-storage feature is enabled, the device can store
print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the device control panel.
Fonts
The Fonts group box contains a Font Card(s) check box and a corresponding Configure button.
Selecting the Font Card(s) check box tells the driver that a Font card is installed, and that stored data
about the fonts on the card is available. When the check box is selected, the Configure button is
ENWW
Configure tab features 169
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The More Configuration Options dialog box contains the following controls:
enabled. Click Configure to open the Configure Font Cards dialog box. If the Font Card(s) check box
was not selected when you opened the More Configuration Options dialog box, selecting that check
box automatically opens the Configure Font Cards dialog box.
Figure 4-24 Configure Font Cards dialog box
Use the Configure Font Cards dialog box to perform the following tasks:
●
Add up to four font cards by clicking the Add button.
●
Specify a unique font-card name.
●
Select specific font card data files that contain lists of fonts on specified cards.
●
Select one or more installed cards in the Installed Font Cards list. The list to the right (Fonts)
shows all of the fonts that are available on the selected card(s).
●
Enable or disable one or more of the selected font(s).
Complete the following steps to configure a font card:
1.
Make sure that the font card is installed correctly.
2.
Click Add. The Add Font Card dialog box appears.
3.
Click Browse. The Font Card Files dialog box appears.
4.
Find and select the appropriate Printer Cartridge Metrics (PCM) file that came with the font card.
5.
Click OK.
6.
Specify a font-card name in the Add Font Card dialog box, if necessary.
170 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
7.
Click OK. The selected .PCM file appears in the Installed Font Cards list. Select the .PCM file to
see a list of available fonts in the Fonts list.
8.
Click OK to close the Add Font Card dialog box. The fonts on the card should now be available
on the system.
NOTE When using font cards with the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver: To install screen fonts that match the font card, use the .HPB file that is specifically
designed to work with that card. If no screen fonts exist for the card, use the .PCM file that is
specifically designed to work with that card.
Alternative Letterhead Mode
When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a tray,
whether you are printing on one or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper the same as for printing on
both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either face-up or facedown, load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown.
When this option is selected, you must select one of the following options in the Type is setting:
●
Letterhead
●
Preprinted
Ignore Application Collation
This setting overrides collation options that are selected in the print options of a software program.
When Ignore Application Collation is selected, the print driver collates in the most appropriate way
for the print job. The performance of this feature depends on the software program that you are using.
Printer Memory
The Driver Work Space (DWS) value shows the amount of memory that is available for keeping track
of fonts that are downloaded from the driver. The driver deletes downloaded fonts if it has exceeded the
available memory value. The (DWS) value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific
configuration of the printer. Use the (DWS) option to specify the amount of work-space memory that is
available to the printer. An accurate (DWS) value optimizes driver performance.
The HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers automatically configure the Total Memory and (DWS)
values in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me environments that support bidirectional communication. To
manually set the Total Memory and (DWS) values, print a configuration page and find the Total Memory
and DWS values in the Memory section of the page. Then, click More… on the Configuration tab, and
either use the up and down arrows to select the appropriate values or type the Total Memory and DWS
values in the Total Memory and (DWS) fields of the More Configuration Options dialog box.
NOTE The HP LaserJet P3005 printer can be configured for a maximum of 320 MB.
Include Types in Application Source List
When the Include Types in Application Source List check box is selected, all media types (such as
heavy media and transparencies) are available from the Source is: list on the Paper tab. When you
ENWW
Configure tab features 171
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The Total Memory value shows the total amount of memory that is physically installed in the printer.
The Total memory value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific configuration of the
printer. The default values for total printer memory are specified on the Configuration tab.
are in a software program, you can open the Paper tab by clicking Print from the File menu and then
clicking Properties.
Automatic configuration
If you have modified the configuration of the HP LaserJet P3005 printer since installation, click Update
Now to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver.
If the Update Now button is not available, select the appropriate configuration options on the
Configure tab.
If you have more than one driver installed on your device (for example, the default HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver), the Update Now feature works automatically only
on the driver on which it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default
setting for your device model.
Printer image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical
configuration of the device according to the driver configuration data. It should have the same
appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper tab.
NOTE The device image shown on the Configure tab might differ from the HP LaserJet P3005
printer, depending on the accessories that are installed.
172 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver
features
When you install the printing-system software in Windows 98 SE or Windows Me, the HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and the HP Traditional postscript
level 3 emulation Driver (PS Emulation Driver) can be installed by performing a Custom Installation.
This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the PS Emulation Driver
Properties interface. It also shows the tabs that are available on the PS Emulation Driver interface for
Windows 98 SE and Windows Me.
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me
In Windows 98 SE and Windows Me, you have access to a single set of driver tabs. To gain access to
the print drivers, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
●
Graphics
●
Fonts
●
Device Options
●
PostScript
●
General
●
Details
●
Sharing
●
Paper
Only device-specific HP driver tabs are described in this STR; the other driver tabs are part of the
operating system. The following tabs are described:
ENWW
●
Paper
●
Graphics
●
Fonts
●
Device Options
●
PostScript
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 173
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output and become the default settings
for all software programs. The following print-driver tabs are available in Windows 98 SE and
Windows Me:
PS 3 emulation support for the HP LaserJet P3005
A set of 92 postscript soft fonts is included with the printing-system software. If you want to permanently
install soft fonts in the printer, postscript fonts are available from HP in an optional font DIMM. The PS
emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PostScript when PostScript fonts are purchased from
Adobe.
Users of Adobe-licensed programs might also have the right to use the Adobe PostScript print drivers
from Adobe with the HP LaserJet postscript level 3 emulation PPD, which is available on the
HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD or from the HP Web site. When using the Adobe
PostScript print driver, users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements, as stated on the Adobe
Web site at the following Web site:
www.adobe.com/support/downloads/license.html
See the Font support on page 50 section of this STR for a list of the additional fonts.
Help system
The PS Emulation Driver includes the following Help systems to provide assistance with printing and
configuration options.
NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL drivers, is not available in the PS Emulation
Driver.
What's this Help
Windows 98 SE and Windows Me support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help
messages in any of the following ways:
●
Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
●
Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. Use this special cursor to select a control, and the pop-up Help window
for that feature appears.
●
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message
appears.
Paper tab features
To gain access to the Paper tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
174 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Paper tab.
Figure 4-25 Paper tab
The Paper tab contains the following controls:
ENWW
●
Paper size
●
Layout
●
Orientation
●
Paper source
●
Copies
●
Unprintable Area…
●
More Options…
●
About …
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 175
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The Paper tab controls media and finishing options for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following figure
shows the Paper tab.
●
Restore Defaults
Paper size
The Paper size selection area lists the paper or envelope sizes that the HP LaserJet P3005 printer
supports. Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of supported media sizes (forms), and then click
the icon to specify the media that you want.
A red circle with a line through any of the paper icons means that paper size is available, but you must
change a driver setting before you can print on that media size. The setting might be on the Paper tab,
such as the Paper source setting, or it might be a setting on the device control panel.
Clicking Custom page 1, Custom page 2, or Custom page 3 makes the Custom button available at
the bottom of the Paper tab. Clicking Custom opens the Custom-defined size dialog box that you can
use to define a custom paper size.
The following figure shows the Custom-defined size dialog box.
Figure 4-26 Custom-designed size dialog box
The following controls appear on the Custom-defined size dialog box:
●
Paper name text box. Use this option to type a name for this custom media size. You can define
up to three custom sizes at one time.
●
Width spin box. Use this control to specify the width for this custom media size.
●
Length spin box. Use this control to specify the length for this custom media size.
●
Units group box. Click Inches or Millimeters to specify the measurement unit for this custom
media size.
●
Transverse check box. Clicking this check box rotates the document 90° when it is printed on a
roll-fed device. Depending on the size of the printed page, you might save media` if you rotate the
page when printing.
●
Restore defaults button. Click this button to restore the settings in the Custom-defined size dialog
box to their original values.
Layout
Use the settings in this group box to specify how many pages of the document print on a single sheet.
For example, clicking 1 up prints one page of the document on each sheet. Clicking 2 up prints two
pages on each sheet of paper, dividing the sheet in half. The Layout group box values are ignored if
you print an EPS file.
176 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
The following options are available in the Layout group box:
●
1 up
●
2 up
●
4 up
Orientation
The settings in this group box specify how the document is positioned on the page. The following options
are available:
●
Portrait option button. Use this button to print your document in portrait mode. When you click this
button, the page icon shows an example of the portrait orientation.
●
Landscape option button. Use this button to print your document in landscape mode. When you
click this button, the page icon shows an example of the landscape orientation.
●
Rotated check box. The Rotated check box becomes available when you click the Landscape
option. Select the Rotate check box to rotate the image on the page.
To see the current dimensions of the page, such as the paper size and the unprintable margins, point
to the page icon, and then press and hold down the mouse button. The Orientation group box is
replaced by the Page dimensions in inches group box as seen in the following figure. Releasing the
mouse button restores the Orientation group box.
Figure 4-27 Page dimensions in inches
This setting specifies where the media that you want to use is located in the printer. The default setting
is Auto Select Tray, which causes the printer to use the tray that supports the paper size that you have
chosen.
The following options are available:
●
Auto Select Tray
●
Printer Auto Select
●
Manual Feed in Tray 1
●
Tray 1 through Tray 3, if installed on the device. If any of these trays are not installed, a red circle
with a slash through it appears next to the tray name.
●
Each of the paper types that the HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports, such as Plain, Preprinted,
and Letterhead. For a full list of supported paper types see Driver-supported media types
on page 347.
Copies
Use this box to specify the number of copies to print. You can print from 1 to 999 copies. This option is
ignored when printing an .EPS file. Some software programs override this setting.
ENWW
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 177
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Paper source
Unprintable Area…
Click Unprintable Area … to open the Unprintable Area dialog box, which is shown in the following
figure.
Figure 4-28 Unprintable Area dialog box
The area of the page that cannot be printed appears in the Unprintable Area dialog box. Changing
these settings to exceed the built-in page margins can cause the text in your document to be cut off
when printed.
More Options…
Click More Options … to open the More Paper Options dialog box, shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-29 More Paper Options dialog box
The single control on this dialog box is the Printing on both sides (duplex printing) group box.
NOTE As a rule, extra memory is not needed on the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in order to print
on both sides. However, very complex double-sided print jobs might require additional memory.
Use the settings in this group box to specify how you want to turn the page if you print on both sides.
When you print on two sides of the page, the document can be read differently depending on the way
it is printed. For example, you could have the pages of the document turn like a book or like a calendar.
When you click Flip On Long Edge or Flip On Short Edge, the page icon changes to illustrate how
the printed document will look.
178 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
About …
Click About… to open a dialog box that contains copyright and version information about the print driver.
The following figure shows the About dialog box.
Figure 4-30 About dialog box
Restore Defaults
Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Paper tab to their original values.
Graphics tab features
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Graphics tab.
The Graphics tab specifies the resolution, halftoning, and scaling settings for the device. The following
figure shows the Graphics tab.
ENWW
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 179
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
To gain access to the Graphics tab, follow these steps:
Figure 4-31 Graphics tab
The Graphics tab contains the following controls:
●
Resolution
●
Halftoning
●
Special
●
Scaling
●
Restore Defaults
Resolution
Use the Resolution drop-down menu to specify the resolution for printing. Resolution is measured in
dots per inch (dpi). The following options are available: The dpi setting for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer
is 600 dpi.
●
1200
●
600 dpi. This is the default setting.
●
300 dpi
180 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Halftoning
The Halftoning options specify values for the number of lines per inch (frequency) and angle of the
pattern that you want to use for halftone screens.
If print jobs have a moiré pattern when you print graphics such as photographs or detailed images, you
might want to adjust these settings. However, the default printer settings should work in most cases. Do
not change these settings unless you have experience using halftones. To return to the default settings
after you have made changes, click Use printer's settings.
Special
The Special group box contains the following options:
●
Print as a negative image. Selecting this option prints a negative of the image by complementing
the RGB values or reversing the black and white values. Click this option to see the page icon
change to reflect this setting.
●
Print as a mirror image. Selecting this option prints a mirror image of your document by reversing
the horizontal coordinates. Click this option to see the page icon change to reflect this setting.
Scaling
Use the Scaling control to specify the size of the image to print. You can specify from 25% to 400% of
the original size. A setting of 400%, for example, prints an image four times larger than the original.
When you enlarge a document, only the portion of the document that fits on the page prints. The default
setting is 100%.
Restore Defaults
Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Graphics tab to their original values.
The Fonts tab controls the fonts for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the
Fonts tab.
ENWW
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 181
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Fonts tab features
Figure 4-32 Fonts tab
The following options are available:
●
Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table
●
Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts
●
Always use TrueType fonts
Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table
Use this option to substitute a postscript printer font for the common TrueType fonts in a document. This
can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be downloaded. By default, common
TrueType fonts are substituted when printing, but uncommon ones are downloaded to the device. If you
substitute a printer font for a TrueType font, the printed document might not match the look of the
document on the screen.
Click Edit the Table… to customize which TrueType fonts are downloaded and which printer fonts
should be substituted for TrueType fonts.
Font Substitution Table
Click this option to open the Font Substitution Table dialog box, which makes available the options
for changing the TrueType-to-PostScript font mapping. The following figure shows the Font
Substitution Table dialog box.
182 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 4-33 Font Substitution Table
Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts
Click this option to use font-matching rules to find the best printer font to substitute for TrueType fonts
in your document. TrueType fonts are not downloaded when the document is printed. This can speed
up printing, but the printed fonts might not exactly match the fonts on the screen.
Always use TrueType fonts
Click this option to download TrueType fonts to the device when your document is printed. This ensures
that the printed document looks the same as it does on the screen, but printing might take longer.
Click Send Fonts As… to specify the format in which the TrueType fonts are sent to the device.
Send Fonts As…
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
Use this option to specify how TrueType fonts are downloaded.
ENWW
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 183
Figure 4-34 Send Fonts As… dialog box
The following options are available:
●
●
Send TrueType fonts as. This control offers the following settings:
●
Outlines. Use this setting for scalable outlines.
●
Bitmaps. Use this setting for bitmaps.
●
Type 42. Type 42 fonts are TrueType fonts with headers that enable them to be rendered by
the PS Emulation Driver.
●
Don't Send. Use this setting if you do not want any TrueType fonts to be downloaded.
Threshold to switch between downloading bitmap or outline fonts, measured in pixels (in
pixel size at the current resolution). Use this control to specify the size of the font (in pixels) at
which the PS Emulation Driver driver should switch from downloading TrueType fonts as bitmap
(Type 3) fonts to downloading them as outline (Type 1) fonts.
The most efficient threshold value varies depending on the printing resolution. For example, at 300
dpi, downloading TrueType fonts as outlines becomes efficient when fonts are about 25 points or
larger. If this value is 0, outline (Type 1) fonts are always sent.
●
Favor system TrueType fonts over printer fonts that have the same name. Use this option to
specify whether to use system TrueType fonts instead of printer fonts when the same font is found
on both the computer and the printer. Printer fonts are the default.
184 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Using printer fonts can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be
downloaded. However, the fonts in the printed document might not exactly match the fonts on the
screen.
●
Send PostScript fonts as. Use this option to specify whether to download postscript fonts to the
printer. The following options are available:
●
In Native Format. Click this option to download the postscript font files to the device before
the document prints.
●
Don't Send. If you click this option, no fonts are downloaded. This does not affect downloading
of TrueType fonts.
Restore Defaults
Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Fonts tab to their original values.
Device Options tab features
To gain access to the Device Options tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Device Options tab.
When the driver is opened from within a software program, the Device Options tab includes only the
Printer features controls. When opened from the Printers folder, the Device Options tab appears as
shown in the following figure.
ENWW
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 185
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The Device Options tab communicates information about the hardware configuration to the print driver.
Figure 4-35 Device Options tab
Changes that you make to the Device Options tab are not reflected in the Properties settings until the
modified device settings have been applied and the Properties tabs have been re-opened. For example,
the duplexing unit will not appear until you modify the Device Options tab, click Apply, close the
Properties tabs, and then re-open the Properties tabs.
The Device Options tab contains the following options:
●
Available printer memory
●
Printer features
●
Installable options
●
Restore Defaults
This section also contains information about using job-storage features.
NOTE Use the dynamic Change settings for: control in the Printer features and the
Installable options sections of the Device Options tab to change the setting for the feature or
option that you have selected.
186 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Available printer memory
The Available printer memory control specifies the amount of memory in the device. If the value in
this control does not match the amount of memory in the printer model, use the spin box to specify the
correct amount of memory.
NOTE The HP LaserJet P3005 printer can be configured for a maximum of 320 MB.
Printer features
The Printer features group box shows settings that are specific to the printer. You can change the
settings by selecting the setting you want to change and then specifying a new value in the Change
setting for list.
ENWW
●
FastRes 1200
●
User
●
PIN digit 1 (for Private Job)
●
PIN digit 2 (for Private Job)
●
PIN digit 3 (for Private Job)
●
PIN digit 4 (for Private Job)
●
HPPJLEncoding
●
EconoMode
●
Job storage
●
Collate
●
Fit to Page
●
Print Quality
●
Watermark
●
Watermark (Pages per Sheet)
●
Watermark Font
●
Watermark Size
●
Watermark Angle
●
Watermark Style
●
Watermark Intensity
●
Print Watermark
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The following printer-feature settings are available on this tab:
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 187
FastRes 1200
The FastRes 1200 setting contains the following options:
●
On
●
Off. This is the default setting.
User
The default value for this setting is System Name (if available). Additional values for this setting include
numbers 1 through 20.
PIN digit 1 (for Private Job)
The default value for the PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) setting is 0.
PIN digit 2 (for Private Job)
The default value for the PIN digit 2 (for Private Job) setting is 0.
PIN digit 3 (for Private Job)
The default value for the PIN digit 3 (for Private Job) setting is 0.
PIN digit 4 (for Private Job)
The default value for the PIN digit 4 (for Private Job) setting is 0.
HPPJLEncoding
The HPPJLEncoding feature contains the control for the UTF8 feature.
EconoMode
The EconoMode feature contains the following options:
●
False (default)
●
True
Selecting this option extends the life of the toner supply and reduces cost per page. However, it also
reduces print quality. The printed image is lighter, but it is adequate for printing drafts or proofs.
HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time when the
average toner coverage is significantly less than 5%, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the
mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade under these circumstances, you
must install a new print cartridge, even if toner remains in the cartridge.
NOTE The EconoMode setting might work only if a genuine HP print cartridge is installed.
HP print cartridges can measure the life of the mechanical parts and the quantity of toner. If
the EconoMode setting is used frequently, the mechanical parts can wear out before the supply
of toner is depleted, increasing the risk of toner leaking. Use genuine HP parts to avoid this
problem.
Job storage
The default value for this setting is Off, which means that the print job will not be stored in the device.
188 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
NOTE The job-storage feature requires at least 80 MB of total memory or that an optional hard
disk is installed.
If the job-storage feature is enabled (with at least 80 MB of total memory), three Job Storage Mode
settings are available on the Job Storage tab:
●
Off
●
Proof and Hold
●
Private Job
Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is
installed:
●
Quick Copy
●
Stored Job
To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1.
Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
2.
Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3.
Click the Device Options tab.
4.
In the Printer features setting, select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option
button, and then complete any required fields.
5.
Click OK.
After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the
device control panel.
1.
Press theMenu button to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up arrow) or (the down arrow) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device
(select).
control panel, and then press
3.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to your user name, and then press
4.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to the job name, and then press
5.
Press (up) or
(select).
6.
Press
7.
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press (up) or (down) to select the first digit of the PIN,
(select). The number in the device control-panel display changes to an asterisk.
and then press
Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
(select).
(select).
(down) until PRINT is highlighted on the device control panel, and then press
(select).
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.
ENWW
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 189
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using
job-storage features.
8.
Press
9.
Press
(up) or
(down) to select the number of copies to print.
(select) to print the job.
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the device memory. You can do this from the device
control panel.
1.
Press theMenu button to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up arrow) or (the down arrow) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device
(select).
control panel, and then press
3.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to your user name, and then press
4.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to the job name, and then press
5.
Press (up) or
(select).
6.
Press
7.
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press (up) or (down) to select the first digit of the PIN,
(select). The number in the device control-panel display changes to an asterisk.
and then press
Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
(select).
(select).
(down) until DELETE is highlighted on the device control panel, and then press
(select).
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.
8.
Press
(select) to delete the job.
Collate
The Collate feature contains the following options:
●
On (turn off in application)
●
Off
Fit to Page
The Fit to Page feature contains the following options:
●
Prompt User for correct size (default)
●
Nearest Size and Scale
●
Nearest Size and Crop
●
Letter
●
A4
Print Quality
The Print Quality drop-down menu contains the following controls in the PS Emulation Unidriver:
●
1200 dpi
●
FastRes 1200
190 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
●
600 dpi
●
300 dpi
Watermark
●
None (default)
●
Draft
●
Company Confidential
●
Company Proprietary
●
Company Private
●
Confidential
●
Copy
●
Copyright
●
File Copy
●
Final
●
For Internal Use Only
●
Preliminary
●
Proof
●
Review Copy
●
Sample
●
Top Secret
●
Urgent
●
Custom
Watermark (Pages per Sheet)
The Watermark (Pages per Sheet) feature contains the following options:
●
1 (default)
●
>=2
Watermark Font
The Watermark Font feature contains the following options:
ENWW
●
Courier Bold
●
Helvetica Bold (default)
●
Times Bold
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 191
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The Watermark feature contains the following options:
Watermark Size
Watermark Size. Settings for the watermark size range from 24 points to 90 points. The default is 48
points.
Watermark Angle
Watermark Angle. Settings for the watermark angle range from 90° to -90° in 15° intervals. The default
is a 45° angle.
Watermark Style
The Watermark Style feature contains the following options:
●
Narrow Outline
●
Medium Outline (default)
●
Wide Outline
●
Wide Halo Outline
●
Filled
Watermark Intensity
The Watermark Intensity feature contains the following options:
●
Darkest
●
Darker
●
Dark
●
Medium Dark
●
Medium
●
Medium Light
●
Light
●
Lighter
●
Lightest
Print Watermark
The Print Watermark feature contains the following options:
●
No (default)
●
All Pages
●
First Page Only
Installable options
This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the
HP LaserJet P3005 printer. The following controls are available:
192 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
●
Tray 3
●
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)
●
Printer Hard Disk
●
Mopier Mode
●
Job Storage
●
VMOption
Tray 3
This control specifies whether you have an optional 500-sheet feeder tray (Tray 3) installed on the
printer. The default setting is Uninstalled.
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer is equipped with automatic two-sided printing (duplexing), which allows
you to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic two-sided printing is not supported for the
following media types:
●
Transparency
●
Labels
●
Cardstock
●
Tough Paper
●
Envelope
Printer Hard Disk
NOTE A printer hard disk is optional for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer. Do not select the
Installed setting unless a hard disk is installed.
Mopier Mode
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated
copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces
network traffic by transmitting the job to the device once, and then storing it in memory. The remainder
of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be
created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using
a photocopier.
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier Mode:
setting on the Device Options tab is Enabled.
Job Storage
When the job-storage feature is enabled, the device can store print jobs so that you can gain access to
those print jobs later at the control panel.
ENWW
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 193
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports smart duplexing. The printer detects information on both sides
of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if printable information appears
on the second side of the page.
VMOption
This option shows the amount of virtual memory (RAM) in the device. The following options are available:
●
48 MB
●
64 MB (default)
●
80 MB
●
96 MB
●
112 MB
●
128 MB
●
176 MB
●
192 MB
●
304 MB
●
320 MB
●
512 MB
NOTE The HP LaserJet P3005 printer can be configured for a maximum of 320 MB.
Restore Defaults
Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Device Options tab to their original values.
PostScript tab features
To gain access to the PostScript tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the PostScript tab.
The PostScript tab controls the PostScript functions for the PS Emulation Driver. The following figure
shows the PostScript tab.
194 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 4-36 PostScript tab
●
PostScript output format
●
PostScript header
●
Print PostScript error information
●
PostScript timeout values
●
Advanced…
●
Restore Defaults
PostScript output format
Use the PostScript output format list to specify the format for postscript files. The following options
are available:
ENWW
●
PostScript (optimize for speed). Use this setting for printing most documents.
●
Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document
Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document will be a self-contained object. This
is useful, for instance, to create a Postscript file and print it on a different printer.
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 195
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The PostScript tab contains the following controls and options:
●
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another
document that is to be printed from a different program.
●
Archive Format. Use this setting to create a PostScript file for later use.
●
PJL archive format. This setting notifies the printer that the document is being printed in a different
printer language.
PostScript header
Use the PostScript header options to specify whether to send header information to the device each
time you print a document. The following options are available:
●
Download header with each print job. This is the default setting and is sufficient or most types
of printing. Use this setting to print to a shared network device or to a file on a disk.
●
Assume header is downloaded and retained. To print to a local printer, save printing time by
sending the header information to the device only once.
●
Send Header Now. Click this button to send header information to the device. This option is ignored
when you specify EPS, Archive, or PJL Archive formats.
Print PostScript error information
Use the Send PostScript error information option to print postscript error messages after the
document has been printed. The PS Emulation Driver can detect certain errors that MS Windows cannot.
If you are having printing problems, click this option. This information can help you, a system
administrator, or a device-support representative determine what caused the problem. The error
message information is not included in EPS format.
PostScript timeout values
Use the following options to specify the postscript timeout values for the printer.
●
Job timeout. This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to
the device before the device stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the device
continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. Use the spin box to change
this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
●
Wait timeout. This control specifies how long the device waits to get more postscript information
from the computer. After the specified time passes, the device stops trying to print the document
and prints an error message. When printing a very complicated document, increase this value. If
you specify 0 seconds, the device waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds. Use the
spin box to change this value up to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Advanced…
Click Advanced … to open the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box, which appears in the
following figure.
196 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 4-37 Advanced PostScript Options dialog box
●
PostScript Language Level
●
Bitmap compression
●
Data format
●
Send CTRL+D before job
●
Send CTRL+D after job
PostScript Language Level
The PostScript Language Level specifies which PostScript language level to use, from 1 to the highest
level that the device supports. Some devices support multiple levels. It is usually best to select the
highest level that is available, because a higher language-level provides more features. In some
instances, however, you would still use level 1. For example, if you are printing a file to disk and that file
will be printed by someone who has a level-1 device, select level 1.
Choose between Postscript level 1 and Postscript level 2 features for the HP LaserJet P3005.
Bitmap compression
Use this control to specify whether to compress graphics before sending the document to the device. If
you are using postscript level 2, or if you are using postscript level 1 and a device connected to a serial
port, click Compress bitmap images. If you are using postscript level 1 and a device connected to a
parallel port or if using a network device, click No bitmap compression.
ENWW
HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 197
HP traditional print
drivers for MS Windows
The following options are available on the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box:
Data format
This control specifies the protocol that the device uses for print jobs. The following options are available:
●
ASCII data. This is the default setting. Click ASCII data to send data in ASCII format (7-bit), which
might take longer to print but can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or
network port.
●
Binary communications protocol. When you click Binary communications protocol, the
device sends all data except special control characters in binary (8-bit) format. This format can be
sent over parallel or serial communications ports and is faster than sending data in ASCII format.
Select this option, click Send Mode to switch the device to Binary Communications Protocol (BCP)
for future print jobs.
NOTE This option is available only if the computer is connected to the device through a
direct connection (a USB or parallel cable).
●
Tagged binary communications protocol. Click Tagged Binary Communications Protocol to
send all data except special control characters in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be
sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
●
Pure binary data. Click Pure binary data to send all data except special control characters in
binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports
and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
Send CTRL+D before job
This control specifies whether the device is reset at the beginning of every postscript document. The
default setting is off (unselected). Pressing Ctrl-D resets the device to its default setting to ensure that
previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the
device is connected through a network. If the document fails to print when sent to a device that is
connected through parallel or serial ports, select the Send CTRL+D before job check box.
Send CTRL+D after job
This control specifies whether the device is reset at the end of every postscript document. The default
setting is off (unselected). Ctrl-D resets the device to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs
are not affected by the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the device is connected
through a network. If the document fails to print when sent to a network device, click to select the Send
CTRL+D before job check box.
Restore Defaults
Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the PostScript tab to their original values.
198 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
5
HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation
unidrivers for MS Windows
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the HP LaserJet P3005 printer unidrivers. The unidrivers are the
HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the HP Postscript 3 Emulation Unidriver (PS Emulation
Unidriver) for Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and
64-bit).
You can control print jobs from several places:
●
Device control panel
●
Software-program print-dialog box
●
Driver user interface
Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one location (for instance, the media input tray),
settings that are established in the software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Printdriver settings, in turn, override device control-panel settings.
When installing the print-system software in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003, the
HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default. Perform a Custom Installation to install the HP PCL 5 Unidriver
and the PS Emulation Unidriver .
The following sections describe the options that are available on each tab of the HP PCL 6 Unidriver,
the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver. This chapter also describes differences
between the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver. Unless
otherwise noted, features described here apply to all three.
Topics:
ENWW
Access to print drivers in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
●
Help system
●
Advanced tab features
●
Paper/Quality tab features
●
Effects tab features
●
Finishing tab features
●
Job Storage tab features
HP unidrivers for
Windows
●
Introduction 199
●
Services tab features
●
Device Settings tab features
●
About tab features
200 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Access to print drivers in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003
Depending on which operating system the print drivers are installed, access to the print drivers and
different print-driver interfaces is available in several ways:
●
Device control panel
●
Software-program print-dialog box
●
Print-driver user interface
Device control panel
For information about controlling print jobs from the device control panel, see the HP LaserJet P3005
User Guide that came with the device, or download it from following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/ljp3005_software
Software-program print-dialog box
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps:
1.
Click File.
2.
Click Print.
3.
Click Properties.
The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These
driver settings apply only while that software program is open.
Print-driver user interface
Control the drivers directly from the Printers folder for access to two sets of driver tabs: the Printing
Preferences tabs and the Properties tabs. The settings on the Printing Preferences driver tabs control
the driver default settings for each user's profile. Configure installable options on the Properties driver
tabs.
Printing Preferences driver tabs
ENWW
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
Access to print drivers in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 201
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The Printing Preferences driver tabs change the default settings that are used across all software
programs. To gain access to these tabs, follow these steps:
The following Printing Preferences print-driver tabs are available:
●
Advanced
●
Paper/Quality
●
Effects
●
Finishing
●
Job Storage
●
Services
All of these tabs are device-specific.
The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage setting is Enabled on the Device
Settings tab in the Properties driver tabs. Click Apply on the Device Settings tab to make the settings
take effect.
Properties driver tabs
This set of tabs controls the driver behavior and driver connections. To gain access to the Properties
tabs, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
The following Properties print-driver tabs are available:
●
General
●
Sharing
●
Ports
●
Advanced
●
Security
●
Device Settings
●
About
Only device-specific HP driver tabs are described in this document; the other driver tabs are part of the
operating system. The following Properties driver tabs are described in this document:
●
Device Settings
●
About
202 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Help system
The HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver include a full-featured
Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers, is not available in the
HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and PS Emulation Unidriver.
What's this? Help
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 support What's this? Help. Access What's
this? Help messages in any of the following ways:
●
Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
●
Click the ? button in the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help
window for that feature appears.
●
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message
appears.
Incompatible Print Settings messages
Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response
to specific actions. These messages appear in response to selections that are illogical or impossible
given the device capabilities or the current settings of other controls.
NOTE Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might accept
some settings that are illogical or impossible for the device to perform. Sending a job with
incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as expected, check
the device documentation to ensure that the device has the expected capabilities.
HP unidrivers for
Windows
In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, some technically
invalid print-driver configurations result in warning messages. Duplexing, for example, is not possible
when the Transparency media type is selected. The following figure shows an Incompatible Print
Settings message.
ENWW
Help system 203
Figure 5-1 An Incompatible Print Settings message
To accept the change that was just made, select the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically. option
and then click OK. The driver resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new
value.
To accept the change that was just made and return to the driver settings to resolve the conflict, click I
will resolve the conflict myself. and then click OK.
NOTE In this example, the conflict can be resolved manually. If the conflict is not resolved when
the driver is closed, then the same dialog appears again when a print job is sent to the device.
204 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Advanced tab features
To gain access to the Advanced tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click the Advanced tab.
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages and to configure special controls that are
not commonly used. Also use this tab to control features such as media size and copies in the driver
(although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or through the
page settings in the software program). The following figure shows the Advanced tab.
ENWW
Advanced tab features 205
Figure 5-2 The default appearance of the Advanced tab
The Advanced tab contains the following controls:
●
Paper/Output
●
Graphic
●
Document Options
Paper/Output
The Paper/Output settings contain the following controls:
●
Copy Count setting
●
Collated check box (appears when you select Copy Count)
206 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Copy Count
Copy Count specifies the number of copies to print. This driver setting is useful for software programs
that do not provide a copy count. If a copy count is available in the software program, set the copy count
in the software program.
The requested number of copies appears in the Copy Count option. Select the number by typing in the
box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to
9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is
used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used.
When you click another group box or leave the Advanced tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as
non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed
to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.
Because the number of copies can be set in some software programs, conflicts between the software
program and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate so
that the number of copies set in one location (such as the software program) appears in the other (such
as the driver). For some software programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies
values are treated independently. For example, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10
copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. Set the number of copies in the
software program, wherever possible.
Collated
The Collated check box is visible when the Copy Count setting is selected. The check box becomes
available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1.
When collated, pages print consecutively for each copy of the document. When not collated, copies of
each page print together.
This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software program Print dialog box. Settings
in the software program override settings in the print driver. For instance, when using Microsoft Word,
the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default. However, in the print driver, the
Collated check box in the Advanced tab is not selected by default. The software program setting takes
precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by default.
To obtain uncollated printed output, clear the Collate setting in both the driver and the software program.
Similarly, if the Collated check box is selected in the driver, but the Collate setting is not enabled in the
software program, the printed output is uncollated.
Graphic
The Graphic setting contains the following control:
●
True Type Font settings
Use Substitute with Device Font (the default setting) to print documents that contain TrueType fonts
by using equivalent printer fonts. This permits faster printing; however, special characters may be lost
that the equivalent printer font does not support. Select Download as Softfont to download TrueType
fonts for printing instead of using printer fonts.
ENWW
Advanced tab features 207
HP unidrivers for
Windows
True Type Font
Document Options
The Document Options setting contains the following controls:
●
Advanced Printing Features
●
Print Optimizations
Advanced Printing Features
When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled, metafile spooling is turned on and
Finishing tab options such as Page Order, Booklet Layout, and Pages per Sheet are available,
depending on the device. For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at the
default (Enabled). If compatibility problems occur, disable the feature. However, some advanced
printing features might still be available in the print driver, even if they have been disabled. Selecting an
advanced printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the Advanced tab automatically
makes the feature available.
Print Optimizations
NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5
Unidriver. They are not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled. When this feature is enabled and a document
contains overlapping text and graphics, the text that is placed on top of a graphic might not print correctly.
If the printed output is not correct, disable this feature. When this feature is disabled, print optimizationfeatures, such as substituting device fonts for TrueType fonts and scanning for horizontal and vertical
rules, are turned off.
PostScript Options
NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the PS Emulation Unidriver. They are
not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5 Unidriver.
Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Output Options drop-down menu:
●
Optimize for Speed. This is the default setting.
●
Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document
Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document is a self-contained object. For
example, use this option to create a postscript file and print it on a different printer.
●
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another
document that is to be printed from another program.
●
Archive format. Use this option to create a postscript file that you can use later.
Select one of the following settings in the TrueType Font Download drop-down menu:
●
Automatic. This is the default setting. The PS Emulation Driver determines which format is best.
●
Outline. Select this option if you want to download the TrueType font as a scalable outline font.
●
Bitmap. Select this option to download the TrueType font as a bitmap font.
●
Native TrueType If the printer is a TrueType rasterizer printer; select this option to download the
TrueType font as an outline font.
208 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Language Level drop-down menu:
●
3
●
2
●
1
The default setting is 3. It is usually better to select the highest number available, because it provides
more features. In some instances, lower numbers might be necessary. For example, if you are printing
a file to disk and that file is to be printed by someone who has a level-1 printer, select 1.
Select one of the following settings in the Send PostScript Error Handler drop-down menu:
●
Yes. This is the default setting. When an error occurs in the print job, an error page is sent to the
printer.
●
No. Select this setting if you do not want an error page to be printed when an error occurs.
Select one of the following settings in the Negative Output drop-down menu:
●
●
Yes. Select this option to print a negative of the image by reversing the values for black and white.
No. Print the image without reversing the values for black and white. This is the default setting.
Printer Features
The Printer Features setting contains the following controls:
●
REt
The REt feature is Enabled by default. Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) refines the print
quality of characters by smoothing jagged edges that can occur on angles and curves of a printed
image. Select Disabled if graphics, particularly scanned images, are not printing clearly.
●
Print All Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is Disabled by default. When Enabled is selected, the driver
prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black,
except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse
typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor
does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
NOTE The Send TrueType as Bitmap option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and
HP PCL 5 unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Send True Type as Bitmap provides an alternative for software programs that have trouble using
TrueType fonts for special graphic aspects such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The setting is
Disabled by default. The TrueType fonts are converted to bitmap soft fonts before downloading.
The Enabled setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which
retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts.
●
Graphics Mode
NOTE The Graphics Mode option is available only in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver. It is not
available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver.
ENWW
Advanced tab features 209
HP unidrivers for
Windows
●
Use the Graphics Mode feature to select one of the following settings:
●
●
Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the device as a combination
of HP Graphics Language, version 2 (HP-GL/2), and raster images. This setting might produce
higher-quality output. It is the default setting.
●
Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the device as images
composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.
Alternative Letterhead Mode
When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a
tray, whether printing on one or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper the same as for printing
on both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either face-up or
face-down, load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown.
When this option is selected, use one of the following options in the Type is setting:
●
Letterhead
●
Preprinted
NOTE Alternative Letterhead Mode is available only if the printer is equipped with an
automatic duplexing unit.
Layout Options
The Layout Options setting contains the Page Order setting.
Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of the document are printed. Front to Back prints
the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1 prints last.
NOTE The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of media rather than on individual
logical pages. Accordingly, if Pages per Sheet on the Finishing tab is greater than one, the
ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of media does not change.
210 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Paper/Quality tab features
To gain access to the Paper/Quality tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click the Paper/Quality tab.
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. Also use this tab to specify
different media selections for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the
document. The following figure shows the Paper/Quality tab.
ENWW
Paper/Quality tab features 211
Figure 5-3 Paper/Quality tab
The Paper/Quality tab contains the following control sets:
●
Print Task Quick Sets
●
Paper Options
●
Use Different Paper/Covers
●
Document preview image
●
Print Quality
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Paper/Quality tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Because
they are all the same control, any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on
212 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
the Paper/Quality tab affects all the Printing Preferences driver tabs that have the Print Task Quick
Sets setting:
●
Paper/Quality
●
Effects
●
Finishing
●
Job Storage
Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all of the other print driver tabs (except the Advanced tab, where the setting is not available). Print
Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing
specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The Print Task Quick Sets control
does not appear on the driver Properties tabs.
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator
Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot
be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use.
The following selections are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
●
Default Print Settings
●
User Guide Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that
existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that
are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been
changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.
Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically if no
other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver settings
match the original settings. Otherwise, the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the same label
that appeared when a user or the computer last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking
OK.
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See the HP Driver
Preconfiguration on page 31 section for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
Table 5-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer
ENWW
Feature setting location
Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable1
Print on Both Sides
Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Available, not selected Yes
Flip Pages Up
Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Unavailable, not
selected
Yes
Booklet Layout
Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Unavailable, Off
Yes
Paper/Quality tab features 213
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Driver feature
Table 5-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer (continued)
Driver feature
Feature setting location
Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable1
Pages per Sheet
Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
1 page per sheet
Yes
Print Page Borders
Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Unavailable
Yes
Page Order
Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Unavailable
Yes
Orientation
Finishing tab, Orientation group box
Portrait
Yes
Rotate by 180
degrees
Finishing tab, Orientation group box
Available, not selected
Yes
Resizing Options
Effects tab, Resizing Options group box
Actual Size
Yes
Print document on
Effects tab, Resizing Options group box
Available, not selected
Yes
Size to print on
Effects tab, Resizing Options group box
Actual Size
Yes
Scale to Fit
Effects tab, Resizing Options group box
Unavailable, selected
Yes
% of Normal Size
Effects tab, Resizing Options group box
Available, not selected
Yes
Watermarks
Effects tab
(none)
Yes
Watermarks First
Page Only
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
Unavailable, not
selected
Yes
Current watermarks
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none)
Yes
Watermark
Message
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none)
Yes2
Message Angle
(watermark)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Diagonal
Yes2
Watermark
message angle
(angle)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Unavailable unless
the Angle option is
selected, 52 degrees
Yes
Name (watermark
font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
Arial
Yes2
Color (watermark
font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
Gray
Yes2
Shading (watermark
font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
Very Light
Yes2
Size (watermark
font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
80
No
Style (watermark
font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
Regular
Yes2
Size is:
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group
box
Letter
Yes
Use Different Paper
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group
box
Available, not selected
No
214 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Table 5-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer (continued)
1
2
Driver feature
Feature setting location
Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable1
Source is:
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group
box
Automatically Select
Yes
Type is:
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group
box
Unspecified
Yes
Economode
Paper/Quality tab, Print Quality dialog box
Available, unselected
Yes
Unlabeled group
box
Job Storage tab
Status message: for
example, Your job
will be printed but
not stored on the
printer
No
Job Storage Mode
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group
box
Off is selected
No
Proof and Hold
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group
box
Available, not selected No
Private Job
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group
box
Available, not selected No
Quick Copy
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group
box
Available, not selected No
Stored Job
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group
box
Available, not selected No
Require PIN to Print
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group
box
Unavailable, not
selected
No
MS Windows User
Name
Job Storage tab, User Name group box
Unavailable, selected
(Windows User
Name appears in
field)
No
PIN to Print
Job Storage tab, Require PIN group box
Unavailable, not
selected
No
Display Job ID when Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options
printing
group box
Unavailable, selected
No
Job Name
Unavailable,
Automatically
selected
No
Job Storage tab, Job Name group box
These features can be preconfigured by using one of the HP driver preconfiguration tools. For more information, See HP Driver
Preconfiguration on page 31, or go to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw.
Not supported in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me.
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the
HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide.
ENWW
Paper/Quality tab features 215
HP unidrivers for
Windows
User Guide Print Settings
When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings,
except for the following settings:
●
On the Paper/Quality tab, Type Is: is set to Unspecified.
●
On the Finishing tab, the Print on Both Sides check box is selected.
●
On the Finishing tab, Flip Pages Up check box is selected.
●
On the Finishing tab, Pages per Sheet is set to 2 pages per sheet.
●
On the Finishing tab, Page Order is set to Right then Down.
Default Print Settings
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Default Print Settings. To change any of the
default settings on any of the Printing Preferences driver tabs and save the configuration as a Print
Task Quick Set, highlight the words Default Print Settings, type the name for the new Print Task Quick
Set, and then click Save. Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task
Quick Set, select it from the drop-down menu and click Delete.
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator
Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot
be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use.
A maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets can be stored on a particular system. If you attempt to save
more, a message box appears that states: There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined. Please
delete some before adding new ones.
Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the
pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections
that are available by default.
216 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 5-4 Paper Options group box
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers
check box is selected. The settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order:
●
Size is on page 217
●
Custom Paper Size on page 218
●
Source is on page 219
●
Type is on page 220
●
Use Different Paper/Covers on page 221
Size is
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
When the mouse cursor moves over the dimensions label, the cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved
hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media
sizes within a single document.
When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the device,
a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or select another tray.
ENWW
Paper/Quality tab features 217
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Because media-size settings in most software programs override driver settings, it is generally best to
use the driver to set media size only when printing from software programs that do not include a mediasize setting, such as NotePad, or when producing a book or a booklet that does not require different
media sizes.
For information about media sizes, see the Media attributes on page 344 section of this STR.
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured,
the Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options.
Custom Paper Size
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click Custom… on the Paper/Quality tab. The
following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
Figure 5-5 Custom Paper Size dialog box
Name
Use the Name text box to type a new name for a custom media size.
The name that appears in the Name text box depends on the following conditions:
●
If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu on the Paper/
Quality tab, then the Name text box shows the name of the selected custom media size.
●
If a standard media size has been selected on the Paper/Quality tab, then the Name text box
shows the default name of "Custom."
●
If a new name has been typed into the Name text box for the purpose of saving a new size or
renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the text box until the new size is saved
or the dialog box is closed.
If you type a new name into the Name text box, but then do not click Save, you can change the width
and height values without losing the name. However, if you close the dialog box without clicking Save,
any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning.
218 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Paper size
Change the width and height values by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes in the Paper Size
group box.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the
maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height
control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry.
If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest
whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole
millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated
when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1/10 of an inch, depending on the current measurement
units.
Units
To change measurement units, click one of the options in the Units group box (either Inches or
Millimeters).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum media size for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the
maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for
each media-handling device.
Table 5-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray
Dimensions
Minimum
Maximum
Tray 1 (100-sheet
multipurpose)
Width
76 mm (3.0 inches)
312 mm (12.28 inches)
Height
127 mm (5.0 inches)
470 mm (18.5 inches)
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.7 inches)
Height
210 mm (8.26 inches)
432 mm (17 inches)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.7 inches)
Height
210 mm (8.26 inches)
432 mm (17 inches)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.7 inches)
Height
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
432 mm (17 inches)
Tray 3 (500-sheet, optional)
Duplexing unit
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional source trays that are installed through
the Device Settings tab also appear here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been
installed on the device:
ENWW
●
Automatically select
●
Printer Auto Select
Paper/Quality tab features 219
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Source is
●
Manual Feed in Tray 1
●
Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)
●
Tray 2 (500 -sheet tray)
●
Tray 3 (optional 500-sheet tray)
The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP LaserJet P3005 uses
the source tray that supports the selected media size. If you select a source tray other than
Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray. For information
about media sources, see the Media attributes on page 344 section of this STR.
Type is
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports.
When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is
usually Plain.
No mechanism exists for manually adding custom media types through the driver. Custom types can
be added only by using the bidirectional communication mechanism, so they must already exist in the
device when the bidirectional query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, then the
information an updated list of media types is returned. If bidirectional communication is not enabled,
then the driver looks for custom media types that have been saved from a previous bidirectional
communication query, and uses those. Otherwise, no custom media types are available through the
driver.
The following standard types appear in the list:
●
Unspecified
●
Plain
●
Preprinted
●
Letterhead
●
Transparency
●
Prepunched
●
Labels
●
Bond
●
Recycled
●
Color
●
Light 60-75 g/m2 (16–20 lb)
●
Heavy 91-164 g/m2 (25–43 lb)
●
Cardstock 164-200 g/m2 (45–53 lb)
●
Rough
●
Vellum
●
Envelope
220 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. Before selecting a different
setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that's specified in the Source is:
setting.
If the print-driver setting is changed to a media type that is not currently loaded in the device, a controlpanel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or select another tray.
Use Different Paper/Covers
Print books that include different media types by using the Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected the following settings can appear in the
group box, along with the associated options:
●
Front Cover
●
First Page
●
Other Pages
●
Last Page
●
Back Cover
NOTE When you change the Source Is and Type is settings for any of the covers or pages,
the settings remain configured until you close the software program from which you are printing.
For example, if you select First Page and change the media source or type, and then select
Back Cover to change the media source or type, the check mark remains beside Front Cover
and the selected source and type settings remain in effect. The settings are cleared only when
you close the software program.
Front Cover
Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include
a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document.
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The following figure shows the Front Cover setting and options.
ENWW
Paper/Quality tab features 221
Figure 5-6 Front Cover options
The following are the Front Cover options:
●
Size is: drop-down menu
●
Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
●
Source is: drop-down menu
●
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select Front Cover, also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable
the setting. The Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears
next to the Front Cover option.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are
installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports.
NOTE Use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/Covers
options use the last Size is: setting selected in any one of the Use Different Paper/Covers
options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings remain configured
until you close the software program.
First Page
Use the First Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the first page of a document.
The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when Use Different Paper/
Covers check box is selected.
222 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 5-7 First Page options
The following are the First Page options:
●
Size is: drop-down menu
●
Source is: drop-down menu
●
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the
Device Settings tab also appear here.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports.
NOTE Use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/Covers
options use the last Size is: setting selected in any one of the Use Different Paper/Covers
options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings remain configured
until you close the software program.
Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media type or source for the other pages of the
document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when the Use
Different Paper/Covers is selected.
ENWW
Paper/Quality tab features 223
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Other Pages
Figure 5-8 Other Pages options
The following are the Other Pages options:
●
Size is: drop-down menu
●
Source is: drop-down menu
●
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings made in other Use Different Paper/Covers
options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the
Device Settings tab also appear here.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports.
NOTE Use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/Covers
options use the last Size is: setting is selected in any one of the Use Different Paper/Covers
options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings remain configured
until you close the software program.
Last Page
Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the last page of a
document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select
the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
224 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 5-9 Last Page options
The following are the Last Page options:
●
Size is: drop-down menu
●
Source is: drop-down menu
●
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports.
NOTE Use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/Covers
options use the last Size is: setting is selected in any one of the Use Different Paper/Covers
options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings remain configured
until you close the software program.
Back Cover
Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document, or to include
a back cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document.
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The following figure shows the Back Cover setting and options.
ENWW
Paper/Quality tab features 225
Figure 5-10 Back Cover options
The following are the Back Cover options:
●
Size is: drop-down menu
●
Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
●
Source is: drop-down menu
●
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select Back Cover, also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable
the setting. The Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears
next to the Back Cover option.
NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting
is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would
be printed in the middle of a booklet.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are
installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports.
NOTE Use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/Covers
options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
226 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver
tabs:
●
Paper/Quality
●
Effects
●
Finishing
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When the mouse cursor moves over the document preview image, the cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. Toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
Print Quality
The Print Quality group box contains the following controls:
●
Print Quality drop-down menu
●
EconoMode
Print Quality drop-down menu
The Print Quality drop-down menu contains the following controls in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver:
●
ProRes 1200 (170 lpi)
●
ProRes 1200 (141 lpi)
●
FastRes 1200
●
600 dpi
NOTE When a ProRes1200 setting is selected, documents are printed using a resolution of
1200 x 1200 dpi. This is the best print quality, but printing speed is slower than for documents
printed on the FastRes 1200, which uses a resolution of 1200 x 600 dpi.
The Print Quality drop-down menu contains the following controls in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver:
●
600 dpi
●
300 dpi
ENWW
●
ProRes 1200
●
FastRes 1200
●
600 dpi
●
300 dpi
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The Print Quality drop-down menu contains the following controls in the PS Emulation Unidriver:
Paper/Quality tab features 227
NOTE When a “ProRes” setting is selected, documents are printed using a resolution of 1200
x 1200 dpi. This is the best print quality, but printing speed is slower than for documents printed
on a “FastRes” setting. The “FastRes” setting emulates 1200-dpi printing, but places fewer dots
on the page and uses less toner, and printing speed is faster than for documents printed on a
“ProRes” setting.
EconoMode
Select the EconoMode check box to reduce the amount of toner on each printed page.
Selecting this option extends the life of the toner supply and reduces cost per page. However, it also
reduces print quality. The printed image is lighter, but it is adequate for printing drafts or proofs.
HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time when the
average toner coverage is significantly less than 5%, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the
mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade under these circumstances,
install a new print cartridge, even if toner remains in the cartridge.
NOTE The EconoMode setting might work only if a genuine HP print cartridge is installed.
HP print cartridges can measure the life of the mechanical parts and the quantity of toner. If
the EconoMode setting is used frequently, the mechanical parts can wear out before the supply
of toner is depleted, increasing the risk of toner leaking. Use genuine HP parts to avoid this
problem.
The EconoMode option can be activated from the printer control panel, from the Print Quality tab in
the software program properties, or from the Print Quality dialog box on the Paper-Quality tab in the
driver. If the EconoMode option is selected from the control panel, and if the printer has a genuine HP
cartridge, the ON setting overrides any setting made in the program or driver, as shown in the following
table.
Driver EconoMode setting
for print job
HP Cartridge
Device control panel
reports
EconoMode setting takes
effect
Selected
Yes
On
Yes
Selected
No
Off
No
Not selected
Yes
On
Yes
Not selected
No
Off
No
Selected
Yes
Off
Yes
Selected
No
Off
No
Not selected
Yes
Off
No
Not selected
No
Off
No
228 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Effects tab features
To gain access to the Effects tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click the Effects tab.
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure
shows the Effects tab.
ENWW
Effects tab features 229
Figure 5-11 Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
●
Print Task Quick Sets
●
Resizing Options
●
Document preview image
●
Watermarks
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet.
230 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Resizing Options
The Resizing Options group box contains the following controls:
●
Actual Size (default)
●
Print Document On setting
●
Scale to Fit option
●
% of Normal Size setting
Actual Size
Actual Size is the default setting. It prints the document without changing the document size.
Print Document On
Click the Print Document On option to format the document for one media size and then print the
document on a different media size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new media size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
●
The % of Normal Size value is not 100.
●
The Pages per Sheet value (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can
print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that the selected media source supports and any
custom sizes that have been created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is
automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want the document reduced or enlarged to fit
on the selected media.
Scale to Fit
Figure 5-12 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
ENWW
Effects tab features 231
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The Scale to Fit option box specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the
target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting
is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size
on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image
is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure shows preview
images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On check box selected
and the target size specified as Letter.
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size,
the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the
target page size.
% of Normal Size
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The default
setting in the entry box is 100% of normal size. Normal size is defined as the media size that is selected
within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does
not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and
sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those
limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another
control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upperleft corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the slider-bar indicator
is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the
arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider-bar indicator. Instead, either use the sliderbar indicator to approximate the value and then use the arrows to refine the value, or type the value into
the entry box.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
●
Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected
●
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver
tabs:
●
Paper/Quality
●
Effects
●
Finishing
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When the mouse cursor moves over the document preview image, the cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. Toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
Watermarks
Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create a custom watermark (text only), or edit an
existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
●
(none)
●
Confidential
232 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
●
Draft
●
SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system
plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any
watermark that is selected from this list appears in the preview image.
When the First Page Only check box is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the
document. The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears.
Figure 5-13 Watermark Details dialog box
Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box. However,
clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select
a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes
can be canceled.
ENWW
Effects tab features 233
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and
controlling the message angle and font attributes.
Current watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both the predefined
watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that have been created.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list
and in the Watermark Message edit box as "Untitled" until you name it. The name that you type in
the Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the Watermark
Details dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. A warning
appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel if you want to
keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark.
NOTE No more that 30 watermarks can exist in the Current Watermarks list at one time. When
the limit of 30 watermarks is reached, the New button is disabled.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If changing the
Watermark Message for that watermark in effect creates a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks
list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, several different
watermarks can contain the message DRAFT, each with a different typeface or font size. When this
occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2). When
a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the
number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on).
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the
page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects
only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available:
●
Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the
lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.
●
Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right
edges of the page.
●
Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the numeric
spin box to select the angle.
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style
of the font.
234 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:
●
Name
The Name drop-down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is
language-dependent.
●
Color
The Color drop-down menu contains only one option: Gray.
●
Shading
The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of
shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:
●
Lightest
●
Very Light (default)
●
Light
●
Medium Light
●
Medium
●
Medium Dark
●
Dark
●
Very Dark
●
Darkest
These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly
saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select
Darkest to produce a black watermark.
●
Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent.
●
Style
●
Regular
●
Bold
●
Italic
●
Bold Italic
The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.
Default watermark settings
The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks.
ENWW
Effects tab features 235
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The following settings are available:
Table 5-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks
Setting
New watermark
Preset watermark
Name
Arial
Varies by language
Color
Gray
Gray
Shading
Very Light
Very Light
Size
80
Varies by language
Style
Regular
Regular
Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box.
Clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select
a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes
can be canceled.
236 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Finishing tab features
To gain access to the Finishing tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows XP) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click the Finishing tab.
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following figure shows the
Finishing tab.
ENWW
Finishing tab features 237
Figure 5-14 Finishing tab
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
●
Print Task Quick Sets
●
Document options
●
Document preview image
●
Orientation
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet.
238 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Document options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
●
Correct Order for Rear Bin
●
Print on Both Sides
●
Flip Pages Up
●
Booklet layout
●
Pages per Sheet
●
Print Page Borders
●
Page Order
Correct Order for Rear Bin
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer has a door in the back that can be opened to make the paper go straight
out the back of the printer. Use this bin or slot to minimize curl and avoid jams with heavier paper, such
as cardstock. You may also need to feed the paper from the multipurpose tray for best results. The
paper is delivered printed side up. Use this feature to order your pages correctly for this bin or slot. If
you click this check box and also click Print on Both Sides, the printer prints the first side of each page,
pauses for you to reload the paper, and then prints the second side of each page. Other documents
cannot be printed while the printer is paused. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Print on Both Sides
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is
available when the following conditions exist:
●
ENWW
Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any media type except for the following types:
●
Labels
●
Transparency
●
Envelope
●
Cardstock
●
Heavy
Size is: is set to any media size except for the following sizes:
●
Statement
●
Envelope #10
●
Envelope DL
●
Envelope C5
●
Envelope B5
●
Envelope Monarch
HP unidrivers for
Windows
●
Finishing tab features 239
NOTE As a rule, extra memory is not needed on the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in order to print
on both sides. However, very complex double-sided print jobs might require additional memory.
Topics:
●
Automatically print on both sides
●
Manually print on both sides
Automatically print on both sides
The duplexing unit in the device prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both
Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP LaserJet P3005 printer comes with a duplexing unit
installed in the following models:
●
HP LaserJet P3005dn
●
HP LaserJet P3005x
These printer models support smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases printing
performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job from going
through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver.
All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed on
both sides (such as labels, transparencies, and envelopes) and the following media types:
●
Prepunched
●
Preprinted
●
Letterhead
When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer makes
adjustments to its print modes. Selecting a media type in effect instructs the printer to use a group of
settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to create an image that has the best possible quality
for that media. This group of settings is known as print mode. A different print mode is used with each
media type. Print-mode adjustments for the second side of a duplexed page are automatic.
Manually print on both sides
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media because
the HP LaserJet P3005 and HP LaserJet P3005n printer models do not have a duplexing unit installed.
AUse this setting on the other HP LaserJet P3005 printer models for media types that the automatic
duplexing unit does not support, such as cardstock and thick media.
Manually printing on the second side of a page is available in the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation
unidriver. If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the printer
automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing (Letter, A4,
Legal, and 8.5 x 13 only), and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not
supported.
To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, select
the Allow Manual Duplexing option on the Device Settings tab in the Properties print-driver tabs.
240 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
To print on both sides manually while using media that is supported for automatic duplexing, select and
apply the Not Installed setting on the Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) option on the Device
Settings tab.
Select the media type that corresponds to the media that you are using for the print job. The following
media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side:
●
Plain
●
Preprinted
●
Letterhead
●
Prepunched
●
Bond
●
Recycled
●
Color
●
Rough
Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but no change occurs to the print mode.
Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.
To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.
2.
Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print.
3.
When the control panel shows MANUALLY FEED, insert the stack of media (on which the evennumber pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure.
HP unidrivers for
Windows
1.
ENWW
Finishing tab features 241
Figure 5-15 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box
When you have completed the steps in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints on the back
side of the sheets in the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support
odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.
Flip Pages Up
Use the Flip Pages Up check box is used to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip
Pages Up check box is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected.
The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box, depending on the media
orientation selected on the Finishing tab.
Table 5-4 Page orientation
Orientation (Finishing tab)
Flip Pages Up selected
Flip Pages Up not selected
Portrait
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
Landscape
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding
along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the
lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on
the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
242 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
Booklet layout
The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices
that are based on the current media size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down menu
is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that
is set on the Paper/Quality tab:
●
Left Edge Binding
●
Right Edge Binding
Selecting Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding changes the document preview image to show
the location of the binding. If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it automatically
changes to 2 pages per sheet. Changing the Pages per Sheet setting manually to 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages
per sheet disables the booklet setting.
Topics:
●
Book and Booklet Printing
●
Print a booklet
Book and Booklet Printing
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages. It can have a different media type for the front
cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the settings on the Paper tab (available
when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box) to select the following printing options for
the book:
●
Front Cover
●
First Page
●
Other Pages
●
Last Page
●
Back Cover
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can then be folded into a
booklet that is half the size of the media. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing
tab to control booklet settings.
Print a booklet
ENWW
1.
Click File.
2.
Click Print.
3.
Click Properties.
4.
Click the Finishing tab.
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.
Finishing tab features 243
5.
Select the Print on Both Sides check box.
6.
In the Booklet Layout drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want (for
example, Right Edge Binding).
7.
Click OK in the print driver.
8.
Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of media.
If you print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the sheet in
the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet drop-down menu provides six
settings:
●
1 page per sheet (this is the default)
●
2 pages per sheet
●
4 pages per sheet
●
6 pages per sheet
●
9 pages per sheet
●
16 pages per sheet
NOTE Selecting an option other than 1 page per sheet makes booklet printing unavailable.
Print Page Borders
Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page
Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the
borders of each logical page.
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
●
Right, then Down
●
Down, then Right
●
Left, then Down
●
Down, then Left
The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples
in the following figure.
244 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 5-16 Page-order preview images
●
2 pages per sheet
●
4 pages per sheet
●
6 pages per sheet
●
9 pages per sheet
●
16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver
tabs:
●
Paper/Quality
●
Effects
●
Finishing
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When the mouse moves cursor over the document preview image, the cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. Toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the way that media feeds
into the printer. Specify the orientation of the print job from the three available orientations are portrait,
landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.
NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page
orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.
●
Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.
●
Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.
●
Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is
rotated 180°. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.
Toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. Selecting
the Rotate by 180 degrees check box does not change the document preview image.
ENWW
Finishing tab features 245
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The Orientation group box contains three options:
Job Storage tab features
To gain access to the Job Storage tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click the Job Storage tab.
NOTE The Job Storage tab appears only when at least 80 MB of total memory is installed
and configured.
Use the job-storage feature to store print jobs in the HP LaserJet P3005 printer memory for printing at
a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if job-storage feature is enabled. To support
job-storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS)
documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory. Added
memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage features. A minimum total memory of
80 MB is required to use the job-storage features.
After additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the device.
If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature can be used to
update the drivers.
To configure the drivers manually after installing additional memory, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Device Settings tab.
7.
If additional memory has been installed, select Printer Memory: under Installable Options, and
then select either 96 MB, 128 MB, 160 MB, 192 MB, 256 MB, 288 MB, 320 MB, 384 MB,
or 512 MB, depending on the total amount of memory currently installed.
NOTE The HP LaserJet P3005 printer can be configured for a maximum of 320 MB.
8.
Click OK to make the job-storage features available.
246 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
NOTE The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if the job-storage feature is
enabled.
To disable the job-storage feature, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Device Settings tab.
7.
Select Job Storage.
8.
Select Disabled in the Change 'Job Storage' Setting dialog box that appears.
NOTE When the job-storage feature is disabled, the Job Storage driver tab is not visible.
If the job-storage feature is enabled (with at least 80 MB of total memory), three Job Storage Mode
settings are available on the Job Storage tab:
●
Off
●
Proof and Hold
●
Private Job
Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is
installed:
●
Quick Copy
●
Stored Job
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The following figure shows the Job Storage tab.
ENWW
Job Storage tab features 247
Figure 5-17 Job Storage tab
NOTE This section also contains information about using the job-storage feature when printing.
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
●
Print Task Quick Sets
●
Status group box
●
Job Storage Mode
●
Quick Copy
●
Stored Job
●
Require PIN
●
Job Notification Options
248 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
●
User Name
●
Job Name
●
Using job-storage features when printing
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet.
Status group box
The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of
a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet P3005 printer to store documents at the device
and then control their printing at the device control panel.
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options:
●
Off
●
Proof and Hold
●
Private Job
Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is
installed:
●
Quick Copy
●
Stored Job
Topics:
●
Off
●
Proof and Hold
●
Private Job
Off
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, the job-storage feature must be enabled.
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing
you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the
ENWW
Job Storage tab features 249
HP unidrivers for
Windows
When selected, this option turns the job-storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print
job will not be stored in the device.
print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in
the device at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the device. If more
copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-andhold job to the device with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and
you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold
jobs are deleted if you turn off the device.
NOTE The device configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the device control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the
default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held
document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already
stored on the device memory will overwrite the existing document.
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, the job-storage feature must be enabled.
When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the device, but is not printed until you request the
job at the device control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can be
printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is
immediately deleted from the device. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential
documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you
type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. If you type more than four characters, the
characters past the fourth are truncated. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string,
but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits.
The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the device. If more copies are
needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that has
the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original
job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if
you turn off the device.
Quick Copy
To use the Quick Copy option, a hard disk must be installed and Job Storage must be enabled.
When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the
device, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the device control panel. The number
of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the device is set by using the device control panel.
NOTE The device configuration can bet set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the device control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the
default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held
document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the device.
Stored Job
To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed and Job Storage must be enabled.
250 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the device hard disk without printing it. The
print job is stored in the device as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the
device hard disk, you can print the job at the device control panel.
The job remains stored in the device until it is deleted. Stored jobs remain on the device hard disk when
the device is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Use a private stored job
to send a print job directly to the device, which can then be printed only after you type a PIN at the device
control panel. (You can set the PIN in the PIN group box.) After the job is printed, the job remains in the
device and can be printed again at the device control panel. The private mode is initiated by selecting
the Require PIN to Print check box. In this mode, a PIN that is typed at the device control panel is
required in order to release the job.
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you
select Stored Job. If you select the Require PIN to Print box, you must type a PIN to make the stored
job private.
NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job (see above). Private jobs are deleted
from the device after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the device after printing
but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed.
Require PIN
Require PIN is available when Stored Job is selected. Select the PIN to Print box, then type a 4-digit
PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the device, where you must enter the 4-digit
PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job.
The PIN to Print box is selected, but not available, when Private Job is selected. Type a 4-digit PIN
number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the device, where you must type the 4-digit PIN
on the control panel to retrieve the stored job.
Job Notification Options
Clicking a Job Storage Mode selection causes the User Name and Job Name options to become
available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID
when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.
The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well
as the device name, port, and location.
User Name
ENWW
●
Windows User Name. This option associates your MS Windows user name with the stored print
job. The MS Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the Windows User
Name options.
●
Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click Custom,
the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain no more than
16 characters, and is limited to A through Z and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the
device control-panel display. If you try to type a lowercase character, it automatically shifts to
uppercase. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126
Job Storage tab features 251
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the device control panel. The following are the
User Name settings:
characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow
it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.
Job Name
Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the device control panel. The following
are the Job Name settings:
●
<Automatic> This option, which is the default selection, automatically generates the job name that
is associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the
print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. The
file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program
name or a time stamp is used for the job name.
●
Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. In those languages for which
<Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string
of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating
system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the device control-panel display.
The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z (uppercase
or lowercase) and 0 through 9 so that the name can appear on the device control-panel display. If you
try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is
removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16
characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.
When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the
Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with <Automatic>. The
acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be
of a length and type that can appear on the device control-panel display.
If Job Name Exists. When you store a print job, you can create a print-job name or the device software
can assign one automatically. If a print job with the same name already exists, the new print job will
overwrite the existing print job. To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job
because both have the same name, select Use Job Name + (1-999). After you create the print job name,
or when one is created automatically, the device software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the
end of the print job name to make the name unique. Select Replace Existing File if you always want
the device software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name.
Using job-storage features when printing
To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1.
Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using
job-storage features.
2.
Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3.
Click the Job Storage tab.
4.
Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any
required fields.
5.
Click OK.
252 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Topics:
●
Releasing a job-storage print job
●
Deleting a job-storage print job
Releasing a job-storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the
device control panel.
1.
Press theMenu button to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up arrow) or (the down arrow) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device
(select).
control panel, and then press
3.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to your user name, and then press
4.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to the job name, and then press
5.
Press (up) or
(select).
6.
Press
7.
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press (up) or (down) to select the first digit of the PIN,
(select). The number in the device control-panel display changes to an asterisk.
and then press
Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
(select).
(select).
(down) until PRINT is highlighted on the device control panel, and then press
(select).
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.
8.
Press
9.
Press
(up) or
(down) to select the number of copies to print.
(select) to print the job.
Deleting a job-storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the device memory. You can do this from the device
control panel.
ENWW
1.
Press theMenu button to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up arrow) or (the down arrow) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device
(select).
control panel, and then press
3.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to your user name, and then press
4.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to the job name, and then press
5.
Press (up) or
(select).
6.
Press
7.
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press (up) or (down) to select the first digit of the PIN,
(select). The number in the device control-panel display changes to an asterisk.
and then press
Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
(select).
(select).
(select).
Job Storage tab features 253
HP unidrivers for
Windows
(down) until DELETE is highlighted on the device control panel, and then press
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.
8.
Press
(select) to delete the job.
254 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Services tab features
To gain access to the Services tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click the Services tab.
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The Services tab is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-18 Services tab
ENWW
Services tab features 255
The Services tab contains the following features:
●
Internet Services
●
Device services
Internet Services
The Internet Services group box contains the Select a destination drop-down menu with the following
selections:
●
Online diagnostic tools. Open the HP Instant Support Web site to find interactive tools and
contacts for troubleshooting.
●
Support and troubleshooting. Open the product page for the HP Business Center.
●
Product manuals. Open a Web page to view or download HP LaserJet P3005 printer manuals.
●
Check for driver updates. Automatically check the print drivers to see whether the correct and
most up-to-date print drivers are installed.
●
Order supplies. Open the HP SureSupply Web page and shop online for HP LaserJet P3005
printer supplies.
●
Show me how. Connect to a Web page that provides step-by-step instructions for performing
specific tasks. The following information is available:
●
Clear jams
●
Load trays
●
Load special media
●
Print both sides
●
Supported paper
●
More Help
If the computer has Internet access, select any of these items and click Go! to open the corresponding
HP Web page.
Device services
Click the Device and Supplies status icon to open the Device Status screen of the HP EWS.
256 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Device Settings tab features
The Device Settings tab is in the Properties window for the print driver. To gain access to the Device
Settings tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Device Settings tab.
The Device Settings tab contains controls for media-handling devices and controls for managing the
HP LaserJet P3005 printer.
Figure 5-19 HP PCL 6 Unidriver Device Settings tab
The following figure shows the Device Settings tab for the PS Emulation Unidriver.
ENWW
Device Settings tab features 257
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Available options depend on the driver and the particular feature. The following figure shows the Device
Settings tab for the HP PCL 6 Unidriver.
Figure 5-20 PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab
The Device Settings tab contains the following controls:
●
Form to Tray Assignment
●
Font Substitution Table
●
External Fonts
●
PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings
●
Installable Options
Form to Tray Assignment
A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the media size in each input tray.
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports more than one source of media. Use this feature to assign a
form (which defines the media size and margins) to each media source. When a form is matched to a
source, select the form to print. The device prints from the tray to which that form is assigned.
Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the
media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that
are available in the media-size list on the Paper/Quality tab in the Printing Preferences driver tabs.
This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with media-mount messages
that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
258 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional accessory
trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options setting.
The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Paper/Quality tab.
Configuring the trays
1.
Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list.
2.
Use the drop-down menu to select the media size (or form) that is loaded in that tray.
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays.
4.
Click OK to enable the settings, or, if necessary, click Cancel to reconfigure all the trays and remove
the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper/Quality tab.
Font Substitution Table
Use the Font Substitution Table settings to install and remove external fonts for the device. External
fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Click the Font Substitution Table option to open a list of fonts, as show in the following figure. Use the
settings to change the TrueType-to-printer font mappings.
Figure 5-21 Font Substitution Table
ENWW
Device Settings tab features 259
External Fonts
NOTE The External Fonts option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and PCL unidrivers. It is not
available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Use the External Fonts option to install and remove external fonts for the device. External fonts can
be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Click the External Fonts option to make the Properties button available. Click Properties to open
the HP Font Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-22 HP Font Installer dialog box
Topics:
●
Installing external fonts
●
Removing external fonts
Installing external fonts
Follow these steps to install external fonts.
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the name of the device.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Device Settings tab.
7.
Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.
260 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
8.
Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears.
9.
Type the name and path of the font metric file in the Printer Font File Location text box, or
click Browse to locate the file on the computer. The font file names appear in the Font(s) to be
Added window.
10. Select the fonts to add, and then click Add. The fonts are installed and the file names appear in
the Installed Font(s) window.
11. Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.
Removing external fonts
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the name of the device.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Device Settings tab.
7.
Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.
8.
Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears. The external fonts that are installed
appear in the Installed Fonts window.
9.
Select the fonts to remove, and then click Remove. The fonts are removed.
10. Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.
PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings
ENWW
●
Available PostScript Memory
●
Output Protocol
●
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
●
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
●
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray
●
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray
●
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts
●
Job Timeout
●
Wait Timeout
●
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The following controls are available and appear only in the PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings
tab:
Device Settings tab features 261
●
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline
Available PostScript Memory
This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for changing
this value. The available postscript memory is a subset of the device total physical memory. It is usually
best to set the postscript memory to match the total RAM that appears on the configuration pages. To
print the configuration pages from the device control panel, follow these steps:
1.
Press theMenu button to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up arrow) or
(select).
3.
Press
4.
Press
(up) or
(the down arrow) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press
(down) to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
(select) to print the configuration pages.
Output Protocol
This control specifies the protocol that the device uses for print jobs. The following options are
available:
●
ASCII (default)
●
TBCP
●
Binary
Click ASCII to send data in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent through
any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.
Click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol) to send all data except special control characters
in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and
are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
When you click Binary, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The
binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data
in ASCII format.
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
This control specifies whether the device will be reset at the beginning of every postscript document.
The default setting is No. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the device to its default setting to ensure that previous
print jobs do not affect the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the device is
connected through a network. If the document fails to print when sent to a device connected through
parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes.
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
This control specifies whether the device is reset at the end of every postscript document. The default
setting is Yes. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the device to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are
not affected by the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the device is connected
through a network. If the document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change Yes to No.
262 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value (RGB) in text to the gray that the
PS Emulation Driver provides. The following settings are available:
●
Yes
●
No. This is the default setting.
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value (RGB) in graphics to the gray provided by
the PS Emulation Driver. The following settings are available:
●
Yes
●
No. This is the default setting.
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts
This control specifies whether to add the Euro symbol to the printer fonts. The following settings are
available:
●
Yes. This is the default setting.
●
No
Job Timeout
This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the device before
the device stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the device continues trying to
print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. Use the spin box to change this value to a maximum
of 32,767 seconds.
Wait Timeout
This control specifies how long the device waits to get more postscript information from the computer.
After the specified time passes, the device stops trying to print the document and prints an error
message. When printing a very complicated document, increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds,
the device waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds. Use the spin box to change this value
up to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the driver will download TrueType fonts
as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. Any font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an outline
(Type 1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send TrueType as
Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Document
ENWW
Device Settings tab features 263
HP unidrivers for
Windows
This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts
as outline (Type 1) fonts. Any font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type
3) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option on
the Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 100 pixel(s). Use the spin box to
change this value up to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Defaults. The default setting is 600 pixel(s). Use the spin box to change this value up to a maximum
of 32,767 pixels.
Installable Options
Topics:
●
Automatic Configuration
●
Tray 3
●
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
●
Allow Manual Duplexing
●
Printer Memory
●
Printer Hard Disk
●
Job storage
●
Mopier Mode
●
Mopier mode and collation
●
Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
●
JPEG Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
Automatic Configuration
Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the device. If
bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by selecting the
Update Now setting in the Automatic Configuration setting. The default setting is Off. After an
automatic configuration, the setting returns to Off after the changes are made.
If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now setting is
unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.
If you have more than one driver installed for the device (for example, the default HP PCL 6 Unidriver
and the HP PCL 5 Unidriver), the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which
it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default setting for the specific
device model.
Tray 3
This control specifies whether tray 3, an optional 500-sheet tray, is installed on the device. The default
setting is Not Installed.
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
The HP LaserJet P3005dn and the HP LaserJet P3005x printer models come with a duplex unit installed.
This setting is enabled (Installed) by default.
These printer models support smart duplexing. The device uses the smart duplexing feature to detect
information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if
printable information appears on the second side of the page.
264 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports smart duplexing. The device uses the smart duplexing feature
to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only runs the pages through the duplexing
unit if printable information appears on the second side of the page.
Allow Manual Duplexing
Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except
transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, reinsert the media stack into the input tray
to print the second side. The device pauses while the user makes this adjustment.
This setting is enabled by default.
Printer Memory
This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the device. The driver
generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the device can accept (320
MB for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer). The driver can use this information to manage how the print
driver uses the device memory.
Printer Hard Disk
NOTE A printer hard disk is optional for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer. Do not select the
Installed setting unless a hard disk is installed.
Job storage
When Job Storage is enabled, the device can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print
jobs later at the control panel.
Mopier Mode
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated
copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces
network traffic by transmitting the job to the device once, and then storing it in memory. The remainder
of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be
created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using
a photocopier.
NOTE The Mopier Mode function is not available without a hard disk.
Use the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, or PS Emulation Unidriver to perform mopying in one
of two ways: either through the software or through the device hardware. When the mopier is enabled,
mopying takes place through the device hardware by default. One copy of a multiple-page print job is
transmitted once through the network to the device, together with a printer job language (PJL) command
directing the device to make the specified number of copies.
When the mopier is disabled, mopying is not necessarily disabled. The driver can perform mopying
through the software rather than the device hardware (the mopying path that is disabled when you
change the Mopy Mode setting to Disabled). However, sending a multiple-copy print job when the
mopier is disabled eliminates the advantage of transmitting the print job once, because the job is sent
through the network for each copy.
ENWW
Device Settings tab features 265
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The HP LaserJet P3005 supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier Mode: setting
on the Device Settings tab is Enabled.
Mopier mode and collation
Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. The print driver performs
mopying, sending original print jobs to the device. Either the print driver or the document software
program controls collation.
The mopying mode is selected by default in the driver, and can be disabled by changing the Mopier
Mode setting on the Device Settings tab to Disabled.
Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Collated check box on the
Advanced tab. Clear the check box, which is available only when the Copy Count option is set to more
than 1 copy, to allow the software program to control collation.
To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job, you must clear the Collated check box and make
sure that the software program collation feature is not selected.
The following table shows the relation between mopier mode settings and collation settings in the
software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings. The last column, "Expected
result", shows how a 3-page print job would appear.
Table 5-5 Driver mopier mode and collation settings
Mopier mode
Application collation
Driver collation
Expected result
Disabled
Not selected
Not selected
3 copies uncollated
Disabled
Not selected
Selected
3 copies uncollated
Disabled
Selected
Not selected
3 copies collated
Disabled
Selected
Selected
3 copies collated
Enabled
Not selected
Not selected
3 copies uncollated
Enabled
Not selected
Selected
3 copies uncollated
Enabled
Selected
Not selected
3 copies collated
Enabled
Selected
Selected
3 copies collated
Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
Postscript Passthrough is enabled by default, and must be enabled for most print jobs. Postscript
passthrough provides additional capabilities for some software programs when printing to a postscript
driver. Options such as Watermarks, n-up and Booklet Printing might not print correctly from some
software programs with Postscript Passthrough enabled, because such programs send postscript
information that the device cannot control. Other programs might print using these options without
problems. Select Disabled and print the document again if you encounter problems.
NOTE In some cases, disabling Postscript Passthrough can cause unexpected results within
a software program.
266 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
JPEG Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
The JPEG Passthrough setting contains the following options:
Disable. When this option is selected, images sent as JPEG are printed as bitmaps, resulting in
faster printing.
●
Enable. When this option is selected, images sent as JPEG are printed as JPEG (JPEG
passthrough).
●
Auto. When this option is selected, the printer connection type is automatically detected. For
network (TCP/IP) connections, JPEG passthrough is disabled. For parallel (LTP), DOT4, and USB
connections, JPEG passthrough is enabled.
HP unidrivers for
Windows
●
ENWW
Device Settings tab features 267
About tab features
The About tab is in the Properties for the print driver. To gain access to the print driver Properties,
click Start on the MS Window task bar, select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or
Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other
Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the About tab.
The About tab provides detailed information about the driver. It contains an overall build number (in
parentheses following the model name) together with specific information about each of the
components. The information varies according to the HP LaserJet P3005 model number, driver, date,
and versions. The About tab is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-23 About tab
268 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The About lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The About tab also indicates
whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver
was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.
ENWW
About tab features 269
270 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Macintosh
Macintosh
6
Introduction
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer comes with printing software and installers for Apple Computer, Inc.,
Macintosh operating systems.
Topics:
ENWW
●
Macintosh printing-system software
●
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions
●
Macintosh HP Printer Utility
●
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Introduction 271
Macintosh printing-system software
The HP LaserJet P3005 printing system for Macintosh is composed of an HP-created postscript printer
definition file (PPD) and a printer dialog extension (PDE) file that work together with the Macintosh OS
print system. These files are used by the Macintosh OS print system to determine default print settings
and to allow the user to select between the various print options and settings. These files are installed
by the provided HP LaserJet Installer. Additionally, an HP-supplied Macintosh device configuration utility
is provided, which allows the user to access the device embedded Web server (EWS) for additional
configuration and device status monitoring. The following are provided on the installation CD:
●
The HP LaserJet Installer for Macintosh
●
Install notes (Readme file), located in the PDF folder
The following major components are installed by the HP LaserJet Installer for Mac:
●
HP LaserJet P3005 PPD
●
HP LaserJet P3005 PDE
●
HP USB EWS Gateway
●
HP Device Configuration Utility
●
HP Uninstaller for the HP Device Configuration Utility and HP USB EWS Gateway
Topics:
●
Hardware requirements
●
Operating-system support
●
Availability
Hardware requirements
●
PowerPC G3, G4, G5 or Intel Core processor
●
256 MB RAM
●
32 MB of available hard-disk space
●
CD-ROM drive or internet connection
Operating-system support
●
Mac OS X v10.2.8, v10.3, v10.4 and later are supported.
●
Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X classic are not supported.
Availability
This STR provides information about the availability of the HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software
and related software and firmware. Printing-system software on a CD is available from HP fulfillment
centers.
Topics:
●
Printing-system software on the Web
272 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
In-box printing-system software CDs
Printing-system software on the Web
All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web.
Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The Web site offers an option
for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases.
NOTE This STR describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system software CD. This
STR does not describe any drivers that might be released by support personnel.
Topics:
●
Printing-system software
●
Software component availability
Printing-system software
The HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software is available for download at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/ljp3005
Software component availability
The following HP LaserJet software components are installed:
●
HP LaserJet P3005 PPD
●
HP LaserJet P3005 PDE
●
HP USB EWS Gateway
●
HP Device Configuration Utility
●
HP Uninstaller for the HP Device Configuration Utility and HP USB EWS Gateway
In-box printing-system software CDs
The software CD for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer contains the files for installing the printing-system
software on the computer.
Topics:
●
Macintosh partition
●
CD versions
Macintosh partition
The HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD is divided into two partitions, one for each of the
following operating systems:
ENWW
●
MS Windows
●
Macintosh
Macintosh printing-system software 273
Macintosh
●
The HP Macintosh printing-system software files all reside in the Macintosh partition. The HP LaserJet
Installer for Macintosh is at the root of the Macintosh CD Partition. The user manuals (in PDF format)
are grouped by language and are in the Manuals directory on the Macintosh partition of the printingsystem software CD.
CD versions
The software CD for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer contains the files for installing the printing-system
software on the computer.
The HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD is available in three versions, each of which
contains printing-system documentation in various languages, as follows:
●
●
●
CD 1 – Americas (part number Q7812-60111):
●
AR = Arabic
●
DE = German (Deutsch)
●
EN = English
●
ES = Spanish (Español)
●
FR = French (Français)
●
EL = Greek
●
IT = Italian (Italiano)
●
NL = Dutch (Nederland)
●
PT = Brazilian Portuguese (Português)
CD 2 – Asia Pacific (part number Q7812-60112):
●
ZHCN = Simplified Chinese (Chi_Simp)
●
ZHTW = Traditional Chinese (Chi_Trad)
●
EN = English
●
KO = Korean
●
TH = Thai
CD 3 – Europe, Middle East, Africa (part number Q7812-60113):
●
CS = Czech (Cesky)
●
DA = Danish (Dansk)
●
EN = English
●
FI = Finnish (Suomi)
●
HE = Hebrew
●
HU = Hungarian (Magyar)
●
NO = Norwegian (Norsk)
274 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
ENWW
PL = Polish (Polski)
●
RU = Russian (Russ)
●
SV = Swedish (Svenska)
●
TR = Turkish (Turkçe)
Macintosh
●
Macintosh printing-system software 275
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer comes with software and installers for MS Windows and Apple
Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. This STR provides procedures for installing and removing the
HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software for Macintosh operating systems.
Topics:
●
Macintosh component descriptions
●
Install the Macintosh printing system
●
Uninstall the Macintosh printing system
Macintosh component descriptions
The device includes the following software for Macintosh computers:
●
HP LaserJet P3005 PPD
●
HP LaserJet P3005 PDE
●
HP USB EWS Gateway
●
HP Device Configuration Utility
●
HP Printer Utility
●
HP Uninstaller for the HP Device Configuration Utility and HP USB EWS Gateway
Topics:
●
HP LaserJet PPDs
●
PDEs
●
HP Embedded Web Server
●
Install notes (Readme file)
●
Online help
HP LaserJet PPDs
In Mac OS X V10.2.8 and later, the PPDs are installed in Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/
Resources:<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the appropriate localized folder.
The PPDs, in combination with the driver, provide access to the device configuration settings and
installable options. These settings are usually configured during the installation process by using Apple
Mac OS X tools such as Print Center, Printer Setup Utility, and Print & Fax. For more information,
see Table 6-1 Adding a device in Macintosh operating systems on page 278.
PDEs
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) are code plug-ins (for Mac OS X V10.2.8 and later only) that provide
access to device features, such as number of copies, duplexing, and quality settings.
276 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Mac OS X supports the HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS). Use the HP EWS to perform the following
tasks:
●
View the device status and change device settings.
●
View and change network settings for the device.
●
Print information pages for the device.
●
View the device event log.
The HP EWS is accessed by using a Web browser such as Safari. The HP USB EWS Gateway software
allows the Web browser access to the device if the device is connected using a USB cable. The HP EWS
can also by opened by choosing the Utility button in the Macintosh Print Center or Printer Setup Utility,
or through the HP Device Configuration utility.
Install notes (Readme file)
This text file contains information about basic device installation and OS support and is located in the
PDF folder on the installation CD.
Online help
The help system is in English only, and can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS Help
Center.
Install the Macintosh printing system
On a Macintosh computer, the installation procedures are basically the same for a network administrator,
a network client, and a single user. Install the software on any computer that has access rights to the
device. The computer user must also have administrative rights on the computer in order to install the
software.
Topics:
●
General installation for Macintosh operating systems
●
Detailed Mac OS X installation
●
Printer setup
General installation for Macintosh operating systems
1.
If you are connecting the device to a network, connect the network cable to the device network
port. If you are connecting the device to a computer using a USB cable, install the software
before connecting the USB cable.
2.
Insert the Macintosh printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the
HP LaserJet P3005 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the CD-ROM window.
3.
ENWW
Double-click the appropriate HP LaserJet v... .app icon.
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 277
Macintosh
HP Embedded Web Server
NOTE The Continue button appears only after you type the "admin" password in the
Authenticate dialog.
4.
The main Installer dialog appears. Click Install and follow the onscreen instructions to complete
the software installation.
NOTE When you are installing the printing-system software, be patient. The installer must
perform an initial search of the computer for up to 1 minute. During this time the installer
might appear to be stalled.
5.
When software installation is complete, click Quit.
6.
Continue with the steps for setting up a device.
The software program that you use to finish setting up the device varies by operating system. The
following table shows the print setup tools that are available.
Table 6-1 Adding a device in Macintosh operating systems
Operating System
Print Center
Printer Setup Utility
Print & Fax
Mac OS X V10.2.8
x
Mac OS X V10.3
x
x
Mac OS X V10.4
x
x
Detailed Mac OS X installation
Topics:
●
Main Install dialog sequence
Main Install dialog sequence
This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog-box sequence for the Easy
Install (the typical installation option).
NOTE If you are installing the device using a network connection, you can connect the device
to the network before installing the software, but if you are installing the device using a USB
connection, install the software before connecting the USB cable.
Insert the HP LaserJet P3005 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive.
If the CD screen does not open automatically when the CD is put into the CD-ROM drive, double-click
the HP LaserJet P3005 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder.
278 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-1 HP LaserJet P3005 printer CD-ROM icon
The HP LaserJet dialog opens.
Figure 6-2 HP LaserJet Software screen
In the HP LaserJet Software screen, double-click the HP LaserJet v6.2.0.247.app icon. This begins
the HP LaserJet P3005 printer installation process.
In the HP LaserJet Software screen, double-click the PDF folder to view the Install notes (Readme file).
The Authenticate dialog appears.
ENWW
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 279
Figure 6-3 Authenticate dialog
Type the correct “admin” name and password and click OK to continue. The installer introduction screen
appears.
Click Cancel to exit the installation.
Figure 6-4 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer Introduction screen
Click Continue. The Read Me dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
280 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-5 HP LaserJet Installer Read Me dialog
Click Print… to open the Page Setup dialog for the default device and print a copy of the readme file.
Click Save… to open the system Save dialog and save the readme file to disk.
Click Go Back to return to the previous screen.
Click Continue to continue the installation. The License dialog appears.
Figure 6-6 License dialog
ENWW
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 281
Click Print… to open the Page Setup dialog for the default device and print a copy of the license
agreement.
Click Save… to open the system Save dialog and save the license agreement to disk.
Click Go Back to return to the previous screen.
Read the software-license agreement and then click Continue to continue the installation. A dialog
appears, asking you to accept the license agreement, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-7 Agree dialog
Click Disagree to decline the agreement, end the installation process, and close the installer.
Click Agree to accept the agreement. The Easy Install dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-8 Easy Install dialog
The default option in the drop-down menu at the top of the screen is Easy Install. You can also
choose Custom Install in the same menu, as shown in the following figure.
282 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-9 HP LaserJet Installer dialog (custom install)
The Custom Install screen displays all of the options that are available on the printing-system software
CD. Use the check boxes on the list to install the components that you want to install.
The Configuration installation option installs the HP EWS Configuration Utility, which is used to access
the HP EWS program. For more information, see HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) on page 320.
The Print installation option installs the print-system files. The printing-system files are installed in the
System\Library folder on the Macintosh hard drive.
Click Go Back to return to the previous screen.
Click the ? icon to the right of each item in the list to open a screen that describes the component.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk. The Installing screen appears, as shown in
the following figure. If installed, the HP Device Configuration Utility is installed under the Application
directory in a directory labeled HP EWS Device Configuration. An uninstaller utility for the HP Device
Configuration Utility is also installed in this directory.
ENWW
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 283
Figure 6-10 Installing dialog
The Installing dialog shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the
installation.
Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process.
When installation is complete, the LaserJet ReadMe.rtf icon appears on the desktop.
The Finish Up dialog appears, stating that the installation was successful, as shown in the following
figure.
284 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-11 Finish Up dialog
Click Quit to exit the installer.
Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.
Printer setup
After installing the printing-system software in Macintosh operating systems, the device must be set up.
Topics:
●
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4 and later)
●
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3
●
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.2.8
●
Troubleshooting the printer setup
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4 and later)
Carry out these steps after the software installation is complete.
1.
ENWW
If you are installing the device using a USB connection, connect the USB cable between the
HP LaserJet P3005 printer and the computer. Turn on the device. If you are installing using a
network connection, verify that the network cable is connected to the device and the device is on.
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 285
2.
In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Printer Setup Utility. The
Printer List appears. It looks similar to the one shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-12 Printer List screen
You can also configure the device using the Print & Fax pane of System Preferences (from the
Apple menu, choose System Preferences..., then choose Print & Fax).
Figure 6-13 Print & Fax dialog
3.
If you are installing the device using a USB connection, verify that the device appears on the device
list. The Kind column in the device list, or the Kind field in the Print & Fax screen, should
display HP LaserJet P3005. If this is the case, the setup is complete.
If the device does not appear, or if the correct information does not appear in the Kind field, see
Troubleshooting the printer setup on page 297.
If you are installing the device using a network connection, continue with the following steps.
4.
Click Add in the Printer List (or the + button in the Print & Fax utility) to open the Printer
Browser screen.
286 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
You can use either Bonjour or IP Printing for the network connection.
NOTE Bonjour is the easiest method and is the best method to use if the device is installed
on your local network.
IP Printing must be used if you are installing the device on a different network.
If you are using Bonjour, carry out the following steps:
a.
Click the Default Browser tab.
Figure 6-14 Default Browser tab
b.
Choose the HP LaserJet P3005 from the list. The software verifies that the device is connected
to the network and the Print Using field is automatically populated with the correct PPD for
the device.
NOTE If you are on a network that has more than one HP LaserJet P3005, print a
configuration page and match the Bonjour Printer Name to the name on the list to
identify the device you are installing. (See Print a configuration page on page 350.)
ENWW
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 287
Macintosh
5.
NOTE If the HP LaserJet P3005 does not appear in the list, verify that the device is
on and connected to the network, then try turning the device off and then on again. If
the HP LaserJet P3005 Series PPD does not appear in the Print Using pull-down list,
turn the computer off and then on again, then restart the setup process. For more
troubleshooting information, see Troubleshooting the printer setup on page 297.
If you want to use the IP Printing method, carry out the following steps:
a.
Click the IP Printer tab.
Figure 6-15 Printer Browser – IP Printer tab
b.
Choose HP Jet Direct – Socket from the Protocol pull-down menu. This is the recommended
setting for HP devices.
c.
Print the configuration pages.
To print the configuration pages, follow these instructions.
i.
Press theMenu button to open the menus.
ii.
Press (the up arrow) or
(select).
288 Chapter 6 Macintosh
(the down arrow) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press
ENWW
6.
Press
iv.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
(select) to print the configuration pages.
d.
On the first configuration page, under IPv4, find the IP Address. Type this address into the
Address field on the add printer screen.
e.
The Name, Location, and Print Using information will automatically be filled in. If the
HP LaserJet P3005 Series PPD does not appear in the Print Using field, turn the computer
off and then on again and restart the setup process.
Click Add. The Installable Options screen appears.
Figure 6-16 Installable Options screen
ENWW
7.
A device hard disk is not installed by default. Do not change the Printer Hard Disk setting.
8.
If the device has an optional tray 3, change the appropriate setting for the tray from Not
Installed to Installed.
9.
If the device has a duplex unit, select the Duplex Unit check box.
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 289
Macintosh
iii.
10. After selecting the installable options, click Continue. The device name appears in the Printer
List and the setup is complete.
Figure 6-17 Printer List screen
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3
1.
If you are installing the device using a USB connection, connect the USB cable between the
HP LaserJet P3005 printer and the computer. Turn on the device. If you are installing using a
network connection, verify that the network cable is connected to the device and the device is on.
290 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Printer Setup Utility.
Macintosh
2.
Figure 6-18 Printer List screen
You can also configure the device using the Print & Fax pane of System Preferences (from the
Apple menu, choose System Preferences..., then choose Print & Fax).
Figure 6-19 Print & Fax screen
3.
If you are installing the device using a USB connection, verify that the device appears on the device
list. (In the Print & Fax screen, click the Set Up Printers... button to see the device list.) The
Kind column in the device list same change as before should display HP LaserJet P3005
Series. If this is the case, the setup is complete.
If the device does not appear, or if the correct information does not appear in the Kind field, see
Troubleshooting the printer setup on page 297.
If you are installing the device using a network connection, continue with the following steps.
ENWW
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 291
4.
Click Add (or the Set Up Printers... button in the Print & Fax screen, and then Add) to open the
add printer screen.
Figure 6-20 Add printer screen
5.
Select the network connection protocol in the top pull-down menu. The two supported protocols
are Rendezvous and IP Printing.
NOTE Rendezvous is the easiest method and is the best method to use if the device is
installed on your local network.
IP Printing must be used if you are installing the device on a different network.
If you are using Rendezvous, carry out the following step:
Select the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in the Name list. The Printer Model and Model Name are
selected automatically.
NOTE If you are on a network that has more than one HP LaserJet P3005, print a
configuration page and match the Rendezvous Printer Name to the name on the list to
identify the device you are installing. (See Print a configuration page on page 350.)
NOTE If the HP LaserJet P3005 does not appear in the list, verify that the device is
powered on and connected to the network. If it still does not appear, try turning the device
off and then on again. Finally, turn the computer off and then on again, then restart the setup
process. For more troubleshooting information, see Troubleshooting the printer setup
on page 297.
292 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
If you are using IP Printing, carry out the following steps:
a.
Choose Socket/HP Jet Direct from the Printer Type pull-down menu. This is the
recommended setting for HP devices.
b.
Print the device configuration pages.
To print the configuration pages, follow these instructions.
i.
Press theMenu button to open the menus.
ii.
Press (the up arrow) or
(select).
iii.
Press
iv.
Press
(up) or
(the down arrow) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press
(down) to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
(select) to print the configuration pages.
c.
On the first configuration page, under IPv4, find the IP Address. Type this address into the
Printer Address field on the add printer screen.
d.
Select the Printer Model and select HP LaserJet P3005 in the Model Name list. If the
HP LaserJet P3005 Series PPD does not appear in the Model Name list, turn the computer
off and then on again and restart the setup process.
6.
Click Add. The HP LaserJet P3005 appears in the Printer List.
7.
To configure installable options such as a duplexing unit or optional paper tray, click Show Info?
on the device list and choose Installable Options in the pull-down menu.
8.
In the Collation in Printer drop-down menu, select one of the following options, depending on the
device configuration:
9.
●
Yes – Total RAM > 96 MB or Hard Disk
●
No – Total RAM < 96 MB and No Hard Disk
If the device has the optional 500-sheet tray 3, select the appropriate tray.
10. If the device has a duplex unit (a standard feature on the HP LaserJet P3005dn and
HP LaserJet P3005x models), select the Duplex Unit check box.
11. Click Apply Changes, and then close the Printer List dialog.
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.2.8
1.
ENWW
If you are installing the device using a USB connection, connect the USB cable between the
HP LaserJet P3005 printer and the computer. Turn on the device. If you are installing using a
network connection, verify that the network cable is connected to the device and the device is on.
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 293
Macintosh
NOTE If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a .PPD file, click
the Printer Model pull-down menu, select HP, and then select the .PPD file that you want
to add. If the HP LaserJet P3005 Series PPD does not appear in the Model Name list, turn
the computer off and then on again and restart the setup process.
2.
In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Print Center. The Printer
List screen appears.
Figure 6-21 Printer List screen
3.
If you are installing the device using a USB connection, verify that the device appears on the device
list. The Kind column in the device list should display HP LaserJet P3005. If this is the case, the
setup is complete.
NOTE If the Kind column does not appear in the device list, go to the View menu, and
choose Columns and then Kind.
If the device does not appear, or if the correct information does not appear in the Kind column,
see Troubleshooting the printer setup on page 297.
If you are installing the device using a network connection, continue with the following steps.
294 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Click Add to open the add printer screen.
Macintosh
4.
Figure 6-22 Add printer screen
5.
Choose the network connection protocol in the top drop-down menu. The two supported protocols
are Rendezvous and IP Printing.
If you are using Rendezvous, carry out the following step:
NOTE Rendezvous is the easiest method and is the best method to use if the device is
installed on your local network.
IP Printing must be used if you are installing the device on a different network.
If you are using Rendezvous, carry out the following step:
Select the HP LaserJet P3005 in the Name list. The Printer Model and Model Name are selected
automatically.
NOTE If you are on a network that has more than one HP LaserJet P3005, print a
configuration page and match the Rendezvous Printer Name to the name on the list to
identify the device you are installing. (See Print a configuration page on page 350.)
NOTE If the HP LaserJet P3005 does not appear in the list, verify that the device is
powered on and connected to the network. If it still does not appear, try turning the device
off and then on again. Finally, turn the computer off and then on again, then restart the setup
process. For more troubleshooting information, see Troubleshooting the printer setup
on page 297.
ENWW
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 295
NOTE If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a PPD file, click
the Printer Model drop-down menu, choose HP, and then choose the PPD file that you
want to add. If the HP LaserJet P3005 PPD does not appear in the Model Name list, turn
the computer off and then on again and restart the setup process.
If you are using IP Printing, carry out the following steps:
a.
Print out the device configuration pages.
To print the configuration pages, follow these instructions.
i.
Press theMenu button to open the menus.
ii.
Press (the up arrow) or
(select).
iii.
Press
iv.
Press
(up) or
(the down arrow) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press
(down) to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
(select) to print the configuration pages.
b.
On the first configuration page, under IPv4, find the IP Address. Type this address into the
Printer's Address field.
c.
Choose Printer Model and then choose the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in the Model Name
list.
6.
Click Add. The HP LaserJet P3005 appears in the Printer List.
7.
Select the HP LaserJet P3005, go to the Printers menu, and choose Show Info.
8.
Choose Installable Options from the top drop-down menu.
Figure 6-23 Printer Info — Installable Options dialog (sample)
296 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
In the Collation in Printer drop-down menu, choose one of the following options, depending on
the device configuration:
●
Yes – Total RAM > 80 MB or Hard Disk
●
No – Total RAM < 80 MB and No Hard Disk
10. If the device has the optional 250-sheet tray 3, choose Tray 3.
11. If the device has a duplex unit (a standard feature on the HP LaserJet P3005dn and
HP LaserJet P3005x models), select the Duplex Unit check box.
12. Click Apply Changes, and then close the Printer List dialog.
Troubleshooting the printer setup
If the printer does not appear in the printer list after an installation:
Carry out each one of these solutions in the order given, and restart the setup process after each one
to see if the issue has been resolved.
●
Verify that the USB or network cable is connected between the device and the computer and that
the device is powered on.
●
Try disconnecting and reconnecting the cable. If the computer has more than one USB port, try a
different USB port.
●
Turn the device off and then back on again.
●
Turn the computer off and then back on again.
●
If you are using a USB hub on the computer, disconnect the other USB devices from the hub.
If the wrong PPD appears in the Kind column in the printer list after an installation:
1.
Unplug the USB cable.
2.
Delete the print queue with the incorrect type (for example, Generic PostScript Printer).
3.
Reinstall the device software.
4.
Turn the computer off and then on again.
5.
Reconnect the USB cable from the computer to the device.
If these steps do not resolve the problem, delete the incorrect print queue, click Add, choose the device
from the list, and then browse manually for the HP LaserJet P3005 Series PPD.
Uninstall the Macintosh printing system
Follow these instructions to uninstall the Macintosh Printing System.
ENWW
1.
Browse to the folder containing the PPDs. In Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later, the PPDs are installed
in System/Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources:<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the
appropriate language.
2.
Choose the HP LaserJet P3005.gz file and drag it to Trash.
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 297
Macintosh
9.
3.
Empty the Trash.
4.
To uninstall the HP Device Configuration application and supporting files, go to Applications/HP
EWS Device Configuration and run the HP Uninstaller application.
Macintosh HP Printer Utility
The HP Printer Utility is a software program that gives you access to the device in Mac OS X.
The HP Printer Utility is available only in Mac OS X V10.2.8 and later. The HP Printer Utility does not
work when it is installed by using the AppleTalk protocol. Use IP, Bonjour or Rendezvous to enable the
HP Printer Utility.
Topics:
●
Access to the HP Printer Utility
●
Supplies Status
●
Device Information
●
File Upload
●
Update Firmware
●
Upload Fonts
●
HP Support
●
Duplex mode
●
Economode
●
Resolution
●
Trays Configuration
●
Lock Resources
●
Stored Jobs
●
E-mail Alerts
●
Network Settings
●
Bonjour Settings
●
Additional Settings
Access to the HP Printer Utility
In Mac OS X V10.3, follow these steps to gain access to the HP Printer Utility:
1.
Open the Finder.
2.
Find and double-click Printers. The Select Printer screen appears.
298 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
1.
Click Go.
2.
Click Utilities.
3.
Double-click HP Printer Selector. The Select Printer screen appears.
Figure 6-24 Select Printer screen – printer not selected
If the device does not appear, click More Printers…. The Connection Type screen appears, as shown
in the following figure.
ENWW
Macintosh HP Printer Utility 299
Macintosh
In Mac OS X V10.4, follow these steps to gain access to the HP Printer Utility:
Figure 6-25 Connection Type screen
Choose the connection type (USB, or TCP/IP). The device name appears under Model Name, as shown
in the preceding figure.
On the Connection Type screen, click Add. The Select Printer screen appears, showing device
information.
To open the HP Printer Utility directly, select the device and click Launch Utility.
Figure 6-26 Select Printer screen – printer selected
On the Select Printer screen, click Settings… to open the Device Status screen in the HP EWS.
300 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
If the HP Printer Utility software detects a condition that might need attention, the Printer Status screen
appears.
Figure 6-27 Printer Status screen
Address the condition and click OK to close the screen. The HP Printer Utility opens.
The following sections describe the screens and features that are available in the HP Printer Utility.
Supplies Status
The HP Printer Utility opens to the Current Supplies Levels screen.
Figure 6-28 Current Supplies Levels screen
ENWW
Macintosh HP Printer Utility 301
Macintosh
To open the HP Printer Utility, select the device and click Launch Utility.
Click Detailed Supplies Information… to open the Supplies Information screen.
Figure 6-29 Supplies Information screen
Use the scroll button to see information about the print cartridges.
If you have Internet access and click Shop for Supplies(see Figure 6-28 Current Supplies Levels
screen on page 301), a screen appears that explains the ordering process and describes the kind of
information that can be sent about your device to facilitate the ordering of supplies.
Figure 6-30 Transfer printer information to HP SureSUpply? screen
302 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
On the Transfer printer information to HP SureSUpply? page, click the Shared Information link to
open a screen that shows the HP privacy statement, as shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Macintosh HP Printer Utility 303
Macintosh
After either option is selected (Send or Don't Send), the Welcome to HP SureSupply Web page opens,
as shown in the following figure.
You can continue ordering supplies without sending device information by clicking the Don't Send link.
On the Supplies Status screen, click Media to see the status of the trays. The
Figure 6-31 Paper Status screen
You can also order supplies from this screen by clicking Shop for Supplies.
304 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Click Device Information in the menu on the left to find the device service ID (if assigned), the firmware
version, and the serial number.
Figure 6-32 Device Information screen
The device configuration page shows other settings; click View Configuration Page to see it.
Click the device icon in the lower-left corner to see information about another installed devices. This
action relaunches the HP Printer Utility so that you can select another device (see Figure 6-52 Device
Status screen on page 321).
File Upload
On the Configuration Settings menu, click File Upload to open the File Upload screen.
ENWW
Macintosh HP Printer Utility 305
Macintosh
Device Information
Figure 6-33 File Upload screen
The File Upload command is supported for file types that can be sent directly to the device without first
being opened through a software program. Some files can be uploaded to the device, but some cannot.
Documents in the following file formats can be printed by using a command line. That is, they do not
need to be opened in a software program that supports the file format (such as the Adobe Acrobat or
Acrobat Reader programs for .PDF files), but can be sent directly to the device by using the File
Upload command.
●
HP LaserJet printer command language (.PCL)
●
Portable document format (.PDF)
●
Postscript (.PS)
●
Text (.TXT)
On the File Upload screen, click Choose… to open a navigation screen. Locate the file you want to
upload and click Open.
On the File Upload screen, click Display response from the device to see whether the upload was
successful. If the file loads successfully, no message appears.
On the navigation screen, select the file and click Open. The file name appears in the File Upload
screen of the HP Printer Utility. Click Upload.
Update Firmware
Choose Update Firmware to locate a firmware upgrade file and install it on the device. The Update
Firmware screen is shown in the following figure.
306 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-34 Update Firmware screen
Click Choose to open a navigation screen. Browse to the firmware file and click Open. The Update
Firmware screen shows the file name. Click Update.
Upload Fonts
In the Information and Support menu, click Upload Fonts to gain access to fonts that you can upload
to the HP LaserJet P3005 printer.
Figure 6-35 Upload Fonts screen
The drop-down menu in the Upload Fonts pane has the following option:
●
Memory. Fonts that are available in the device memory are listed.
To remove a font, choose it and click Remove.
ENWW
Macintosh HP Printer Utility 307
To add a font, click Add... . The Upload Fonts screen appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-36 Upload Fonts dialog
To add a system font, click Add System Font... . The Add System Fonts screen appears, as shown in
the following figure.
Figure 6-37 Add System Fonts screen
To add a font, click Add to List. To close the screen, click Cancel.
To add a font file, click Add Font File in the Upload Fonts screen. A navigation screen opens. Navigate
to the font file and click Open. To close the screen, click Cancel.
HP Support
Click HP Support to open the HP Online Support screen.
308 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-38 HP Online Support screen
If you have Internet access, you can connect to HP support pages over the Web from this screen.
Click the Instant Support link to open the HP Instant Support Web page.
Figure 6-39 HP Instant Support link
Click the Hewlett-Packard Online Privacy Statement link to open a screen that shows the HP privacy
statement.
Click the Product Support link if you do not want to send information to HP but would like to receive
generic product support.
Click Continue to open a page where you can select the device and find further information about
product support.
Click Cancel to return to the HP Online Support screen in the HP Printer Utility.
Click Shop for Supplies to open the Order Supplies Web page (see Figure 6-30 Transfer printer
information to HP SureSUpply? screen on page 302).
ENWW
Macintosh HP Printer Utility 309
Click Online Registration to open the HP Registration Web page and register the device.
Figure 6-40 HP Registration Web page
Duplex mode
If a duplex unit is installed, the Configuration Settings menu includes a Duplex Mode setting. Click
this setting to open the Duplex Mode screen, as shown in the following figure.
310 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-41 Duplex Mode screen
1.
Choose Duplex Mode to open the Duplex Mode screen.
2.
Select the Enable Duplex Mode check box. This box is clear by default.
3.
Click Apply Now to enable printing on both sides of the page.
Economode
Under Printer Settings, choose the Economode and Toner Density menu item to open the
Economode screen, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-42 Economode & Toner Density screen
Selecting this option extends the life of the toner supply and reduces cost per page. However, it also
reduces print quality. The printed image is lighter, but it is adequate for printing drafts or proofs.
ENWW
Macintosh HP Printer Utility 311
HP does not recommend the full-time use of Economode. If Economode is used full-time when the
average toner coverage is significantly less than 5%, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the
mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade under these circumstances, you
must install a new print cartridge, even if toner remains in the cartridge.
NOTE The Turn Economode On setting might work only if a genuine HP print cartridge is
installed. HP print cartridges can measure the life of the mechanical parts as well as the quantity
of toner. If the Turn Economode On setting is used frequently, the mechanical parts can wear
out before the supply of toner is depleted, increasing the risk of toner leaking. Use genuine
HP parts to avoid this problem.
Change the settings in the Toner Density drop-down menu to save on toner use. The following settings
are available:
●
1
●
2
●
3
●
4
●
5
Lower settings result in slightly reduced printing quality, but save on toner usage.
Resolution
Under Printer Settings, choose Resolution to open the Default Resolution screen, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 6-43 Default Resolution screen
The following dots-per-inch (dpi) settings are available in the Default Resolution drop-down menu:
●
300
●
600
312 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
FASTRES 1200
●
PRORES 1200
NOTE When a PRORES1200 setting is selected, documents are printed using a resolution of
1200 x 1200 dpi. This is the best print quality, but printing speed is slower than for documents
printed on the FASTRES 1200 setting, which uses a resolution of 1200 x 600 dpi.
When the PRORES 1200 setting is selected, documents are printed using a resolution of 1200
x 1200 dpi. This is the best print quality, but printing speed is slower than for documents printed
on the FASTRES 1200 setting, which uses a resolution of 1200 x 600 dpi
The following settings are available in the Resolution Enhancement Technology (REt) drop-down
menu:
●
OFF
●
LIGHT
●
MEDIUM
●
DARK
Trays Configuration
Under Printer Settings, choose Trays Configuration to open the Trays Configuration screen, as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-44 Trays Configuration screen
ENWW
1.
Choose Trays Configuration to change media size and type for each of the trays installed on your
device.
2.
To change the media type, select a tray and then choose a different media type in the Default
Media Type drop-down menu.
Macintosh HP Printer Utility 313
Macintosh
●
3.
To change the media size, select a tray and then choose a different media size in the Default
Media Size drop-down menu.
4.
Click Apply Now to save the settings.
Lock Resources
Select Lock Resources to lock certain features of the HP LaserJet P3005 printer. The Lock
Resources screen is shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-45 Lock Resources screen
In Control Panel Access Level, choose one of the following settings:
●
No Locking provides full control of the device.
●
Minimal Locking provides control over paper-handling features.
●
Moderate Locking blocks changes in the device configuration.
●
Maximal Locking prevents users from changing device control-panel settings.
In the lower pane, select the Lock check box for the mass-storage unit that you want to lock.
WARNING! Click Initialize selected mass-storage unit only if you want to erase all data that
is currently stored on the hard drive. You cannot undo this action.
Stored Jobs
Choose Stored Jobs to change the Enable Job Storing setting. This setting is selected by default.
Click to clear the check box to disable the job-storing feature.
314 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-46 Enable Job Storing screen
You can type a PIN for your job in the Enter Secure Job PIN field.
Select the number of copies in the Copies to Print field.
Select a stored job and click Print to print the job.
Select a stored job and click Delete to delete the job.
Job-storage print jobs can also be released or deleted at the device control panel.
Topics:
●
Releasing a job-storage print job
●
Deleting a job-storage print job
Releasing a job-storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the
device control panel.
ENWW
1.
Press theMenu button to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up arrow) or (the down arrow) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device
(select).
control panel, and then press
3.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to your user name, and then press
4.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to the job name, and then press
5.
Press (up) or
(select).
6.
Press
(select).
(select).
(down) until PRINT is highlighted on the device control panel, and then press
(select).
Macintosh HP Printer Utility 315
7.
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press (up) or (down) to select the first digit of the PIN,
(select). The number in the device control-panel display changes to an asterisk.
and then press
Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.
8.
Press
9.
Press
(up) or
(down) to select the number of copies to print.
(select) to print the job.
Deleting a job-storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the device memory. You can do this from the device
control panel.
1.
Press theMenu button to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up arrow) or (the down arrow) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device
control panel, and then press
(select).
3.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to your user name, and then press
4.
Press
(up) or
(down) to scroll to the job name, and then press
5.
Press (up) or
(select).
6.
Press
7.
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press (up) or (down) to select the first digit of the PIN,
(select). The number in the device control-panel display changes to an asterisk.
and then press
Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
(select).
(select).
(down) until DELETE is highlighted on the device control panel, and then press
(select).
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.
8.
Press
(select) to delete the job.
E-mail Alerts
The E-mail Alerts screen is available if the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is installed over a network
connection. It is not available when the MFP is installed over a USB connection.
Choose E-mail Alerts to configure the HP LaserJet P3005 printer to send e-mail notifications to users.
If a user name and password have been set, you might need to obtain them from the IT administrator.
For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
316 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-47 E-mail Alerts screen
Click Open E-mail Alerts Settings to open the HP EWS. The HP EWS opens to the Alerts screen on
the Settings tab, where you can set notifications to manage the HP LaserJet P3005 printer.
Network Settings
The Network Settings screen is available if the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is installed over a network
connection. It is not available when the device is installed over a USB connection.
Figure 6-48 Network Settings screen
Choose Additional Network Settings to open the TCP/IP Settings page of the HP Embedded Web
Server Networking screen.
ENWW
Macintosh HP Printer Utility 317
Figure 6-49 Networking screen
Choose one of the following options in the Configuration drop-down menu:
●
DHCP
●
BootP
●
Manual
You can also use this screen to modify the following settings:
●
Host Name
●
IP Address
●
Subnet Mask
●
Default Gateway
To save new settings, click Apply Now.
To view and change other network settings, click Additional Network Settings.
If a user name and password have been set, you might need to obtain them from your IT administrator.
For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
The HP EWS opens to the Network Settings screen. For information about this screen, see Networking
tab on page 44 in this STR.
Bonjour Settings
The Bonjour Settings screen is available if the HP LaserJet P3005 is installed over a network
connection. It is not available when the MFP is installed over a USB connection.
Choose Bonjour Settings to open the Bonjour Settings screen. Bonjour is enabled by default.
318 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-50 Bonjour Settings screen
To disable Bonjour, click to clear the Enable Bonjour check box and then click Apply Now.
The following options are available in the The highest priority service drop-down menu:
●
Port 9100 (default)
●
IPP
●
LPD-RAW
●
LPD-TEXT
●
LPD-AUTO
●
LPD-BINPS
●
LPD-Queue5
●
LPD-Queue6
●
LPD-Queue7
●
LPD-Queue8
●
LPD-Queue9
●
LPD-Queue10
After you select a new setting, click Apply Now to save it.
Additional Settings
Choose Additional Settings to gain access to the HP EWS.
ENWW
Macintosh HP Printer Utility 319
Figure 6-51 Additional Settings screen
To open the HP EWS, click Open Embedded Web Server.
For information about HP EWS settings, see HP Embedded Web Server on page 37 or consult the
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
HP EWS is embedded in the device firmware. It is a series of Web pages that provide access to additional
device status and configuration options.
Topics:
●
Access to the HP EWS
●
Information tab
●
Settings tab
●
Networking tab
Access to the HP EWS
Use any one of the following methods to gain access to the HP EWS:
Using the Mac OS Print Center, Printer Setup Utility, or Print & Fax screen:
1.
In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Printer Setup Utility or
the Print Center utility. You can also access the HP EWS using the Print & Fax pane of System
Preferences (from the Apple menu, choose System Preferences..., then choose Print & Fax).
2.
Select the HP LaserJet P3005, and then click Utility (Mac OS X V10.3 or later). The Web browser
opens and the Device Status screen appears. In the Print & Fax screen, select the
HP LaserJet P3005, click the Print Queue... button, then click Utility.
Using a Web browser:
320 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
1.
Macintosh
NOTE This method can only be used if the device is using a network connection.
On the device control panel, print a configuration page.
To print a configuration page, follow these instructions.
2.
a.
Press theMenu button to open the menus.
b.
Press (the up arrow) or
(select).
c.
Press
d.
Press
(up) or
(the down arrow) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press
(down) to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
(select) to print the configuration pages.
On the first configuration page, under Product Settings, find the IP Address. Type this address
into a Web browser such as Safari. The Device Status screen appears.
Using the HP Device Configuration application:
1.
In the Applications folder, open the HP EWS Device Configuration folder. Run the HP Device
Configuration application.
2.
Choose the HP LaserJet P3005 from the list of devices. The Web browser opens and the Device
Status screen appears.
Figure 6-52 Device Status screen
Click the Supplies Status link to open the Supplies Status screen.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 321
Click the Change Settings link to open the Configure Device screen on the Settings tab.
The following sections describe the screens and features that are available in the HP EWS.
Information tab
The Information tab allows you to access and print out detailed information regarding device and supply
status, device configuration, network configuration, and usage.
The Status tab contains the following pages:
●
Device Status
●
Configuration page
●
Supplies Status page
●
Event Log
●
Usage Page
●
Device Information
●
Control Panel Snapshot
●
Print
Device Status
The Device Status page shows device status messages from the device. The Device Status page also
displays some pertinent device information and device settings.
322 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-53 HP EWS – Device Status page
Configuration page
The Configuration Page displays the values of all of the settings available to be set in the device. The
contents of this screen are consistent with the configuration page generated by the firmware.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 323
Figure 6-54 HP EWS – Configuration Page screen
Supplies Status page
The Supplies Status page displays the status of all of the supplies used by the device, including the
black print cartridges.
324 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-55 HP EWS – Supplies Status page
Event Log
Use the Event Log screen to track the events that occur on the HP LaserJet P3005 printer.
Figure 6-56 HP EWS – Event Log screen
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 325
Usage Page
The Usage Page screen gives a page count for each size of media that has passed through the product,
as well as the number of duplexed pages. The total is calculated by multiplying the sum of the print count
values by the Units value.
The information on this screen can be used to determine how much toner or paper to keep on hand.
The Usage Page is shown in the following figures.
Figure 6-57 Usage Page screen (1 of 2)
326 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
The Device Information screen shows the following information:
●
Device name
●
Device location
●
Asset number
●
Company name
●
Contact person
●
Product name
●
Device model
●
Device serial number
The product name, device model, and device serial number are generated automatically. You can
configure the other information on this screen from the Device Information screen on the Settings tab.
Figure 6-58 HP EWS – Device Information screen
Control Panel Snapshot
The Control Panel Snapshot screen shows the device control-panel display as if you were standing
at the device. Because this view shows the device status, it can help you troubleshoot problems with
the device.
NOTE The appearance of the screen might vary, depending on your device.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 327
Macintosh
Device Information
Figure 6-59 HP EWS – Control Panel Snapshot screen
Print
NOTE The Print screen (and the Print menu on the left) is available only if it has been
configured to appear on the Security screen under the Settings tab. Use the Security screen
to disable the Print screen if you do not want it to appear for security reasons. For more
information, see Security on page 333.
Use the Print screen to print print-ready files or to update your device firmware remotely.
You can use the Print screen to print one file at a time from a device that supports the HP EWS. This
feature is especially useful if you are a mobile user, because you do not have to install the print driver
in order to print; you can print anywhere at any time.
You can print print-ready files, such as documents that have been generated by using a "print to file"
driver option. Print-ready files commonly have file name extensions such as .PS (postscript), .PDF
(Adobe Portable Document Format), and .PRN (Windows print-ready File).
You can also use the Print screen to update the devicefirmware. This feature is especially useful
because you do not have to install additional software in order to update the device firmware. When
updated firmware files are available for your device, you can download them your product support Web
site:
www.hp.com/support/ljp3005
The Print screen is shown in the following figure.
328 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-60 HP EWS – Print screen
Printing a file or updating firmware from the Print screen
Use the following procedure to print a file or update product firmware from the Print screen.
1.
Select a file that resides on your machine or on your network by clicking Browse to browse to a
file that you want to print.
2.
Click Apply.
Settings tab
The Settings tab allows you to view and change settings for the following features:
●
Configure Device
●
E-mail Server
●
Alerts
●
AutoSend
●
Security
●
Edit Other Links
●
Device Information
●
Language
●
Date & Time
●
Wake Time
Configure Device
You can use the Configure Device screen to print device information pages and configure the device
remotely.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 329
The menus on this screen are similar to the menus that are available at the device control panel. Some
of the device control-panel menus are not available from the HP EWS. See the documentation that came
with the device for more information about the different menus that your device supports.
The Configure Device screen is shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-61 HP EWS – Configure Device screen
Using the menus on the Configure Device screen
The following procedure is provided only as an example. Similar procedures can be used to set other
menu items.
Follow these steps to print a configuration page (example procedure).
1.
Click INFORMATION.
2.
Select the check box for the information page that you want to view or print, and then click
Apply.
E-mail Server
Use the E-mail Server screen to configure e-mail settings for outgoing e-mail. Use the settings on this
screen to send and receive e-mail messages, including product alerts. The E-mail Server screen is
shown in the following figure.
330 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-62 HP EWS – E-mail Server screen
Configuring outgoing e-mail
You must configure outgoing e-mail if you intend to use the Alerts or AutoSend features.
1.
Gather the following information. (Your organization's network or e-mail administrator typically
provides the information that is required to configure outgoing mail.)
●
The TCP/IP address of the simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) mail server on your network.
The EWS uses the SMTP server TCP/IP address to relay e-mail messages to other
computers.
●
The e-mail domain name suffix that is used to address e-mail messages within your
organization.
2.
Select the Enable Outgoing E-mail check box.
3.
Type the SMTP server TCP/IP address in the SMTP Server text box.
4.
Type the domain name in the Domain Name text box.
5.
Click Apply to save the changes.
Configuring the return e-mail address
When you configure the return e-mail address on the E-mail Server page, you are configuring the
identity of the product. For example, if you type anyone in the Username field and
your.company.com in the Domain Name field, all e-mails sent out by the product will come from
[email protected] In this example, [email protected] is the identity of the
product.
Alerts
From the Alerts screen, IT administrators can set up the product to send problem and status alerts to
anyone through e-mail messages. When this function is configured, alerts are automatically triggered
about supplies, paper-path status, and other service and advisory information. More than one individual
can receive alerts, with each person receiving only specific alerts. For example, an administrative
assistant might be responsible for ordering print cartridges or fixing jams, and could receive advanced
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 331
warning when toner is low or a jam occurs. Similarly, the long-life supplies might be handled by an
external service provider, who could receive alerts about performing product maintenance, loading the
front or rear stapler, and similar needs.
NOTE A user can create up to four different destination lists, with up to 20 recipients on each
list.
By selecting the Remove Control Panel Supplies Status Messages option (available on the Alerts setup screen that appears when you press the New Destination List button), you can suppress the
Cartridge low or Cartridge out supplies status messages on the control panel. The message is
suppressed at the control panel only if one or both of these alerts has first been selected to be received.
The Alerts screen is shown in the following figure.
NOTE In order for alerts to function, outgoing e-mail must be enabled. To enable outgoing mail,
see Configuring outgoing e-mail on page 331.
Figure 6-63 HP EWS – Alerts screen
For information about using the Alerts screen, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
AutoSend
Use the AutoSend screen to send product-configuration and supplies-usage information periodically to
e-mail destinations of your choice, such as service providers. This feature establishes a relationship
with Hewlett-Packard Company or another service provider to provide you with services that include,
but are not limited to, print-cartridge replacement, pay-per-page contracts, support agreements, and
usage tracking. A user can add up to twenty AutoSend destinations. The AutoSend screen is shown
in the following figure.
332 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh
Figure 6-64 HP EWS – AutoSend screen
Turn on the AutoSend feature
Use the following procedure to make the AutoSend feature available.
1.
Make outgoing e-mail functions available by following the instructions that are listed in this chapter.
(For more information, see E-mail Server on page 330.)
2.
Select the Enable AutoSend check box.
3.
Click an option to specify the interval at which you want the product to send the productconfiguration and supplies-usage information to the e-mail recipients (determined in the next step),
and then type the number of days, weeks, months, or pages printed.
4.
Configure up to 20 destinations using the format that appears on the screen.
5.
To send device configuration and supplies status information to HP, select the Send to HP check
box.
6.
Click Apply.
Security
The Security screen is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 333
Figure 6-65 HP EWS – Security screen
Edit Other Links
Use the Edit Other Links screen to add or customize up to five links to the Web sites of your choice
(see the following note). These links appear throughout the HP EWS screens in the Other Links box
beneath the left navigational bar. Three permanent links (hp instant support, Shop for Supplies,
and Product Support) have already been established. The Edit Other Links screen is shown in the
following figure.
Figure 6-66 HP EWS – Edit Other Links screen
334 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Use this procedure to add a link.
1.
Under Add Link, type the URL and the name of the link as you would like it to appear in the
HP EWS.
2.
Click Add Link.
Removing a link
Use this procedure to remove a link.
1.
Under User-defined Links, select the link or links that you would like to remove.
2.
Click Remove Selected Link.
Device Information
Use the Device Information screen to provide a name of your choice for the device, assign an asset
number, and configure the company name, the person to contact about the device, and the physical
location of the device. The device TCP/IP address, device name, device model, and serial number are
also available on this screen.
Figure 6-67 HP EWS – Device Information screen
If you make any changes on the Device Information screen, click Apply to save the changes.
The information that is typed here appears on the Device Information screen that can be opened from
the Information tab. It also appears in e-mail messages that are sent from the product. This might be
useful if you need to locate the product to replace supplies or fix a problem.
Language
Use the Language screen to select the language in which the HP EWS screens appear. The Language
screen is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 335
Macintosh
Adding a link
Figure 6-68 HP EWS – Language screen
CAUTION Selecting View Pages in Device Language or Select A Language changes the
language for everyone who uses the HP EWS.
The default language is the language that the Web browser is currently using. If your browser and control
panel both use a language that is not available for the HP EWS, English is selected as the default. If
you make any changes on the Language screen, click Apply to save your changes.
Date & Time
Use the Date & Time screen to update the product time. The Date & Time screen is shown in the
following figure.
Figure 6-69 HP EWS – Date & Time screen
336 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Use the Date/Time Format screen to select the formats you prefer for displaying the date (under Date
Format) and time (under Time Format). The following figure shows the Date/Time Format screen.
Figure 6-70 HP EWS – Date/Time Format screen
Clock Drift Correction
Use the Date & Time - clock drift correction screen to enable clock drift correction. The following
figure shows the screen.
Figure 6-71 HP EWS – Date & Time - clock drift correction screen
To configure a network time server to correct the product clock drift, use the following procedure.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 337
Macintosh
Date/Time Format
NOTE This process keeps the clock from drifting (losing or gaining time), but does not
synchronize the clock with the network time server clock.
1.
Select the Enable Clock Drift Correction check box.
2.
In the Network Time Server Address field, type the TCP/IP address of the clock which you want
to use for correction of the product clock drift.
NOTE Alternatively, you can click the Automatically Find Server button to find a time
server on your network and automatically fill in this field.
3.
In the Local Port to Receive Time from Server field, type the number of the appropriate port.
4.
Click OK.
NOTE Use this screen only to configure the time server for clock drift correction, not to set the
clock. To set the clock, use the main Date & Time screen. For further information, see Date &
Time on page 336.
Wake Time
An IT administrator can use the Wake Time screen to schedule product wakeups on a daily basis. For
example, the product can be set to wake up at 07:30, so the product has finished initializing and
calibrating and is ready to use by 08:00. The administrator sets only one wakeup setting per day;
however, each day can have a different wakeup setting. Additionally, to save energy, the sleep delay
can be set to turn the product off after a specific period of inactivity.
Figure 6-72 HP EWS – Wake Time screen
Networking tab
The HP EWS Networking tab is shown in the following figure.
338 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Figure 6-73 HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings screen
The menu on the left side of the screen contains other networking options under three categories:
●
Configuration
●
Security section
●
Diagnostics section
Configuration
●
ENWW
Network Setting. From the Networking screen, enable and configure the following network
protocols:
●
TCP/IP settings
●
Network settings:
●
Internetwork packet exchange/Sequenced packet exchange (IPX/SPX)
●
Data link control/logical link control (DLC/LLC)
●
Simple network management protocol (SNMP)
●
Other Settings
●
Privacy Settings
●
Select Language
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 339
Macintosh
NOTE Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see
the HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide.
Security section
●
Settings
●
Authorization
●
Mgmt. Protocols
●
802.1x authentication
●
Firewall
Diagnostics section
●
Network Statistics
●
Protocol Info
●
Configuration Page
Refer to the HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide on the printing-system CD for more information.
340 Chapter 6 Macintosh
ENWW
Engineering Details
Engineering Details
7
Introduction
Topics:
ENWW
●
File to E-mail utility
●
Media attributes
●
Remote firmware updates
●
Printing print-ready documents
Introduction 341
File to E-mail utility
The File to E-mail utility is a standalone Microsoft Foundation Class (MFC) program that reads an .INI
file to detect where the HP LaserJet device software is installed. The program then attaches relevant
log or history files to an e-mail that can be sent to HP Customer Support to assist troubleshooting. The
utility runs on the computer, but does not interact with your HP LaserJet device.
The tool is included on the installer CD, but is not copied to the computer during the software installation.
HP Customer Support can also send the utility to you through e-mail or by posting it to an HP web page.
The tool is compatible with Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP.
The File to E-mail utility runs with any MAPI-compliant e-mail programs. It does not run with Web-based
e-mail services such as Yahoo, Hotmail, or AOL.
Depending on the speed of the computer, it might take several seconds for the utility to gather the log
files and attach them to an e-mail message.
The File to E-mail utility consists of two files that are located on the HP LaserJet P3005 software CD:
●
<CD-ROM drive>Temp\FiletoEmail\FiletoEmail.exe
●
<CD-ROM drive>Temp\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.ini
To use the File to E-mail utility, copy these files to the desktop, and then double-click
FileToEmail.exe to open the utility. The utility generates files, opens an e-mail message, and attaches
the files so that you can send them to an IT administrator, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE The figure is provided as an example only. The actual files attached will vary, depending
on your device.
342 Chapter 7 Engineering Details
ENWW
Engineering Details
Figure 7-1 File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached
If the File to E-mail utility fails for any reason (for instance, if you cancel the new message), all the files
are copied to a folder on the desktop that is named CCC, possibly with strings of 0's attached to the
end. You can zip these files and e-mail them separately.
ENWW
File to E-mail utility 343
Media attributes
Topics:
●
Media sources and destinations
●
Media-source commands
●
Driver-supported media sizes
●
Driver-supported media types
●
Custom paper sizes
●
Media-type commands
Media sources and destinations
The following table indicates the standard and optional media sources and destinations for the
HP LaserJet P3005 printer.
Table 7-1 HP LaserJet P3005 media sources and destinations
Media sources
Media destinations
100-sheet multipurpose tray (tray 1)
Standard
500-sheet paper tray (tray 2)
Standard
500-sheet paper tray (tray 3)
Optional; standard on the
HP LaserJet P3005x printer model
Standard 250-sheet top bin
Standard
Media-source commands
The PCL 6 attribute for paper source is ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string"
MediaSource. See the following table for values of #. For example, "ubyte 4 MediaSource" is the
command for tray 2.
The PCL 5 escape sequence for media source is Esc&l#H (the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the
numeral "1"). See the following table for values of #. For example, Esc&l1H is the command fortray 2.
Table 7-2 Media-source commands
Media source
PCL 6
PCL 5
PostScript
ubyte # MediaSource
or ubyte_array
"string"
MediaSource1
Esc&l#H
/MediaPosition # /
ManualFeed true |
false or null
Manual feed in tray 1
2
2
3 true
Tray 1 (100-sheet)
3
4
3 false
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
4
1
0 false
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
5
5
1 false
344 Chapter 7 Engineering Details
ENWW
Media source
1
PCL 6
PCL 5
PostScript
ubyte # MediaSource
or ubyte_array
"string"
MediaSource1
Esc&l#H
/MediaPosition # /
ManualFeed true |
false or null
Automatically Select (HP
unidrivers)
NA
NA
NA
Automatically Select (HP
traditional PCL drivers) or
Printer Auto Select (HP
unidrivers)
7
1
null false
For the string value, you must use include the quotation marks around the variable. For example, ubyte_array "TRAY2"
MediaSource is the PCL 6 command for tray 2.
Driver-supported media sizes
The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the Size Is: drop-down
menu on the Paper tab. The list order can vary, depending on the device and operating system. The
list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes from other drivers.
Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes
Paper sizes1
Width
Height
PCL 6 2
Letter
216 mm
279 mm
"LETTER"
(8.5 inches)
(11.0 inches)
279 mm
216 mm
(11 inches)
8.0 inches
140 mm
216 mm
(5.5 inches)
(8.5 inches)
269 mm
391 mm
(10.6 inches)
(15.4 inches)
259 mm
368 mm
(10.2 inches)
(14.5 inches)
273 mm
394 mm
(10.75 inches)
(15.5 inches)
184 mm
260 mm
(7.24 inches)
10.24 inches)
195 mm
197 mm
(7.68 inches)
(7.75 inches)
273 mm
197 mm
(10.75 inches)
(7.75 inches)
Letter-R
Statement
8K
8K
8K
16K
16K
16K
ENWW
"STATEMENT"
“ROC8K”
"ROC16K"
Media attributes 345
Engineering Details
Table 7-2 Media-source commands (continued)
Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes (continued)
Paper sizes1
Width
Height
PCL 6 2
8.5 x 13
216 mm
330 mm
"8.5x13"
(8.5 inches)
(13 inches)
305 mm
457 mm
12.0 inches)
(18.0 inches)
297 mm
419 mm
(11.7 inches)
(16.5 inches)
211 mm
297 mm
(8.3 inches)
(11.69 inches)
147 mm
211 mm
(5.8 inches)
(8.3 inches)
105 mm
148 mm
(4.14 inches)
(5.83 inches)
257 mm
363 mm
(10.1 inches)
(14.3 inches)
183 mm
257 mm
(7.2 inches)
(10.1 inches)
128 mm
182 mm
(5.1 inches)
(7.2 inches)
305 mm
430 mm
(12.0 inches)
(16.93 inches)
100 mm
148 mm
(3.94 inches)
(5.83 inches)
100 mm
200 mm
(3.94 inches)
(7.87 inches)
148 mm
200 mm
(5.83 inches)
(7.87 inches)
105 mm
241 mm
(4.13 inches)
(9.5 inches)
176 mm
250 mm
(6.93 inches)
(9.84 inches)
162 mm
229 mm
(6.38 inches)
(9.02 inches)
110 mm
220 mm
(4.33 inches)
(8.66 inches)
12 x 18
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4 (JIS)
B5 (JIS)
B6
RA3
S Postcard (JIS)
D Postscard (JIS)
D Postscard (JIS)
Envelope #10
Envelope B5
Envelope C5
Envelope DL
346 Chapter 7 Engineering Details
“12x18”
“A3”
"A4"
"A5"
“A6”
“JIS B4”
"JIS B5"
“B6”
“RA3”
"JPOSTD"
“Double Postcard (JIS)”
"COM10"
"B5 ENV"
"C5"
"DL"
ENWW
Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes (continued)
Paper sizes1
Width
Height
PCL 6 2
Envelope Monarch
99 mm
190 mm
"MONARCH"
(3.88 inches)
(7.5 inches)
185 mm
267 mm
(7.3 inches)
(10.5 inches)
216 mm
330 mm
(8.5 inches)
(13.0 inches)
216 mm
356 mm
(8.5 inches)
(14.0 inches)
Minimum:
Minimum:
127 mm
76.2 mm
(5.0 inches)
(3.0 inches)
Maximum:
Maximum:
215.9 mm
355.6 mm
(8.5 inches)
(14.0 inches)
Executive (JIS)
Legal
Custom
"EXEC"
"JISEXEC"
Engineering Details
Executive
"LEGAL"
3
1
For all paper sizes, the PCL 6 margins are 100 dots, at 600 dots per inch.
2
The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte_array “String” MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for "String."
3
For custom sizes, the PCL 6 Driver specifies actual dimensions, for example, for 8 by 9 inch custom size, "real32_xy 8.0 9.0
CustomMediaSize ubyte eInch CustomMediaSizeUnits."
Driver-supported media types
The following table shows the media types that the HP LaserJet P3005 print-drivers support.
Table 7-4 Supported input media types
ENWW
Media types
(command string)
Tray 1/top
bin/stacker
bin
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Trays 3 (500sheet)
Duplexing unit
Manual duplexing
Unspecified
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Plain (60–199 g/m2, or
16–53 lb)
Y
N
N
N
Y
Plain (60–120 g/m2, or
16–32 lb)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Preprinted (60–120 g/
m2, or 16–32 lb)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Letterhead (60–120 g/
m2, or 16–32 lb)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Transparency (0.10–
Y
0.14 mm thick, or 4.7 to
5 mils thick)
Y
Y
N
N
Media attributes 347
Table 7-4 Supported input media types (continued)
1
Media types
(command string)
Tray 1/top
bin/stacker
bin
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Trays 3 (500sheet)
Duplexing unit
Manual duplexing
Prepunched (60–
120 g/m2, or 16–32 lb)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Postcard (135–176 g/
m2, or 36–47 lb)
Y
N
N
N
Y
Labels (0.10–0.14 mm
thick, or 4.7 to 5 mils
thick)
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Bond (60–120 g/m2, or
16–32 lb)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Recycled (60–120 g/
m2, or 16–32 lb)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Color (60–120 g/m2, or
16–32 lb)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Light (60–75 g/m2, or
16–20 lb)
Y
N
N
N
Y
Cardstock (135–176 g/
m2, or 36–47 lb)
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Rough
Y
N
N
N
N
Tough Paper1 (Glossy
Film) (0.10–0.14 mm
thick, or 4.7 to 5 mils
thick)
Y
N
N
N
N
Envelope (75–90 g/m2, Y
or 20–24 lb)
N
N
N
N
Vellum (60–120 g/m2,
or 16–32 lb)
Y
N
N
N
N
Custom (60–199 g/m2,
or 16–53 lb)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Use only HP LaserJet glossy media. Using HP Inkjet glossy media can cause permanent damage to the printer.
Custom paper sizes
The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer.
Table 7-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray
Dimensions
Minimum
Maximum
Tray 1 (100-sheet
multipurpose)
Width
76 mm (3.0 inches)
312 mm (12.28 inches)
Height
127 mm (5.0 inches)
470 mm (18.5 inches)
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.7 inches)
Height
210 mm (8.26 inches)
432 mm (17 inches)
348 Chapter 7 Engineering Details
ENWW
Table 7-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes (continued)
Tray
Dimensions
Minimum
Maximum
Tray 3 (500-sheet, optional)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.7 inches)
Height
210 mm (8.26 inches)
432 mm (17 inches)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.7 inches)
Height
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
432 mm (17 inches)
Duplexing unit
The PCL 5 escape sequence for paper type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where "n#" is the number of
characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence "Esc&n6WdPlain", "Plain" has 5 letters
plus 1, for a total of 6.
Table 7-6 Media-type commands
Esc&
n#
Wd
Paper type
Esc&
6
Wd
Plain
Esc&
11
Wd
Preprinted
Esc&
11
Wd
Letterhead
Esc&
13
Wd
Transparency1
Esc&
11
Wd
Prepunched
Esc&
7
Wd
Labels
Esc&
5
Wd
Bond
Esc&
9
Wd
Recycled
Esc&
6
Wd
Color
Esc&
6
Wd
Light
Esc&
13
Wd
Intermediate
Esc&
6
Wd
Heavy
Esc&
11
Wd
Cardstock2
Esc&
6
Wd
Rough
Esc&
12
Wd
Tough Paper
Esc&
9
Wd
Envelope
1
You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the control panel.
2
The correct command for cardstock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an
uppercase "S".
ENWW
Media attributes 349
Engineering Details
Media-type commands
Remote firmware updates
The HP LaserJet P3005 printer features remote firmware update (RFU) capability. The method for
downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to download the latest
printing-system software and print drivers.
The process for remotely upgrading firmware involves three steps:
1.
Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the device.
2.
Go to the HP Web site and download the latest firmware to the computer.
3.
Download the new firmware to the device.
Topics:
●
Print a configuration page
●
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site
●
Downloading the new firmware to the device
●
Printer messages during the firmware update
●
Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser
●
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection
●
Remote firmware update through a local MS Windows port
●
Remote firmware update through a USB port
●
Remote firmware update through an MS Windows network
●
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems
●
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command
●
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin
Print a configuration page
To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration page. To print a configuration page,
follow these instructions.
1.
Press theMenu button to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up arrow) or
(select).
3.
Press
4.
Press
5.
Look in the "Printer Information" section on the configuration page for the firmware date code. The
firmware date code looks something like this: 20051002 07.000.0.
(up) or
(the down arrow) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press
(down) to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
(select) to print the configuration page.
350 Chapter 7 Engineering Details
ENWW
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site
The remote firmware update (.RFU) file and an associated readme file are packaged together as a selfextracting .EXE file. For detailed instructions about how to download the .EXE file, go to the following
URL:
www.hp.com/go/ljp3005_firmware
The .EXE file consists of a readme file and the .RFU file.
Downloading the new firmware to the device
For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to www.hp.com/support/
ljp3005.
The device can receive an RFU update when the device is in a READY state. The device waits for all
of the I/O channels to become idle before performing the update.
NOTE If the firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access
memory (NVRAM), any menu settings that are changed from the default settings will return to
default settings. The settings must be changed again if you want them to be different from the
defaults. Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets,
and Web-access alerts.
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the
device to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the
host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (parallel or network). The reinitialization
time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the device, such as the number of EIO devices
installed, the presence of external paper-handling devices, and the amount of memory that is installed.
Finally, any print jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is
processed.
Use one of the methods described in this manual to update the printer firmware.
Printer messages during the firmware update
The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update.
Table 7-7 Troubleshooting a firmware update
ENWW
Cause
Result
The job was cancelled from the control panel.
No update has occurred.
A break in the I/O stream occurred during send (for example,
the parallel cable was removed).
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during the RECEIVING UPGRADE
process.
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during the PERFORMING
UPGRADE process.
No update has occurred. Resend the update through a parallel
port.
A power cycle occurred during the INITIALIZING process.
The update has been completed.
Remote firmware updates 351
Engineering Details
NOTE For UNIX systems, the remote firmware update file is a .TAR file.
Print jobs that are sent to the device while an update is in process do not interrupt the update.
All HP LaserJet devices leave the factory with the most recent firmware version installed. If a remote
firmware update fails in an MS Windows operating system, the .RFU file must be resent.
If a remote firmware update fails in a Macintosh operating system, contact support from an HP Customer
Care Center.
The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective
action required for each situation.
Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure
Reason for firmware update failure
Corrective action
The .RFU file is corrupted.
The device recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update. Download
the file again and send the new file to the device. Download the file from
www.hp.com/go/ljp3005_firmware.
The wrong device is contained in
the .RFU file.
The device recognizes the printer mismatch and rejects the update. Download the
correct file and send it to the device. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/
ljp3005_firmware.
The upgrade was interrupted.
See Table 7-9 Update messages on page 352.
A flash hardware failure occurred.
Although it is extremely unlikely, the device might have a hardware failure. Call
technical support to address the problem (see the flyer that came with the device
for a local telephone support list).
Three messages appear during a normal update process; others (RESEND UPGRADE and RFU LOAD
ERROR) appear only if the update process does not succeed.
Table 7-9 Update messages
Printer message
Explanation
RECEIVING UPGRADE
This message appears from the time the device recognizes the beginning of
an .RFU update until the time the device has verified the validity and integrity of
the .RFU update.
NOTE If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the
firmware is downloaded (while RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the
control-panel display), the firmware file must be sent again. No message
appears on the device control panel to indicate that the update was
interrupted.
PERFORMING UPGRADE
This message appears while the device is actually reprogramming the firmware.
NOTE If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while
PERFORMING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the
update is interrupted and the message RESEND UPGRADE appears on
the control-panel display.
INITIALIZING
This message appears from the time the device has finished reprogramming the
DIMM until the device reinitializes.
RESEND UPGRADE
This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the
RFU process is interrupted. It can also occur if firmware for accessories (such as
the duplex unit or an output device becomes is corrupted. Perform another update
352 Chapter 7 Engineering Details
ENWW
Table 7-9 Update messages (continued)
Printer message
Explanation
by any means that is supported by the printer, regardless of the connection
(network, parallel, or USB).
RFU LOAD ERROR
This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the
print-engine firmware is corrupted.
SEND RFU UPGRADE
If this message appears, the update must now be sent only by a computer that is
attached to the parallel port of the device.
NOTE To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the
control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed.
Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to update the printer firmware by using file transfer protocol (FTP) through
a browser.
NOTE The following instructions can be used on MS Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1.
Make note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Print a configuration
page on page 350
2.
Open a Web browser window.
3.
In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>, where <IPADDRESS> is the TCP/
IP address of your device. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type FTP://
192.168.0.90
4.
Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the device.
5.
Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon or onto any open space in the browser window.
NOTE If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable
folder viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the
following procedure to enable the folder view.
6.
ENWW
a.
Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab.
b.
Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites.
c.
Click OK to save the setting.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351
appear on the control panel.
Remote firmware updates 353
Engineering Details
ON PARALLEL PORT
NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you
see this message.
7.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP LaserJet P3005 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to update
the firmware. Complete the following steps:
1.
Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Print
a configuration page on page 350
NOTE Before connecting to the device, make sure that the device is not in Powersave
mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.
2.
Open a command window on the computer.
3.
Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type ftp 192.168.0.90.
4.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5.
When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
6.
When prompted for the password, press Enter.
7.
Type bin at the command prompt.
8.
Press Enter. The message 200 Type set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the
command window.
9.
Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded
from the Web, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\P3005FW.RFU, and then
press Enter.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type the following path:
put "c:\My Documents\LJ\P3005fw.rfu"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
226 Transfer complete
354 Chapter 7 Engineering Details
ENWW
After these messages appear, a message containing transfer-speed information appears.
10. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351
appear on the control panel.
11. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
12. At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command.
13. At the command prompt, type exit to return to the MS Windows interface.
Remote firmware update through a local MS Windows port
If the device is connected through a local port (parallel), then you can send the .RFU file directly to the
device by using a COPY command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS window.
Topics:
●
Windows 98 SE or Windows Me
●
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
Windows 98 SE or Windows Me
1.
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:
Mode lpt1:,,p
NOTE If the device is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the
correct LPT port number in the mode command.
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3.
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate device
port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\P3005fw.rfu lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, typeC:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\P3005fw.rfu"
lpt1
ENWW
Remote firmware updates 355
Engineering Details
NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you
see this message.
4.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351
appear on the control panel.
NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you
see this message.
6.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
7.
Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The .RFU file can be sent directly to the device by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in
an MS-DOS window.
1.
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME> , where <FILENAME> is the
name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer
port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\P3005fw.rfu lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\P3005fw.rfu"
lpt1
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
3.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351
appear on the control panel.
NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you
see this message.
4.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
5.
At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
356 Chapter 7 Engineering Details
ENWW
Remote firmware update through a USB port
If the device is connected over a USB connection, follow these instructions:
1.
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME>\
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including
the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the device is being shared,
and <SHARENAME> is the device share name. For example, type the following:
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\P3005fw.rfu"
\\your_computer\clj3000
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the
firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears
on the computer screen.
3.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351
appear on the control panel.
NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you
see this message.
4.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update through an MS Windows network
If the device is shared on an MS Windows network, follow these instructions:
1.
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including
the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the device is being shared,
and <SHARENAME> is the device share name. For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\P3005fw.rfu \\your_server\your_computer
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\P3005fw.rfu"
\\your_server\your_computer
ENWW
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the
firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears
on the computer screen.
3.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351
appear on the control panel.
Remote firmware updates 357
Engineering Details
copy /b 3000fw.rfu \\your_computer\clj3000
NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you
see this message.
4.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .TAR file to the device is acceptable,
including the following:
1.
At the command prompt, type cp /home/yourmachine/FILENAME /dev/parallel>, where
</home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the .TAR file.
2.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351
appear on the control panel.
NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you
see this message.
3.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command
NOTE This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003.
Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the LPR command.
1.
From a command window, type lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l
<FILENAME> -OR- lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>, where <IPADDRESS> can
be either the TCP/IP address or the hostname of the device, and where <FILENAME> is the
filename of the .RFU file.
NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L",
not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the
firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel.
3.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351
appear on the control panel.
358 Chapter 7 Engineering Details
ENWW
4.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
5.
Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin
This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 or later on the computer. Complete the
following steps to update a single device through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU file
from the HP Web site.
1.
Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2.
Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the device in the Quick Device Find field, and then
click Go. The device Status window opens.
3.
Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to
the Device Lists folder.
4.
Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the device that you want to update
in the list of devices, and click to select it.
5.
Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select Update
Printer Firmware from the choose action list.
6.
If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images dialog box, click Browse in
the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you
downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.
7.
Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server.
8.
Refresh the browser.
9.
Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.
10. Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the device.
11. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351
appear on the control panel.
NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you
see this message.
12. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
ENWW
Remote firmware updates 359
Engineering Details
NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you
see this message.
HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 and later can also be used to perform multiple or unattended installations.
Complete the following steps for multiple or unattended installations.
1.
Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2.
Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps:
a. Click Device Management, and then click All Devices.
-orb. Shift-click to select devices that are to be included in the group, and then click OK.
-orc. When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click OK.
3.
To modify several products in a group, click the group name, and then click Open.
4.
The drop-down menu for Device Group Tools appears on the right side of the window. Scroll if
necessary to view it.
5.
In the Device Group Tools drop-down box, select an action. Type the appropriate information.
Click Return to Device Group when finished.
360 Chapter 7 Engineering Details
ENWW
Printing print-ready documents
●
HP LaserJet printer control language (.PCL)
●
Portable document format (.PDF)
●
Postscript (.PS)
●
Text (.TXT)
NOTE The examples that are used in this section are for printing .PDF documents. However,
any print-ready file type can be substituted.
Use one of the following methods to send print-ready files to your product:
●
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser
●
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection
●
Print-ready printing by using a local MS Windows port
●
Print-ready file printing in an MS Windows network
●
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems
●
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to print print-ready files directly by using FTP through a browser.
NOTE The following instructions can be used on MS Windows or Macintosh operating
systems.
1.
Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Print
a configuration page on page 350.
2.
Open a browser window.
3.
In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address
of your product is 192.168.0.90, type the following:
FTP:// 192.168.0.90
ENWW
4.
Locate the print-ready file for the product.
5.
Drag and drop the print-ready file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
Printing print-ready documents 361
Engineering Details
Several methods are available for printing documents independently of the original software program
that was used to create the document. Normally, the document is printed by opening the original
application and printing it to a file, or is printed by means of a distribution method such as internet
downloading. The following print-ready file formats can be sent directly to the HP LaserJet P3005 printer
without first opening the original software program:
NOTE If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable folder
viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the following
procedure to enable the folder view.
1.
Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab.
2.
Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites.
3.
Click OK to save the setting.
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP LaserJet P3005 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to print a
print-ready file. Complete the following steps for the operating system:
1.
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the Configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Print a configuration page on page 350.
2.
Open a command window on the computer.
3.
Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type the following:
ftp 192.168.0.90
4.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5.
When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
6.
When prompted for the password, press Enter.
7.
Type bin at the command prompt.
8.
Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in
the command window.
9.
Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file to be printed,
including the path. For example, type the following:
put C:\LJ\P3005FW.PDF
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\P3005FW.PDF"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
10. Press Enter on the keyboard.
11. The print-ready file prints.
362 Chapter 7 Engineering Details
ENWW
12. At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command.
13. At the command prompt, type exit to return to the MS Windows interface.
Print-ready printing by using a local MS Windows port
The procedure for printing directly by using a local MS Windows port depends on the operating system.
●
Windows 98 SE or Windows Me
●
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
Windows 98 SE or Windows Me
1.
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:
Mode lpt1:,,p
NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the
correct LPT port number in the mode command.
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3.
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate
printer port (such as LPT1). For example, at the c:\> command prompt, type the following:
copy /b c:\P3005FW.PDF lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\P3005FW.PDF"
ENWW
4.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel,
and the job prints.
5.
At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
Printing print-ready documents 363
Engineering Details
Topics:
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The print-ready file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt
or in an MS-DOS window.
1.
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate
printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\P3005FW.PDF lpt1
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\P3005FW.PDF". The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the
job prints.
3.
At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
Print-ready file printing in an MS Windows network
If the product is shared on an MS Windows network, complete the following steps.
1.
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file
(including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is
being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\P3005FW.PDF \\your_server\sharename
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\P3005FW.PDF"
\\your_server\sharename
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel,
and the job prints. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the print-ready file to the product is acceptable,
including the following:
At the command prompt, type cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/ dev/parallel>,
where </home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the print-ready file.
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command
NOTE This direct printing method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP,
and Windows Server 2003.
364 Chapter 7 Engineering Details
ENWW
Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the LPR command.
1.
Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Print
a configuration page on page 350.
2.
From a command window, type the following:
where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP address or the host name of the product, and where
FILENAME is the file name of the print-ready file.
NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L",
not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
ENWW
3.
The file prints, but no messages appear in the command prompt window.
4.
Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Printing print-ready documents 365
Engineering Details
lpr -P IPADDRESS -S IPADDRESS -o l FILENAME lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps
<FILENAME>
366 Chapter 7 Engineering Details
ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
% of Normal Size setting
PCL traditional drivers 133
unidrivers 232
A
About button
PCL traditional drivers 162
PS Emulation Driver 179
About tab, unidrivers 268
accessibility
documentation 16
accessories, automatic
configuration 28
ADA (Americans with Disabilities
Act) compliance 16
Add Printer installation 85
Additional Software dialog box,
Customization Wizard 98
administrators
alerts, setting up 331
wake time settings 338
Adobe Acrobat Reader
installing 22
printing PDF files without 361
viewing documentation 15
Adobe Web site 174
Advanced Printing Features setting,
unidrivers 208
Advanced tab, unidrivers 205
alerts
e-mail configuration 331
features 331
alerts, e-mail
HP Embedded Web
Server 41, 42
Macintosh 316
Alternative Letterhead Mode
PCL traditional drivers 171
unidrivers 210
ENWW
Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) compliance 16
application settings
traditional drivers 107
unidrivers 199
ASCII output protocol, PS
Emulation Unidriver 262
asset number 327
autoconfiguration, driver
PCL traditional drivers 172
support for 28
unidrivers 264
autoconfiguration, Enterprise
about 29
Windows support 29
automatic two-sided printing
PCL traditional driver
settings 119
PS Emulation Driver 178
unidrivers 239
autorun CD-ROM, Windows 21
AutoSend 332
availability, Windows software
components 8
B
Back button, Windows installation
dialog boxes 57
Back Cover settings
PCL traditional drivers 147,
150
unidrivers 221, 226
Back to Front printing,
unidrivers 210
Basic Installation
choosing 21
dialog boxes, Windows 59
Basics tab, PCL traditional
drivers 160
bidirectional communication
about 28
Enterprise
AutoConfiguration 29
binary output protocol, PS
Emulation Unidriver 262
binding settings
PCL traditional drivers 122
unidrivers 242
bins
custom paper sizes 144, 219
black, printing all text as
PCL traditional drivers 128,
130
unidrivers 209
Bonjour Settings, Macintosh 318
booklet printing settings
PCL traditional drivers 123
unidrivers 243
both sides, printing on
PCL traditional driver
settings 119
PS Emulation Driver 178
unidrivers 239
Browse for Printer dialog box,
Customization Wizard 90
Bubble help 112
C
Cancel button, Windows installation
dialog boxes 57
cardstock, paper type
commands 349
cartridges
AutoSend feature 332
usage information 326
CD-ROM
directory structure,
Macintosh 273
Index 367
directory structure,
Windows 10
documentation 15, 22
installer, Windows printingsystem software 20
installing Macintosh printingsystem software 277
installing Windows printingsystem software 56
languages, Macintosh 274
languages, Windows 10
Change TCP/IP Settings dialog
box, Windows 75
Check Printer Connection dialog
box, Windows 71
CHM files, viewing 16
Citrix Terminal Server support 8
clock drift correction 337
clock settings 336
collation settings
PCL traditional drivers 167,
171
PS Emulation Driver 190
unidrivers 207, 266
command-line printing,
Windows 361
command-line silent install for
Windows 104
commands, paper
size 347
source 344
type 349
common installer, features 22
components, software
availability 8
Configuration Page, HP Embedded
Web Server 40
Configuration Page, HP
EWS 323
Configuration section, HP
Embedded Web Server 45,
339
Configure Device page, HP
Embedded Web Server 41
Configure Device screen 329
Configure tab, PCL traditional
drivers 164
Confirm Changing Setting dialog
box, Windows 70
368 Index
Confirm Network Settings dialog
box, Windows 69
connectivity
bidirectional communication
support 28
features 5
Printer Connection dialog box,
Windows 63
Searching dialog box,
Windows 65
constraint messages
PCL traditional drivers 111
unidrivers 203
context-sensitive help
PCL traditional drivers 111
PS Emulation Driver 174
unidrivers 203
continuous export 33
control panel
language 335
menus 329
viewing 327
Control Panel screen 327
control panel settings
traditional drivers 107
unidrivers 199
Copy Count settings
PCL traditional drivers 161
PS Emulation Driver 177
unidrivers 207, 266
counts, page 326
covers, use different paper settings
PCL traditional drivers 147
unidrivers 221
Ctrl-D settings 198, 262
Custom Installation
choosing 21
dialog boxes, Windows 59
Custom Installer Location dialog
box, Windows
Customization Wizard 100
custom paper sizes
PCL traditional drivers 141,
348
PCL unidrivers 218, 348
customer support 39
Customization Wizard
dialog boxes 86
D
Date & Time screen 336
Date/Time Format, setting 337
default Print Task Quick Sets
PCL traditional drivers 115
unidrivers 213
default printer, setting 106
deleting job-storage jobs
drivers 316
PCL traditional drivers 159
PS Emulation Driver 190
unidrivers 253
destinations, paper 344
device image 151
Device Information page, HP
Embedded Web Server 38, 41
Device Information screen 327,
335
Device Installer Customization
Wizard 86
device location 327
Device Options tab, PS Emulation
Driver 185
Device Services, unidrivers 256
Device Settings tab,
unidrivers 257
Device Status page, HP Embedded
Web Server 39
Device Status page, HP
EWS 322
diagnostics 35, 255
Diagnostics section, HP Embedded
Web Server 46, 340
dialog boxes, printing-system
software installation
Windows 59
Windows Customization
Wizard 86
dialogs, printing-system software
installation
Mac OS X 278
DIMMs, fonts
PCL traditional driver
settings 169
unidriver settings 260
direct printing
FTP, Windows 362
local port, Windows 363
LPR 364
ENWW
networks, Windows 364
UNIX 364
direct-connect installation 59
directory structure, software CDROM
Macintosh 273
Windows 10
disabling
driver features 33
disk space requirements
Macintosh 272
Windows 6
Document Options
PCL traditional drivers 118
unidrivers 208, 239
document preview image
PCL traditional drivers 125,
133, 151, 162
unidrivers 227, 232, 245
documentation
HP Embedded Web Server User
Guide 17
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide 18
install notes 17
Print Task Quick Set for use
guide, HP Traditional
PCL traditional drivers 118
Print Task Quick Set for use
guide, unidriver 215
User Guide 16
viewing 15, 22
double-sided printing
PCL traditional driver
settings 119
PS Emulation Driver 178
unidriver settings 239
downloading
firmware 351
printing-system software 9
Driver Details dialog box,
Customization Wizard 95
Driver Details dialog box,
Windows 78
Driver Work Space (DWS) 171
drivers
accessory configuration 28
Add Printer installation 85
availability by operating
system 8
ENWW
continuous export feature 33
diagnostics 35
Enterprise
AutoConfiguration 29
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 33
included 23
Linux operating systems 7
lockable features 33, 314
Macintosh 272
media supported 344
network preconfiguration 31
paper source commands 344
Point and Print
installation 105
Print Quality options 126
PS Emulation Driver
features 173
settings 107, 199
standalone 7
UNIX operating systems 8
Update Now 30
version numbers 26
See also PCL traditional drivers;
PS Emulation Driver;
unidrivers
Drivers dialog box, Customization
Wizard 94
Drivers dialog box, Windows 77
Duplex mode, HP Printer Utility,
Macintosh 310
duplex unit
models including 4
duplexing unit
custom paper sizes 144, 219
media supported 347
PCL traditional driver
settings 119, 167
print modes 120
PS Emulation Driver
settings 178, 193
testing Macintosh 310
unidriver configuration 264
unidriver settings 239
DWS (Driver Work Space) 171
E
e-mail
alerts 331
AutoSend 332
outgoing, configuring 331
return address,
configuring 331
server settings 330
e-mail alerts
HP Embedded Web
Server 41, 42
Macintosh 316
E-mail Server page, HP Embedded
Web Server 41
E-mail Server screen 330
Easy Printer Care 36
EconoMode, unidrivers 228
Edit Other Links page, HP
Embedded Web Server 41
Edit Other Links screen 334
Effects tab
PCL traditional drivers 131
unidrivers 229
Embedded Jetdirect page,
printing 38
embedded Web server. See HP
Embedded Web Server
Energy Star compliance 4
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
about 29
Novell NetWare operating
systems 30
Windows operating systems
supported 29
envelopes, paper type
commands 349
escape sequences
paper source 344
paper type 349
Euro symbol 263
event log 38
Event Log screen, HP EWS 325
EWS. See HP Embedded Web
Server
EWS (HP Embedded Web Server )
Device configuration
page 323
Device Status page 322
Event Log 325
Information tab 322
Settings 329
Supplies Status page 324
exporting driver parameters 33
Index 369
External Fonts settings, PCL
unidrivers 260
F
features 3
File to E-mail utility 342
File Upload, Macintosh 305
Finish dialog box, Customization
Wizard 104
Finish dialog box, Windows 83
Finishing tab
PCL traditional drivers 114
unidrivers 237
Firewall Detected dialog box,
Windows 64
firewalls dialog box, Windows 64
firmware
determining current level 350
downloading 351
FTP updates, Windows 354
HP Web Jetadmin
updates 359
LPR command updates 358
Macintosh updates 306
messages during update 351
troubleshooting updates 351
UNIX updates 358
updating remotely 350
verifying installation 353
Windows network
updates 357
Windows, local port
update 355
firmware, updating 328
First Page paper settings
PCL traditional drivers 148
unidrivers 222
Fit to Page settings
PCL Traditional Drivers 132
PS Emulation Driver 190
Flip Pages Up
PCL traditional drivers 122
unidriver settings 242
Font Substitution Table, PS
Emulation Unidriver 259
fonts
DIMM settings, PCL traditional
drivers 169
DIMM settings, unidrivers 260
Euro symbol 263
370 Index
External, PCL unidrivers 260
features 4
PS 3 emulation 174
PS Emulation Driver
settings 181
PS Emulation Unidriver 263
Send TrueType as Bitmap, PCL
traditional drivers 127, 129
substitution table, PS Emulation
Driver 182
substitution table,
unidrivers 259
unidriver settings 207
Upload Fonts, HP Printer
Utility 307
Windows 50, 52
Form to Tray Assignment,
unidrivers 258
Front Cover settings
PCL traditional drivers 147
unidrivers 221
FTP
direct printing, Windows 362
Windows firmware
updates 354
Full Installation
choosing 21
dialog boxes, Windows 59
G
Graphic settings
PCL traditional drivers 129
unidrivers 207
Graphics Mode, HP PCL 5
Unidriver 209
Graphics tab, PS Emulation
Driver 179
grayscale settings, PS Emulation
Unidriver 263
guides. See documentation
H
Halftone settings
PS Emulation Driver 181
hard disk
printer 265
PS Emulation Driver
settings 193
unidriver settings 265
hardware requirements
Macintosh 272
heavy paper, paper type
commands 349
help
Bubble 112
Macintosh 277
PCL traditional drivers 111
PS Emulation Driver 174
unidrivers 203
Help button, Windows installation
dialog boxes 57
HP Device Installer Customization
Wizard 86
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check
Tool 35
HP Driver Preconfiguration
operating systems and drivers
supported 33
status, PCL traditional
drivers 163
HP Easy Printer Care 36
HP Embedded Web Server
about 37
alerts page 41
AutoSend page 41
Configuration Page 40
Configuration section 45, 339
Configure Device page 41
Device Information page 38,
41
Device Status page 39
Diagnostics section 46, 340
documentation 17
E-mail Server page 41
HP Printer Utility, accessing
from 319
HP Web Jetadmin 37
Information tab 38
language, setting 41
links 39, 41
navigation 38
Network settings 45, 339
Networking tab 44, 338
Security page 41, 44
Security section 46, 340
Settings tab 41
time settings 41
user guide 37
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
configuration page 323
Device Status page 322
Event Log screen 325
Information tab 322
Settings 329
Supplies Status page 324
HP EWS, Macintosh
about 320
HP Install Network Printer Wizard
(INPW) 8
HP Instant Support 39
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide 18
HP Jetdirect page, printing 38
HP Network Registry Agent
(HPNRA) 29
HP OpenVMS 8
HP PCL traditional drivers. See PCL
traditional drivers
HP PCL unidrivers. See PCL
unidrivers
HP Printer Utility, Macintosh
about 298
accessing 298, 320
Bonjour Settings 318
Device Information 305
Duplex mode 310
E-mail Alerts 316
Embedded Web Server
access 319
File Upload 305
HP Support 308
Lock Resources 314
Network Settings 317
Supplies Status 301
Tray Configuration 313
Update Firmware 306
Upload Fonts 307
HP PS 3 Emulation Unidriver. See
PS Emulation Unidriver
HP Registration dialog box,
Windows 85
HP Software License Agreement
dialog box, Windows 62
HP Toolbox, not supported 19
HP Traditional postscript level 3
emulation driver. See PS
Emulation Driver
ENWW
HP Web Jetadmin
downloading 22, 47
Driver Preconfiguration
Plugin 31, 32
firmware updates 359
HP Embedded Web
Server 37
HPNRA (HP Network Registry
Agent) 29
HPPJL Encoding 188
HTML files, viewing 16
I
Ignore Application Collation, PCL
traditional drivers 167, 171
inches, settings 145
Include types in application source
list option in drivers 171
Incompatible Print Settings
messages. See constraint
messages
Information tab, HP Embedded
Web Server 38
input trays. See trays
Install Network Printer Wizard
(INPW) 8
install notes 17
Installable Options
PS Emulation Driver 192
PS Emulation Unidriver 264
installation
Add Printer 85
Adobe Acrobat Reader 22
command-line silent 104
Customization Wizard for
Windows 86
dialogs, Mac OS X 278
File to E-mail utility 342
hardware requirements for
Macintosh 272
Macintosh printing-system
software 277
Point and Print 105
pre-existing, modifying 58
system requirements for
Windows 6
Windows printing-system
software 56
Installation Type dialog box,
Windows 76
installers
availability by operating
system 9
common, features 22
customizing 86
Windows 20
Installing dialog box, Customization
Wizard 103
Installing dialog box, Windows 82
Instant Support 39
Internet Services, unidrivers 256
IP address, locating 38
IT administrators
alerts, setting up 331
wake time settings 338
J
Jetadmin. See HP Web Jetadmin
Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide 18
Job Cancel button 333
Job Notification Options
PCL traditional drivers 157
Job storage
enabling in PCL traditional
drivers 169
Macintosh 314
PCL traditional drivers 152
PS Emulation Driver 188,
193
unidriver settings 246, 265
job storage
features 3
Job Timeout settings 196, 263
JPEG Passthrough 267
L
landscape orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 122,
161
PS Emulation Driver 177
unidrivers 242, 245
Language screen 335
Language Selection dialog box,
Customization Wizard 87, 89
Language Selection dialog box,
Windows 60
languages
CD-ROMs, Macintosh 274
CD-ROMs, Windows 10
Index 371
HP Embedded Web
Server 41
Language Selection dialog box,
Windows installation 60
Last Page settings
PCL traditional drivers 149
unidrivers 224
Layout Options
unidrivers 210
Layout settings
PS Emulation Driver 176
letterhead, alternative mode
PCL traditional drivers 171
unidrivers 210
license agreement dialog box,
Windows 62
links 334
links, HP Embedded Web
Server 39, 41
Linux operating systems
driver availability 7
local port command line printing,
Windows 363
localized CD-ROMs
Macintosh 274
Windows 10
lockable features, drivers 33,
314
logging on
password settings 333
LPR commands
firmware updates 358
printing PDF files 364
M
Macintosh operating systems
Bonjour Settings 318
components, software 276
Device Information 305
dialogs, Mac OS X printingsystem software
installation 278
direct printing 361
directory structure, software CDROM 273
e-mail alerts 316
File Upload command 305
hardware requirements 272
HP EWS 320
HP Printer Utility 298
372 Index
install notes 277
installing printing-system
software 277
localized software CDs 274
locking driver features 314
Mac OS 9, not supported 272
Mac OS X Classic, not
supported 272
network settings 317
online help 277
PDEs 276
PPDs 276
setting up devices with Mac OS
X 290
software components 272
stored jobs 314
supplies status 301
support 6
tray configuration 313
uninstalling printing-system
software 297
Update Firmware 306
Upload Fonts 307
manuals. See documentation
margins
PCL 6 driver 347
PS Emulation Driver 178
measurement units 145
media
Usage Page 326
memory
base 3
installation requirements for
Macintosh 272
installation requirements for
Windows operating
systems 6
PCL traditional driver
settings 171
PS Emulation Driver
settings 187
PS Emulation Unidriver
settings 262
unidriver settings 265
menus
control panel 329
messages, constraint
PCL traditional drivers 111
unidrivers 203
Microsoft Point and Print
installation 105
millimeters, settings 145
mirror image, PS Emulation
Driver 181
mobile devices, printing from 328
model number 327
model scripts, UNIX 8
models
features 3
PCL traditional driver
settings 165
moire effect, handling 128, 129
Mopier settings
PCL traditional drivers 167
PS Emulation Driver 193
unidriver 265
More Configuration Options, PCL
traditional drivers 169
More Options, PS Emulation
Driver 178
MS Windows Cluster Server 8
support 8
N
negative image, PS Emulation
Driver 181
Network settings, HP Embedded
Web Server 45, 339
Networking tab, HP Embedded
Web Server 44, 338
networks
direct printing 364
Embedded Jetdirect page,
printing 38
firewalls 64
firmware updates 357
HP Driver Preconfiguration 31
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide 18
HP Web Jetadmin,
downloading 47
Macintosh settings 317
Point and Print
installation 105
TCP/IP Settings, Windows
installation dialog box 75
Windows printing-system
software installation 57
ENWW
Next steps dialog box,
Windows 84
Novell NetWare operating systems,
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 30
number of copies, setting
PCL traditional drivers 161
PS Emulation Driver 177
unidrivers 207, 266
O
ON/OFF schedule 338
online help. See help
operating systems
availability of software
components 8
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 29
standalone drivers 7
support 6
Optimizations option, PCL
unidrivers 208
Optional Paper Sources, PCL
traditional drivers 168
ordering supplies 22
orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 122,
161
PS Emulation Driver 177
unidrivers 242, 245
Other Links area 334
Other Pages paper settings
PCL traditional drivers 149
unidrivers 224
outgoing mail configuration 331
output bins. See bins
Output Protocol settings, PS
Emulation Unidriver 262
Output Settings, PCL traditional
drivers 127, 129
P
page counts 326
Page Order settings
PCL traditional drivers 125
unidrivers 210, 244
page orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 122,
161
ENWW
PS Emulation Driver 177
unidrivers 242, 245
Page Setup tab, PS Emulation
Driver 174
pages per minute 3
Pages per Sheet settings
PCL traditional drivers 124
unidrivers 244
paper
Alternative Letterhead
Mode 171, 210
custom sizes, PCL driver
support 348
custom sizes, PCL traditional
driver settings 141
custom sizes, PCL unidriver
settings 218
Include types in application
source list setting 171
margins 347
Pages per Sheet settings, PCL
traditional drivers 124
Pages per Sheet settings,
unidrivers 244
Print Document On settings,
PCL traditional drivers 132
Print Document On settings,
unidrivers 231
Print on Both Sides settings,
unidrivers 239
Print on Both Sides, PCL
traditional drivers 119
PS Emulation Driver
settings 175
size commands 347
Size is settings, PCL traditional
drivers 140
Size is settings,
unidrivers 217
sizes supported 4
source commands 344
Source is settings, PCL
traditional drivers 145
Source is settings,
unidrivers 219
sources and destinations 344
type commands 349
Type is: settings, PCL traditional
drivers 146
Type is: settings,
unidrivers 220
types and sizes
supported 344
types supported 347
Usage Page 326
Paper Handling Options, PCL
traditional drivers 166
Paper Options
PCL traditional drivers 140
unidrivers 216
Paper tab, PCL traditional
drivers 139
Paper/Output settings,
unidrivers 206
Paper/Quality tab, unidrivers 211
parallel port direct-connect
installation 59
passwords 333
PCL documents, printing 38
PCL files, command-line
printing 361
PCL traditional drivers
About button 162
accessing 109
Alternative Letterhead
Mode 171
Basics tab 160
Booklet Printing 123
Configuration Status 163
Configure tab 164
custom paper sizes 348
device image 151
Document Options 118
document preview
image 125, 133, 151, 162
duplexing unit settings 167
Effects tab 131
Finishing tab 114
Fit to Page settings 132
Graphic settings 129
Help system 111
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 33
Ignore Application
Collation 171
Include types in application
source list setting 171
included 24
Job Storage, enabling 169
Index 373
Job-storage settings 152
margins 347
media supported 344
memory settings 171
Mopier Enabled settings 167
More Configuration
Options 169
operating-system support 8
Optional Paper Sources 168
Output Settings 127, 129
Paper Handling Options 166
Paper Options 140
paper size commands 347
paper source commands 344
Paper tab 139
paper type commands 349
Print Quality Details
settings 126, 128
Print Quality group box 126
Print Task Quick Sets 115
Printer Model box 165
Scale to Fit 132
settings 107
Update Now 30
Update Now button 172
version numbers 26
Watermarks settings 134
PCL unidrivers
% of Normal Size 232
About tab 268
accessing 201
Advanced Printing
Features 208
Advanced tab 205
Alternative Letterhead
Mode 210
Automatic Configuration 264
booklets 243
Copy Count settings 207
custom paper sizes 348
Device Services 256
Device Settings tab 257
Document Options 208, 239
document preview
image 227, 232, 245
duplexing 239
Effects tab 229
External Fonts settings 260
features 199
Finishing tab 237
374 Index
Flip Pages Up 242
Font DIMM Installer 260
Font Substitution Table 259
Form to Tray Assignment 258
Graphic setting 207
Graphics Mode 209
Help system 203
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 33
included 24
Installable Options
settings 264
Job-storage settings 246
Layout Options 210
media supported 344
Mopier settings 265
Pages per Sheet 244
Paper Options 216
paper size commands 347
paper type commands 349
Paper/Output settings 206
Paper/Quality tab 211
Print Optimizations option 208
Print Quality settings 227
Print Task Quick Sets 212
Printer Features 209
Printing Preferences tab 201
Properties tab 202
Resizing Options settings 231
Scale to Fit 231
Services tab 255
TrueType font settings 207
unidrivers 256
Update Now 30
version numbers 26
Watermarks settings 232
PDEs (Printer Dialog
Extensions) 276
PDF files
command-line printing 361
installing Adobe Acrobat
Reader 22
LPR commands, printing 364
Macintosh, File Upload
command 305
printing using HP Embedded
Web Server 38
viewing 16
PDF files, printing 328
Percentage of Normal Size setting
PCL traditional drivers 133
unidrivers 232
PINs, private jobs
PCL traditional drivers 157
unidrivers 250, 251
Point and Print installation,
Windows printing-system
software 105
Port Creation Options dialog box,
Customization Wizard 93
port selection dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 90
portrait orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 122,
161
PS Emulation Driver 177
unidrivers 242, 245
ports, included 5
PostScript Device settings, PS
Emulation Unidriver 261
postscript documents, printing 38
PostScript Options,
unidrivers 208
PostScript Passthrough 266
Postscript printer description (PPD)
files 276
PostScript tab
Advanced button 196
bitmap compression 197
Ctrl-D settings 198
data format 198
error information 196
header 196
language level 197
output format 195
PS Emulation Driver 194
timeout value 196
power, setting wake time 338
PPD (postscript printer description)
files 276
pre-existing installation,
modifying 58
preconfiguration, driver 31
preview image, document
PCL traditional drivers 125,
133, 151, 162
unidrivers 245
ENWW
Print All Text as Black
PCL traditional drivers 128,
130
unidrivers 209
print cartridges
AutoSend feature 332
usage information 326
Print Document On settings
PCL traditional drivers 132
unidrivers 231
print modes 120
Print on Both Sides
PCL traditional driver
settings 119
PS Emulation Driver 178
unidriver settings 239
Print Optimizations option, PCL
unidrivers 208
Print Page Borders settings
PCL traditional drivers 124
unidrivers 244
Print Quality Details, PCL traditional
drivers 126, 128
Print Quality settings
PCL traditional drivers 126
PS Emulation Driver 190
unidrivers 227
Print screen 328
Print Task Quick Sets, PCL
traditional drivers
about 115
defaults 115
use guide 118
Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers
about 212
custom 216
defaults 213
use guide 215
print-ready files
command-line printing 361
printing by FTP 361
printing by local Windows
port 363
printing by Windows
network 364
printing in UNIX systems 364
printing using HP Embedded
Web Server 38
printing with LPR
command 364
ENWW
Printer Connection dialog box, Full
Installation 63
printer control panel settings
traditional drivers 107
unidrivers 199
Printer Dialog Extensions
(PDEs) 276
Printer Driver Test Page dialog box,
Windows 84
Printer Features, unidrivers 209
Printer Found dialog box,
Windows 67, 68
Printer Model
features 3
PCL traditional driver
settings 165
Printer Not Found dialog box,
Windows 66
Printer Port dialog box,
Customization Wizard 90
Printer Properties dialog box,
Customization Wizard 101
Printer Properties dialog box,
Windows 79
Printer Settings dialog box,
Windows 73
printer, setting default 106
printing
direct in a Windows
network 364
direct in UNIX 364
direct using FTP 361
direct using local Windows
port 363
direct using LPR
command 364
files using HP Embedded Web
Server 38
User Guide 17
printing files 328, 329
Printing Preferences tabs 201
Private job settings
PCL traditional drivers 156
unidrivers 250
PRN files 328
PRN files, printing 38
product support 39
Proof and Hold job settings
PCL traditional drivers 155
unidrivers 249
Properties tabs
unidrivers 202
protocols
PS Emulation Unidriver 262
Windows installation dialog
box 75
PS 3 font emulation 174
PS Emulation Driver
About 179
accessing 173
collation settings 190
context-sensitive help 174
copies, number of 177
Device Options tab 185
features 173
Fit to Page 190
Fonts tab 181
Graphics tab 179
halftone settings 181
Help system 174
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 33
HPPJL Encoding 188
included 24
Installable Options 192
job-storage settings 188, 193
Layout settings 176
media supported 344
memory settings 187
mirror image, printing 181
Mopier Mode 193
More Options 178
negative image, printing 181
operating-system support 9
Page Setup tab 174
Postscript tab 194
Printer features group
box 187
Printing on Both Sides 178
PS 3 font emulation 174
resolution settings 180
Scaling control 181
tray settings 177
Unprintable Area 178
version number 26
Watermark settings 191
Watermarks settings 191
Window duplexing unit
settings 193
PS emulation fonts 52
Index 375
PS Emulation Unidriver
% of Normal Size 232
About tab 268
accessing 201
Advanced Printing
Features 208
Advanced tab 205
Alternative Letterhead
Mode 210
Automatic Configuration 264
booklets 243
Copy Count settings 207
Ctrl-D settings 262
Device Services 256
Device Settings tab 257
Document Options 208, 239
document preview
image 227, 232, 245
duplexing 239
Effects tab 229
features 199
Finishing tab 237
Flip Pages Up 242
Font DIMM Installer 260
font settings 263
Font Substitution Table 259
Form to Tray Assignment 258
Graphic setting 207
Help system 203
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 33
included 24
Installable Options
settings 264
Internet Services 256
JEPG Passthrough 267
Job-storage settings 246
Layout Options 210
media supported 344
Mopier settings 265
operating-system support 8
Output Protocol settings 262
Pages per Sheet 244
Paper Options 216
Paper/Output settings 206
Paper/Quality tab 211
PostScript Device
settings 261
PostScript Memory
settings 262
376 Index
PostScript Options 208
PostScript Passthrough 266
Print Quality settings 227
Print Task Quick Sets 212
Printer Features 209
Printing Preferences tabs 201
Properties tabs 202
Resizing Options settings 231
Scale to Fit 231
Services tab 255
timeout settings 263
TrueType font settings 207
version number 26
Watermarks settings 232
PS files, command-line
printing 361
PS files, printing 328
Q
quality settings. See Print Quality
settings
Quick Sets. See Print Task Quick
Sets
R
Ready to Create Installer dialog
box 101
Ready to Install dialog box,
Windows 79
regional versions, CD-ROMs
Macintosh 274
Windows 10
Registration dialog box,
Windows 85
releasing job-storage jobs
drivers 315
PCL traditional drivers 158
PS Emulation Driver 189
unidrivers 253
remote configuration 329
remote firmware updates
about 350
determining current firmware
level 350
downloading 351
FTP, Windows 354
HP Web Jetadmin 359
LPR commands 358
Macintosh 306
messages 351
troubleshooting 351
UNIX 358
verifying installation 353
Windows network 357
Windows, using local port 355
Resizing Options
unidriver settings 231
resolution
PCL traditional driver
settings 127, 129
PS Emulation Driver
settings 180
unidriver settings 227
return e-mail address 331
RFU. See remote firmware updates
S
SAP printing 8
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
feature 128, 129
Scale to Fit setting
PCL traditional drivers 132
unidrivers 231
Scaling control, PS Emulation
Driver 181
screen-readable
documentation 16
Searching dialog box,
Windows 65
security
settings, general 333
Security page, HP Embedded Web
Server 41, 44
Security screen 333
Security section, HP Embedded
Web Server 46, 340
Send Ctrl-D settings 198, 262
Send TrueType as Bitmaps
PCL traditional drivers 127,
129
serial number 38, 327
service providers
alerts, setting up 331
Services tab 255
Set Port Name dialog box,
Windows 74
settings
continuous export 33
locking 33
overriding 107, 199
ENWW
Print Task Quick Sets,
PCL traditional drivers 115
Print Task Quick Sets,
unidrivers 212
Settings tab, HP Embedded Web
Server 41
Settings tab, HP EWS 329
Settings tab, HP EWS Device
Configuration utility 329
shutdown, setting wake time 338
silent installation
command-line 104
Customization Wizard 86
sizes, paper
commands 347
custom 348
margins 347
PCL Traditional Driver
settings 140
Print on Both Sides settings,
unidrivers 239
Print on Both sides, PCL
traditional drivers 119
PS Emulation Driver
settings 175
supported 344
unidriver settings 217
sleep mode 3
smart duplexing 239
Source is settings
PCL traditional drivers 145
PS Emulation Driver 177
unidrivers 219
sources, paper. See trays
Specify Printer dialog box,
Windows 72
Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box,
Customization Wizard 92
speed specifications 3
standalone drivers 7
status
alerts 331
devices 39
Macintosh supplies 301
supplies 38
Status tab, HP EWS 322
storage, job
enabling in PCL traditional
drivers 169
Macintosh 314
ENWW
PCL traditional drivers 152
PS Emulation Driver 188,
193
unidriver settings 246, 265
substitution table for fonts, PS
Emulation Driver 182
supplies
AutoSend feature 332
AutoSend page, HP Embedded
Web Server 41
features 5
Macintosh status 301
ordering 22
usage AutoSend page 41
usage information 326
viewing status 38
Supplies Status page, HP
EWS 324
Support tab, HP Printer
Utility 308
support, product 39
system requirements
Windows 6
T
TBCP output protocol, PS
Emulation Unidriver 262
TCP/IP address
e-mail configuration 331
locating 327
TCP/IP address, locating 38
Test Page dialog box,
Windows 84
text files, command-line
printing 361
text files, printing 328
text, printing all as black
PCL traditional drivers 128,
130
unidriver 209
time settings 336
time settings, HP Embedded Web
Server 41
timeout settings 196, 263
Toolbox, not supported 19
traditional drivers. See PCL
traditional drivers; PS Emulation
Driver
transparencies, paper type
commands 349
trays
Alternative Letterhead
Mode 171, 210
autoconfiguration 28
custom paper sizes 144, 219
included 5, 344
Installable Options, PS
Emulation Driver 192
Macintosh configuration 313
media supported 4, 347
paper source commands 344
paper type commands 349
PCL traditional driver
settings 168
PS Emulation Driver
settings 177
Source is settings, PCL
traditional drivers 145
Source is settings,
unidrivers 219
unidriver configuration 264
unidriver Form to Tray
Assignment 258
Usage Page 326
troubleshooting
duplexing unit, Macintosh 310
File to E-mail utility 342
firmware upgrades 351
HP driver Diagnostic Printer
Check Tool 35
Services tab, unidrivers 255
Tru64 UNIX printing 8
TrueType font settings
PS Emulation Unidriver 263
Send as Bitmap, PCL traditional
drivers 127, 129
substitution table, PS Emulation
Driver 182
unidrivers 207
two-sided printing
PCL traditional driver
settings 119
PS Emulation Driver 178
unidriver settings 239
TXT files, command-line
printing 361
Type is settings
PCL traditional drivers 146
unidrivers 220
Index 377
types, paper
Include in application source list
setting 171
PCL traditional drivers
settings 146
Print on Both Sides settings,
unidrivers 239
Print on Both sides, PCL
traditional drivers 119
supported 347
unidriver settings 220
U
unattended installation
command-line 104
Customization Wizard 86
unidrivers
% of Normal Size 232
About tab 268
accessing 201
Advanced Printing
Features 208
Advanced tab 205
Alternative Letterhead
Mode 210
Automatic Configuration 264
automatic configuration 30
booklets 243
constraint messages 203
Copy Count settings 207
custom paper sizes 348
Device Services 256
Device Settings tab 257
Document Options 208, 239
document preview
image 227, 232, 245
duplexing 239
Effects tab 229
features 199
Finishing tab 237
Flip Pages Up 242
Font DIMM Installer 260
font settings 260
Font Substitution Table 259
Form to Tray Assignment 258
Graphic setting 207
Graphics Mode 209
Help system 203
HP Driver Preconfiguration 33
378 Index
Installable Options
settings 264
Internet Services 256
Job-storage settings 246
JPEG Passthrough 267
Layout Options 210
media supported 344
Mopier settings 265
Pages per Sheet 244
Paper Options 216
paper size commands 347
paper type commands 349
Paper/Output settings 206
Paper/Quality tab 211
PostScript Options 208
PostScript Passthrough 266
Print Quality settings 227
Print Task Quick Sets 212
Printer Features 209
Printing Preferences tabs 201
Properties tabs 202
Resizing Options settings 231
Scale to Fit 231
Services tab 255
TrueType font settings 207
Update Now 30
version numbers 26
Watermarks settings 232
uninstallation
Macintosh printing
system 297
units of measurement 145
UNIX operating systems
direct printing 364
driver availability 8
print-ready printing 364
remote firmware update 358
Web site for 6
Unprintable Area, PS Emulation
Driver 178
Update Now feature 29, 30, 172
updating firmware 328
updating firmware remotely. See
remote firmware updates
usage information,
AutoSend 332
Usage Page 326
usage page 38
USB direct-connect
installation 59
Use Different Paper, PCL traditional
drivers 147
Use Different Paper/Covers,
unidrivers 221
User Guide 16
user name 333
User Name, stored jobs
PCL traditional drivers 157
unidrivers 251
V
version numbers, drivers 26
W
Wait Timeout settings 196, 263
Wake Time screen 338
wake time, setting 3
Watermarks settings
PCL traditional drivers 134
PS Emulation Driver 191
unidrivers 232
Web Jetadmin. See HP Web
Jetadmin
Web sites
Adobe 174
Citrix Terminal server
support 8
downloading software 9
firmware download 351
firmware updates 328
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer
Check Tool 35
HP Easy Printer Care 36
HP Embedded Web Server
links 39, 41
HP Embedded Web Server user
guide 37
HP OpenVMS 8
HP Web Jetadmin,
downloading 47
Linux product support 6
Macintosh software 273
SAP printing 8
support links 22
Tru64 UNIX printing 8
UNIX model scripts 8
UNIX support 6
Welcome dialog box,
Customization Wizard 88
ENWW
Welcome dialog box, Windows
installation
Full Installation 61
What's this? Help
PS Emulation Driver 174
unidrivers 203
Windows operating systems
Add Printer installation 85
availability of software
components 8
CD-ROM, print system 20
default printer, setting 106
dialog boxes 59
direct printing, FTP 361
direct printing, local port 363
direct printing, networks 364
directory structure, software CDROM 10
driver versions 26
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 29
fonts supported 50
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 33
Installer Customization
Wizard 86
installers 9
installing printing software 56
LPR commands 364
Point and Print
installation 105
PS Emulation Driver
features 173
PS emulation fonts
supported 52
remote firmware update 355
support 6
system requirements 6
unidriver features 199
ENWW
Index 379
380 Index
ENWW
© 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement